Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preface
Thank you for choosing DELTA’s high-performance VFD-VE Series. The VFD-VE Series is
manufactured with high-quality components and materials and incorporates the latest
microprocessor technology available.
This manual is to be used for the installation, parameter setting, troubleshooting, and daily
maintenance of the AC motor drive. To guarantee safe operation of the equipment, read the following
safety guidelines before connecting power to the AC motor drive. Keep this operating manual at
hand and distribute to all users for reference.
To ensure the safety of operators and equipment, only qualified personnel familiar with AC motor
drive are to do installation, start-up and maintenance. Always read this manual thoroughly before
using VFD-VE series AC Motor Drive, especially the WARNING, DANGER and CAUTION notes.
Failure to comply may result in personal injury and equipment damage. If you have any questions,
please contact your dealer.
PLEASE READ PRIOR TO INSTALLATION FOR SAFETY.
DANGER!
1.
AC input power must be disconnected before any wiring to the AC motor drive is made.
A charge may still remain in the DC-link capacitors with hazardous voltages, even if the power
has been turned off. To prevent personal injury, please ensure that power has turned off before
opening the AC motor drive and wait ten minutes for the capacitors to discharge to safe voltage
levels.
2.
3.
4.
Never reassemble internal components or wiring.
The AC motor drive may be destroyed beyond repair if incorrect cables are connected to the
input/output terminals. Never connect the AC motor drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and
W/T3 directly to the AC mains circuit power supply.
5.
Ground the VFD-VE using the ground terminal. The grounding method must comply with the
laws of the country where the AC motor drive is to be installed. Refer to the Basic Wiring
Diagram.
6.
7.
VFD-VE series is used only to control variable speed of 3-phase induction motors, NOT for 1-
phase motors or other purpose.
VFD-VE series shall NOT be used for life support equipment or any life safety situation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING!
1.
2.
DO NOT use Hi-pot test for internal components. The semi-conductor used in AC motor drive
easily damage by high-voltage.
There are highly sensitive MOS components on the printed circuit boards. These components
are especially sensitive to static electricity. To prevent damage to these components, do not
touch these components or the circuit boards with metal objects or your bare hands.
Only qualified persons are allowed to install, wire and maintain AC motor drives.
3.
CAUTION!
1.
2.
Some parameters settings can cause the motor to run immediately after applying power.
DO NOT install the AC motor drive in a place subjected to high temperature, direct sunlight,
high humidity, excessive vibration, corrosive gases or liquids, or airborne dust or metallic
particles.
3.
4.
5.
Only use AC motor drives within specification. Failure to comply may result in fire, explosion or
electric shock.
To prevent personal injury, please keep children and unqualified people away from the
equipment.
When the motor cable between AC motor drive and motor is too long, the layer insulation of the
motor may be damaged. Please use a frequency inverter duty motor or add an AC output
reactor to prevent damage to the motor. Refer to appendix B Reactor for details.
The rated voltage for AC motor drive must be ≤ 240V (≤ 480V for 460V models) and the mains
supply current capacity must be ≤ 5000A RMS (≤10000A RMS for the ≥ 40hp (30kW) models).
6.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Table of Contents.......................................................................................... iii
Chapter 1 Introduction................................................................................1-1
1.1 Receiving and Inspection ................................................................... 1-2
2.2 External Wiring................................................................................... 2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.2 Start-up...............................................................................................3-6
3.2.2 Trial Run......................................................................................3-8
4.2.1 Version 2.02..............................................................................4-26
4.2.2 Version 2.04..............................................................................4-26
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting.........................................................................5-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.1 Fault Code Information....................................................................... 6-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Introduction
The AC motor drive should be kept in the shipping carton or crate before installation. In order to
retain the warranty coverage, the AC motor drive should be stored properly when it is not to be used
for an extended period of time. Storage conditions are:
CAUTION!
1.
Store in a clean and dry location free from direct sunlight or corrosive fumes.
Store within an ambient temperature range of -10 °C to +40 °C.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Store within a relative humidity range of 0% to 90% and non-condensing environment.
Store within an air pressure range of 86 kPA to 106kPA.
DO NOT place on the ground directly. It should be stored properly. Moreover, if the surrounding
environment is humid, you should put exsiccator in the package.
6.
7.
DO NOT store in an area with rapid changes in temperature. It may cause condensation and
frost.
If the AC motor drive is stored for more than 3 months, the temperature should not be higher
than 30 °C. Storage longer than one year is not recommended, it could result in the degradation
of the electrolytic capacitors.
8.
When the AC motor drive is not used for longer time after installation on building sites or places
with humidity and dust, it’s best to move the AC motor drive to an environment as stated above.
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
1-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Introduction|
1.1 Receiving and Inspection
This VFD-VE AC motor drive has gone through rigorous quality control tests at the factory before
shipment. After receiving the AC motor drive, please check for the following:
„
Check to make sure that the package includes an AC motor drive, the User Manual/Quick
Start and CD.
„
„
Inspect the unit to assure it was not damaged during shipment.
Make sure that the part number indicated on the nameplate corresponds with the part
number of your order.
1.1.1 Nameplate Information
Example for 5HP/3.7kW 3-phase 230V AC motor drive
AC Drive Model
MODE
: VFD037V23A-2
INPUT
OUTPUT
Freq. Range : 0.00~600.00Hz
ENCLOSURE: TYPE 1
: 3PH 200-240V 50/60Hz 19.6A
: 3PH 0-240V 17A 6.5kVA 5HP
Input Spec.
Output Spec.
Output Frequency Range
Enclosure type
Serial Number & Bar Code
037V23A2T6360001
1.1.2 Model Explanation
VFD 037 V 23 A-2
VFD-VE Series
Version Type
Mains Input Voltage
23:230V Three phase 43:460V Three phase
Vector Series
Applicable motor capacity
007: 1 HP(0.7kW)
150: 20HP(15kW)
022: 3 HP(2.2kW)
037: 5 HP(3.7kW)
220: 30 HP(22kW)
300: 40HP(30kW)
055: 7.5HP(5.5kW) 370: 50 HP(37kW)
075: 10 HP(7.5kW) 450: 60HP(45kW)
110: 15 HP(11kW)
550: 75HP(55kW)
750: 100HP(75kW)
Series Name (
V
ariable
F
requency
Drive)
1-2
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Introduction|
1.1.3 Series Number Explanation
037V23A2 T 7 36
Production number
Production week
Production year 2007
Production factory
(T: Taoyuan, W: Wujian)
230V 3-phase 5HP(3.7kW)
Model
If the nameplate information does not correspond to your purchase order or if there are
any problems, please contact your distributor.
1.1.4 Drive Frames and Appearances
1-5HP/0.75-3.7kW (Frame B)
7.5-15HP/5.5-11kW (Frame C)
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Introduction|
15-30HP/11-22kW (Frame D)
40-100HP/30-75kW (Frame E)
Frame Power range
Models
VFD007V23A/43A-2, VFD015V23A/43A-2,
VFD022V23A/43A-2
B (B1) 1-3hp (0.75-2.2kW)
B (B2) 5hp (3.7kW)
VFD037V23A/43A-2
C
7.5-15hp (5.5-11kW) VFD055V23A/43A-2, VFD075V23A/43A-2, VFD110V43B-2
VFD110V23A/43A-2, VFD150V23A/43A-2,
15-30hp (11-22kW)
D
VFD185V23A/43A-2, VFD220V23A/43A-2
E (E1) 40-60hp (30-45kW)
E (E2) 40-100hp (30-75kW)
VFD300V43A-2, VFD370V43A-2, VFD450V43A-2
VFD300V23A-2, VFD370V23A-2, VFD550V43C-2,
VFD750V43C-2
Please refer to Chapter 1.3 for exact dimensions.
1.2 Preparation for Installation and Wiring
1.2.1 Ambient Conditions
Install the AC motor drive in an environment with the following conditions:
1-4
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Introduction|
Air Temperature:
Relative Humidity:
-10 ~ +40°C (14 ~ 122°F)
<90%, no condensation allowed
86 ~ 106 kPa
Atmosphere
pressure:
Operation
Installation Site
Altitude:
<1000m
<20Hz: 9.80 m/s2 (1G) max
Vibration:
20 ~ 50Hz: 5.88 m/s2 (0.6G) max
Temperature:
-20°C ~ +60°C (-4°F ~ 140°F)
<90%, no condensation allowed
86 ~ 106 kPa
Relative Humidity:
Storage
Transportation
Atmosphere
pressure:
<20Hz: 9.80 m/s2 (1G) max
Vibration:
20 ~ 50Hz: 5.88 m/s2 (0.6G) max
Pollution Degree 2: good for a factory type environment.
Minimum Mounting Clearances
H
Air Flow
FWD
RE
PROG
DAT
V
A
W
W
H
W
H
HP
mm (inch)
50 (2)
75 (3)
75 (3)
mm (inch)
150 (6)
175 (7)
200 (8)
250 (10)
1-5HP
7.5-20HP
25-75HP
100HP and above
75 (3)
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Introduction|
CAUTION!
1.
Operating, storing or transporting the AC motor drive outside these conditions may cause
damage to the AC motor drive.
2.
3.
Failure to observe these precautions may void the warranty!
Mount the AC motor drive vertically on a flat vertical surface object by screws. Other directions
are not allowed.
4.
5.
6.
The AC motor drive will generate heat during operation. Allow sufficient space around the unit
for heat dissipation.
The heat sink temperature may rise to 90°C when running. The material on which the AC motor
drive is mounted must be noncombustible and be able to withstand this high temperature.
When AC motor drive is installed in a confined space (e.g. cabinet), the surrounding
temperature must be within -10 ~ 40°C with good ventilation. DO NOT install the AC motor
drive in a space with bad ventilation.
7.
8.
When installing multiple AC more drives in the same cabinet, they should be adjacent in a row
with enough space in-between. When installing one AC motor drive below another one, use a
metal separation between the AC motor drives to prevent mutual heating.
Prevent fiber particles, scraps of paper, saw dust, metal particles, etc. from adhering to the
heatsink.
1.2.2 Remove Keypad
1-5HP/0.75-3.7kW (Frame B)
7.5-15HP/5.5-11kW (Frame C)
1-6
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Introduction|
15-30HP/11-22kW (Frame D)
40-100HP/30-75kW (Frame E)
1.2.4 Lifting
Please carry only fully assembled AC motor drives as shown in the following.
For 40-100HP (Frame E and E1)
Step 1
Step 2
1-8
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Introduction|
Frame B
D
W
W1
D1
D2
S2
Unit: mm[inch]
Frame
W
W1
H
H1
D
D1
D2
S1
S2
150.0
[5.91]
135.0
[5.32]
260.0
244.3
[9.63]
160.2
[6.31]
67.0
4.0
8.0
6.5
B1
[10.24]
[2.64]
[0.16]
[0.32]
[0.26]
150.0
[5.91]
135.0
[5.32]
272.1
244.3
[9.63]
183.7
[7.24]
67.0
4.0
8.0
6.5
B2
[10.72]
[2.64]
[0.16]
[0.32]
[0.26]
NOTE
Frame B1: VFD007V23A/43A-2, VFD015V23A/43A-2, VFD022V23A/43A-2
Frame B2: VFD037V23A/43A-2
1-10
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Introduction|
Frame C
W
D
W1
S1
S2
Unit: mm[inch]
Frame
W
W1
H
H1
D
-
-
-
-
S1
S2
200.0
[7.88]
185.6
[7.31]
323.0
244.3
[9.63]
160.2
[6.31]
7.0
7.0
C
[12.73]
[0.28]
[0.28]
NOTE
Frame C: VFD055V23A/43A-2, VFD075V23A/43A-2, VFD110V43B-2
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Introduction|
Frame D
D
W
W1
D1
D2
S1
Unit: mm[inch]
Frame
W
W1
H
H1
D
D1
D2
S1
-
-
250.0
[9.85]
226.0
[8.90]
408.2
384.0
205.4
[8.08]
110.0
[4.33]
10.0
10.0
D
[16.07] [15.13]
[0.39]
[0.39]
NOTE
Frame D: VFD110V23A/43A-2, VFD150V23A/43A-2, VFD185V23A/43A-2, VFD220V23A/43A-2
1-12
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Introduction|
Frame E
W
D
W1
D1
S3
D2
S2
S1
Unit: mm[inch]
Frame
W
W1
H
-
H1
H2
D
D1
D2
S1
S2
S3
370.0 335.0
[14.57] [13.19]
589.0 560.0 260.0 132.5 18.0
13.0
13.0
18.0
E1
[23.19] [22.05] [10.24] [5.22] [0.71] [0.51] [0.51] [0.71]
370.0 335.0 595.0 589.0 560.0 260.0 132.5 18.0
13.0 13.0 18.0
E2
[14.57] [13.19] [23.43] [23.19] [22.05] [10.24] [5.22] [0.71] [0.51] [0.51] [0.71]
NOTE
Frame E1: VFD300V43A-2, VFD370V43A-2, VFD450V43A-2
Frame E2: VFD300V23A-2, VFD370V23A-2, VFD550V43C-2, VFD750V43C-2
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Introduction|
This page intentionally left blank
1-14
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring
After removing the front cover (see chapter 1.2.3 for details), check if the power and control terminals
are clear. Be sure to observe the following precautions when wiring.
„
General Wiring Information
Applicable Codes
All VFD-VE series are Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) and Canadian Underwriters
Laboratories (cUL) listed, and therefore comply with the requirements of the National
Electrical Code (NEC) and the Canadian Electrical Code (CEC).
Installation intended to meet the UL and cUL requirements must follow the instructions
provided in “Wiring Notes” as a minimum standard. Follow all local codes that exceed UL
and cUL requirements. Refer to the technical data label affixed to the AC motor drive and
the motor nameplate for electrical data.
The "Line Fuse Specification" in Appendix B, lists the recommended fuse part number for
each VFD-VE Series part number. These fuses (or equivalent) must be used on all
installations where compliance with U.L. standards is a required.
CAUTION!
1.
2.
Make sure that power is only applied to the R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 terminals. Failure to comply may
result in damage to the equipment. The voltage and current should lie within the range as
indicated on the nameplate.
Check following items after finishing the wiring:
A. Are all connections correct?
B. No loose wires?
C. No short-circuits between terminals or to ground?
DANGER!
1.
A charge may still remain in the DC bus capacitors with hazardous voltages even if the power
has been turned off. To prevent personal injury, please ensure that the power is turned off and
wait ten minutes for the capacitors to discharge to safe voltage levels before opening the AC
motor drive.
2.
3.
4.
All the units must be grounded directly to a common ground terminal to prevent lightning strike
or electric shock.
Only qualified personnel familiar with AC motor drives is allowed to perform installation, wiring
and commissioning.
Make sure that the power is off before doing any wiring to prevent electric shock.
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
2-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
2.1 Wiring
Users must connect wires according to the circuit diagrams on the following pages. Do not plug a
modem or telephone line to the RS-485 communication port or permanent damage may result. The
pins 1 & 2 are the power supply for the optional copy keypad KPV-CE01 only and should not be used
for RS-485 communication.
Figure 1 for models of VFD-VE Series (15 HP/11kW and below)
VFD007V23A/43A-2, VFD015V23A/43A-2, VFD022V23A/43A-2, VFD037V23A/43A-2,
VFD055V23A/43A-2, VFD075V23A/43A-2, VFD110V43B-2, VFD110V23A/43A-2
DC choke
(optional)
Brake resistor
(optional)
Jumper
Fuse/NFB(No Fuse Breaker)
+1
B2
U(T1)
V(T2)
Motor
+2/B1
-
R(L1)
S(L2)
T(L3)
R(L1)
IM
3~
S(L2)
T(L3)
E
W(T3)
E
Recommended Circuit
SA
ON
when power supply
is turned OFF by a
fault output.
If the fault occurs, the
contact will be ON to turn
RB
RC
RA
RB
MC
OFF
Multi-function contact output 1
(relay)
factory setting: fault indication
MC
off the power and protect the power system.
RC
+24V
FWD
REV
MI1
FWD/STOP
MRA
Factory setting:
Multi-function contact output 2
(relay)
48VDC 50mA
SINK Mode
REV/STOP
Multi-step 1
Sink
MRC
Sw1
factory setting:
Factory
setting
indicates that it is running
Multi-function contact output 3
(photocoupler)
Source
Please refer to
Multi-step 2
Multi-step 3
Multi-step 4
No function
No function
MO1
MI2
Figure 3 for wiring
of SINK mode and
SOURCEmode.
MI3
MI4
Multi-function contact output 4
(photocoupler)
MO2
MI5
MI6
Multi-function
Photocoupler Output
Digital Signal Common
DCM
E
MCM
DFM
* Don't apply the mains voltage directly
to above terminals.
Digital Frequency Output
Ter minal
factory setting: 1:1
+10V
ACI current/voltage selection
Power supply
+10V 20mA
3
ACI Switch
Duty=50%, 10VDC
Make sure that power is OFF
before changing the switch
setting.
AVI
Digital Signal Common
DFM output signal selection
DFM Switch
Make sure that power is OFF
before changing the switch
setting.
2
5K
Master Frequency
DCM
0 to 10V 47k
1
0-20mA
0-10V
ACI
4~20mA/0~10V
AUI
-10~+10V
ACM
TP
OC
Analog Signal Common
E
Analog Multi-function Output Terminal
AFM analog output selection
AFM Switch
AFM
RS-485 serial communication
1: +EV
0~10VDC/2mA
Make sure that power is OFF
before changing the switch
setting.
2: GND
3: SG-
4: SG+
5: NC
For communication,
it needs to use
VFD-USB01/IFD8500
ACM
Analog Signal common
E
0-10V
0-20mA
to connect to PC.
6: NC
Main circuit (power) terminals
Control circuit terminals
Shielded leads & Cable
NOTE
The brake resistor is built-in to model VFD110V43B.
2-2
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
Figure 2 for models of VFD-VE Series (20HP/15kW and above)
VFD150V23A/43A-2, VFD185V23A/43A-2, VFD220V23A/43A-2, VFD300V43A-2, VFD370V43A-2,
VFD450V43A-2, VFD300V23A-2, VFD370V23A-2, VFD550V43C-2, VFD750V43C-2
DC choke brake unit
(optional) (optional)
brake resistor
VFDB
(optional)
Jumper
-(minus sign)
Fuse/NFB(No Fuse Breaker)
Motor
+1
+2
R(L1)
S(L2)
T(L3)
R(L1)
U(T1)
V(T2)
IM
3~
S(L2)
T(L3)
E
W(T3)
E
Recommended Circuit
when power supply
is turned OFF by a
fault output.
If the fault occurs, the
SA
RB
RC
RA
RB
MC
ON
Multi-function contact output 1
(relay)
OFF
MC
contact will be ON to turn
off the power and protect the power system.
FWD/STOP
factory setting: fault indication
RC
+24V
FWD
REV
MI1
MRA
Factory setting:
Multi-function contact output 2
(relay)
48VDC 50mA
SINK Mode
REV/STOP
Multi-step 1
Sink
MRC
Sw1
factory setting:
Factory
setting
indicates that it is running
Multi-function contact output 3
(photocoupler)
Source
Please refer to
Figure 3 for wiring
of SINK mode and
SOURCEmode.
Multi-step 2
Multi-step 3
Multi-step 4
No function
No function
MO1
MI2
MI3
MI4
Multi-function contact output 4
(photocoupler)
MO2
MI5
MI6
Multi-function
Photocoupler Output
Digital Signal Common
DCM
E
MCM
DFM
* Don't apply the mains voltage directly
to above terminals.
Digital Frequency Output
Terminal
factory setting: 1:1
+10V
ACI current/voltage selection
Power supply
+10V 20m A
3
ACI Switch
Duty=50%, 10VDC
Make sure that power is OFF
before changing the switch
setting.
AVI
Digital Signal Common
2
5K
Master Frequency
DCM
DFM output signal selection
DFM Switch
Make sure that power is OFF
before changing the switch
setting.
0 to 10V 47k
1
0-20mA
0-10V
ACI
4~20mA/0~10V
AUI
-10~+10V
ACM
TP
OC
Analog Signal Common
E
Analog Multi-function Output Terminal
AFM analog output selection
AFM Switch
AFM
RS-485 serial communication
1: +EV
0~10VDC/2mA
Make sure that power is OFF
before changing the switch
setting.
2: GND
3: SG-
4: SG+
5: NC
For communication,
it needs to use
VFD-USB01/IFD8500
ACM
Analog Signal common
E
0-10V
0-20mA
to connect to PC.
6: NC
Main circuit (power) terminals
Control circuit terminals
Shielded leads & Cable
NOTE
The brake resistor is built-in to model VFD110V43B.
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
Figure 3 Wiring for SINK(NPN) mode and SOURCE(PNP) mode
SINK/NPN Mode
+24V
FWD
Sink
SW1
Source
FWD/STOP
REV/STOP
Multi-step1
Multi-step2
Multi-step3
Multi-step4
No Function
REV
MI1
MI2
MI3
Factory
setting
MI4
MI5
No Function
MI6
DCM
E
Digital Signal Common
*Don't apply the mains voltage directly
to above terminals.
SOURCE/PNP Mode
+24V
FWD
Sink
FWD/STOP
SW1
REV/STOP
Source
REV
MI1
Multi-step1
Multi-step2
MI2
MI3
Multi-step3
Factory
Multi-step4
setting
MI4
MI5
MI6
No Function
No Function
DCM
*Don't apply the mains voltage directly
to above terminals.
E
CAUTION!
1.
2.
The wiring of main circuit and control circuit should be separated to prevent erroneous actions.
Please use shield wire for the control wiring and not to expose the peeled-off net in front of the
terminal.
3.
Please use the shield wire or tube for the power wiring and ground the two ends of the shield
wire or tube.
2.2 External Wiring
2-4
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
Items
Power
Explanations
Power Supply
Please follow the specific power
supply requirements shown in
Appendix A.
supply
There may be an inrush current
during power up. Please check the
chart of Appendix B and select the
correct fuse with rated current. Use of
an NFB is optional.
FUSE/NFB
Fuse/NFB
(Optional)
Magnetic
contactor
Please do not use a Magnetic
Magnetic
contactor
(Optional)
contactor as the I/O switch of the AC
motor drive, as it will reduce the
operating life cycle of the AC drive.
Used to improve the input power
factor, to reduce harmonics and
provide protection from AC line
disturbances (surges, switching
spikes, short interruptions, etc.). AC
line reactor should be installed when
the power supply capacity is 500kVA
or more or advanced capacity is
activated .The wiring distance should
Input AC
Line Reactor
Zero-phase
Reactor
Input AC
Line Reactor
(Optional)
EMI Filter
S/L2
be 10m. Refer to appendix B for
≤
details.
Zero phase reactors are used to
reduce radio noise especially when
audio equipment is installed near the
inverter. Effective for noise reduction
on both the input and output sides.
Attenuation quality is good for a wide
range from AM band to 10MHz.
Appendix B specifies the zero phase
reactor. (RF220X00A)
R/L1
U/T1
T/L3
Zero-phase
Reactor
(Ferrite Core
Common
Choke)
+/B1
B2
-
(Optional)
V/T2
W/T3
E
To reduce electromagnetic
interference, please refer to Appendix
B for more details.
EMI filter
(Optional)
Zero-phase
Reactor
OutputAC
Line Reactor
Used to reduce the deceleration time
of the motor. Please refer to the chart
in Appendix B for specific Brake
Resistors.
Brake
Resistor
(Optional)
Motor surge voltage amplitude
depends on motor cable length. For
applications with long motor cable
(>20m), it is necessary to install a
Motor
Output AC
Line Reactor
(Optional)
2.3 Main Circuit
2.3.1 Main Circuit Connection
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
Figure 1 for the main terminals
Brake resistor(Optional)
No-fuse breaker
(NFB)
-
B2
+1 +2/B1
R(L1)
MC
Motor
R
S
T
U(T1)
V(T2)
W(T3)
IM
3~
S(L2)
T(L3)
E
E
Figure 2 for the main terminals
Brake resistor
(optional)
VFDB
No-fuse breaker
(NFB)
-
+2
+1
R(L1)
S(L2)
MC
Motor
R
S
T
U(T1)
V(T2)
W(T3)
IM
3~
T(L3)
E
E
Terminal Symbol
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
Explanation of Terminal Function
AC line input terminals (1-phase/3-phase)
AC drive output terminals for connecting 3-phase
induction motor
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
+1, +2
Connections for DC Choke (optional)
+2/B1, B2
Connections for Brake Resistor (optional)
+2~(-), +2/B1~(-)
Connections for External Brake Unit (VFDB series)
Earth connection, please comply with local regulations.
2-6
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
Mains power terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3)
„
„
„
Connect these terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) via a no-fuse breaker or earth leakage
breaker to 3-phase AC power (some models to 1-phase AC power) for circuit protection. It
is unnecessary to consider phase-sequence.
It is recommended to add a magnetic contactor (MC) in the power input wiring to cut off
power quickly and reduce malfunction when activating the protection function of AC motor
drives. Both ends of the MC should have an R-C surge absorber.
Please make sure to fasten the screw of the main circuit terminals to prevent sparks
which is made by the loose screws due to vibration.
„
„
„
Please use voltage and current within the regulation shown in Appendix A.
When using leakage-current breaker to prevent leakage current,
Do NOT run/stop AC motor drives by turning the power ON/OFF. Run/stop AC motor
drives by RUN/STOP command via control terminals or keypad. If you still need to
run/stop AC drives by turning power ON/OFF, it is recommended to do so only ONCE per
hour.
„
Do NOT connect 3-phase models to a 1-phase power source.
Output terminals for main circuit (U, V, W)
„
When the AC drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 are connected to the motor
terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3, respectively, the motor will rotate counterclockwise (as
viewed on the shaft end of the motor) when a forward operation command is received. To
permanently reverse the direction of motor rotation, switch over any of the two motor
leads.
Forward
running
„
„
DO NOT connect phase-compensation capacitors or surge absorbers at the output
terminals of AC motor drives.
With long motor cables, high capacitive switching current peaks can cause over-current,
high leakage current or lower current readout accuracy. To prevent this, the motor cable
should be less than 20m for 3.7kW models and below. And the cable should be less than
50m for 5.5kW models and above. For longer motor cables use an AC output reactor.
Use well-insulated motor, suitable for inverter operation.
„
Terminals [+1, +2] for connecting DC reactor
DC reactor
Jumper
+1
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
„
To improve power factor and reduce harmonics connect a DC reactor between terminals
[+1, +2]. Please remove the jumper before connecting the DC reactor.
NOTE
Models of 15kW and above have a built-in DC reactor.
Terminals [+2/B1, B2] for connecting brake resistor and terminals [+1, +2/B1] for
connecting external brake unit
Brake resistor(optional)
BR
Brake unit(optional)
Refer to Appendix B for the use of
VFDB
BR
special braking resistor/unit
-
B2
+2/B1
+2/B1
„
„
„
Connect a brake resistor or brake unit in applications with frequent deceleration ramps,
short deceleration time, too low brake torque or requiring increased brake torque.
If the AC motor drive has a built-in brake chopper (all models of 11kW and below),
＋
connect the external brake resistor to the terminals [ 2/B1, B2].
Models of 15kW and above don’t have a built-in brake chopper. Please connect an
external optional brake unit (VFDB-series) and brake resistor. Refer to VFDB series user
manual for details.
„
„
Connect the terminals [+(P), -(N)] of the brake unit to the AC motor drive terminals
[+2(+2/B1), (-)]. The length of wiring should be less than 5m with twisted cable.
When not used, please leave the terminals [+2/B1, -] open.
WARNING!
1.
Short-circuiting [B2] or [-] to [+2/B1] can damage the AC motor drive.
Grounding terminals (
)
„
Make sure that the leads are connected correctly and the AC drive is properly grounded.
Ω
(Ground resistance should not exceed 0.1 .)
„
„
Use ground leads that comply with local regulations and keep them as short as possible.
Multiple VFD-VE units can be installed in one location. All the units should be grounded
directly to a common ground terminal, as shown in the figure below. Ensure there are no
ground loops.
not allowed
excellent
good
2-8
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
2.3.2 Main Circuit Terminals
Frame B
Main circuit terminals
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3,
, +1, +2/B1, -, B2
Models
Wire
Torque
Wire Type
VFD007V23A-2
VFD007V43A-2
VFD015V23A-2
VFD015V43A-2
VFD022V23A-2
VFD022V43A-2
VFD037V23A-2
VFD037V43A-2
Stranded
copper only,
75oC
18kgf-cm
14-10 AWG
(2.1-5.3mm2)
(15.6in-lbf)
+1 +2
B2
U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
Screw Torque
B1
-
:
18Kgf-cm
Wire Gauge
:
18~10AWG
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
Frame C
Main circuit terminals
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3,
, +1, +2/B1, -, B2
Models
Wire
Torque
Wire Type
VFD055V23A-2
VFD075V23A-2
VFD110V43B-2
VFD055V43A-2
VFD075V43A-2
Stranded
copper only,
75 oC
30kgf-cm
(26in-lbf)
12-8 AWG
(3.3-8.4mm2)
IM
3
POWER
MOTOR
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
Frame D
Main circuit terminals
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3,
, +1, +2, -
Models
Wire
Torque
Wire Type
VFD110V23A-2
VFD110V43A-2
VFD150V43A-2
VFD150V23A-2
VFD185V23A-2
VFD185V43A-2
VFD220V43A-2
VFD220V23A-2
Stranded
copper only,
75 oC
30kgf-cm
(26in-lbf)
8-2 AWG
(8.4-33.6mm2)
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 +1 +2
V/T2 W/T3
MOTOR
-
(-)
DC
IM
3
(
)
+
POWER
DC
Frame E
Main circuit terminals
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3,
, +1, +2, -
POWER
ALARM
Models
Wire
Torque
Wire Type
VFD300V43A-2
VFD370V43A-2
VFD450V43A-2
VFD300V23A-2
VFD370V23A-2
VFD550V43C-2
VFD750V43C-2
CHARGE
57kgf-cm
(49in-lbf)
Stranded
copper
4-2 AWG
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 +1 +2
U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
(21.2-33.6mm2)
only, 75oC
Screw Torque:
200kgf-cm (173in-lbf)
IM
POWER
MOTOR
3
200kgf-cm
(173in-lbf)
NOTE
2
#
To connect 6 AWG (13.3 mm ) wires, use Recognized Ring Terminals
2.4 Control Terminals
Circuit diagram for digital inputs (SINK current 16mA.)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-10
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
SINK Mode
SOURCE Mode
DCM
+24
Multi-Input
Terminal
multi-input
terminal
+24V
DCM
Internal Circuit
Internal Circuit
The Position of the Control Terminals
MRA
RA
RB
RC
MCM
FWD
MI3
DFM +10V
ACM
AVI
+24V
MI1
MI5
MRC
DCM REV
MO1 MO2
AUI ACI
MI2 MI4 MI6 AFM
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
Terminal symbols and functions
Factory Settings (SINK)
ON: Connect to DCM
Terminal
Symbol
Terminal Function
ON:
Run in FWD direction
FWD
Forward-Stop Command
Reverse-Stop Command
OFF:
Stop acc. to Stop Method
ON:
Run in REV direction
REV
OFF:
Stop acc. to Stop Method
+24V
MI1
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
DC Voltage Source
Multi-function Input 1
Multi-function Input 2
Multi-function Input 3
Multi-function Input 4
Multi-function Input 5
Multi-function Input 6
Digital Frequency Meter
+24VDC, 80mA, used for SOURCE mode.
Refer to Pr.02-01 to Pr.02-06 for programming
the Multi-function Inputs.
ON: the activation current is 6.5mA. OFF:
leakage current tolerance is 10μA.
Pulse voltage output monitor signal,
proportional to output frequency
(Open Collector Output)
DFM-DCM
Duty-cycle:
Ratio:
50%
Max: 48V
50mA
Pr.02-18
4.7kΩ
50mA
48Vdc
J5
50%
DFM
Min. load:
Max. current:
Max. voltage:
Jumper:
100%
internal circuit
DFM jumper, factory
setting is OC
Common for digital inputs and used for SINK
mode.
DCM
RA
Digital Signal Common
Multi-function Relay Output 1
(N.O.) a
Resistive Load:
5A(N.O.)/3A(N.C.) 240VAC
5A(N.O.)/3A(N.C.) 24VDC
Inductive Load:
Multi-function Relay Output 1
(N.C.) b
RB
1.5A(N.O.)/0.5A(N.C.) 240VAC
1.5A(N.O.)/0.5A(N.C.) 24VDC
RC
Multi-function Relay Common
To output monitor signal, including in operation,
frequency arrival, overload and etc.
Multi-function Relay Output 2
(N.O.) a
MRA
MRC
Refer to Pr.02-11~02-12 for programming
Multi-function Relay Common
2-12
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
Factory Settings (SINK)
ON: Connect to DCM
Terminal
Symbol
Terminal Function
+10V
MCM
MO1
Potentiometer Power Supply +10VDC 20mA (variable resistor 3-5kohm)
Multi-function Output
Max. 48VDC 50mA
Common (Photocoupler)
Multi-function Output 1
(Photocoupler)
Maximum 48VDC, 50mA
Refer to Pr.02-13 to Pr.02-14 for programming
Max: 48Vdc
MO1~MO2-DCM
50mA
MO1~MO2
Multi-function Output 2
(Photocoupler)
MO2
MCM
Internal Circuit
Analog voltage Input
Impedance:
Resolution:
Range:
200kΩ
+10V
AVI circuit
12 bits
0 ~ 10VDC = 0 ~ Max. Output
Frequency (Pr.01-00)
AVI
AVI
Set-up:
Pr.03-00 ~ Pr.03-02
ACM
internal circuit
Impedance:
Resolution:
Range:
250Ω
Analog current Input
12 bits
ACI circuit
ACI
4 ~ 20mA/0~10V =
0 ~ Max. Output Frequency
(Pr.01-00)
ACI
Set-up:
Pr.03-00 ~ Pr.03-02
Jumper:
ACI jumper, factory setting is
4-20mA
ACM
internal circuit
Impedance:
Resolution:
Range:
200kΩ
Auxiliary analog voltage input
12 bits
+10
AUI circuit
~
-10 ~ +10VDC =
-10V
0 ~ Max. Output Frequency
(Pr.01-00)
AUI
AUI
Set-up:
Pr.03-00 ~ Pr.03-02
ACM
internal circuit
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
Factory Settings (SINK)
ON: Connect to DCM
Terminal
Symbol
Terminal Function
Impedance:
18.5kΩ (voltage output)
1.1mΩ (current output)
Analog output meter
Output current
Resolution:
20mA max
max. frequency corresponds to
0-10V
AFM
Range:
Function:
Switch:
0 ~ 10V/0 ~ 20mA
Pr.03-18
AFM
0~20mA
AFM switch, factory setting is 0-
10V
ACM
Analog control signal
(common)
ACM
Common for AVI, ACI, AUI, AFM
*Control signal wiring size: 18 AWG (0.75 mm2) with shielded wire.
Analog input terminals (AVI, ACI, AUI, ACM)
„
Analog input signals are easily affected by external noise. Use shielded wiring and keep it
as short as possible (<20m) with proper grounding. If the noise is inductive, connecting
the shield to terminal ACM can bring improvement.
„
If the analog input signals are affected by noise from the AC motor drive, please connect
a capacitor and ferrite core as indicated in the following diagrams:
AVI/ACI/AUI
C
ACM
ferrite core
wind each wires 3 times or more around the core
Digital inputs (FWD, REV, MI1~MI6, DCM)
„
When using contacts or switches to control the digital inputs, please use high quality
components to avoid contact bounce.
Digital outputs (MO1, MO2, MCM)
„
„
Make sure to connect the digital outputs to the right polarity, see wiring diagrams.
When connecting a relay to the digital outputs, connect a surge absorber or fly-back diode
across the coil and check the polarity.
2-14
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
General
„
Keep control wiring as far as possible from the power wiring and in separate conduits to
avoid interference. If necessary let them cross only at 90º angle.
The AC motor drive control wiring should be properly installed and not touch any live
power wiring or terminals.
„
NOTE
„
„
If a filter is required for reducing EMI (Electro Magnetic Interference), install it as close as
possible to AC drive. EMI can also be reduced by lowering the Carrier Frequency.
When using a GFCI (Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter), select a current sensor with
sensitivity of 200mA, and not less than 0.1-second detection time to avoid nuisance
tripping.
DANGER!
Damaged insulation of wiring may cause personal injury or damage to circuits/equipment if it comes
in contact with high voltage.
The specification for the control terminals
The Position of the Control Terminals
MRA RA
RC
MCM
FWD
MI3
+10V
DFM
AVI
ACM
+24V
MI1
MI5
MRC
RB
DCM REV
MO1 MO2
AFM AUI ACI
MI2 MI4 MI6
Frame
B, C, D, E, E1
Torque
Wire
8 kgf-cm (6.9 in-lbf)
22-14 AWG (0.3-2.1mm2)
NOTE
Frame B: VFD007V23A/43A-2, VFD015V23A/43A-2, VFD022V23A/43A-2, VFD037V23A/43A-2;
Frame C: VFD055V23A/43A-2, VFD075V23A/43A-2, VFD110V43B-2,
Frame D: VFD110V23A/43A-2, VFD150V23A/43A-2, VFD185V23A/43A-2, VFD220V23A/43A-2
Frame E: VFD300V43A-2, VFD370V43A-2, VFD450V43A-2
Frame E1: VFD300V23A-2, VFD370V23A-2, VFD550V43C-2, VFD750V43C-2
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Digital Keypad Operation and Start Up
3.1 Digital Keypad KPV-CE01
3.1.1 Description of the Digital Keypad KPV-CE01
LED Display
Display frequency, current, voltage
and error, etc.
F
H
U
KPV-CE01
EXTPU
Part Number
Status Display
Display of driver status
MODE Selection Key
Press this key to view different
operating values
JOG
PU
Left Key
moves cursor to the left
Right Key
Moves the cursor right
FWD/REV Direction Key
RUN key
STOP
RESET
RUN
STOP/RESET
Display Message
Descriptions
Displays the AC drive Master Frequency.
Displays the actual output frequency present at terminals U/T1, V/T2, and
W/T3.
User defined unit (where U = F x Pr.00-05)
Displays the output current present at terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3.
The counter value (C).
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
3-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Digital Keypad Operation and Start Up|
Display Message
Descriptions
Displays the selected parameter.
Displays the actual stored value of the selected parameter.
External Fault.
Display “End” for approximately 1 second if input has been accepted by
pressing
key. After a parameter value has been set, the new
value is automatically stored in memory. To modify an entry, use the
,
and
keys.
Display “Err”, if the input is invalid.
3-2
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Digital Keypad Operation and Start Up|
3.1.2 How to Operate the Digital Keypad KPV-CE01
Selection mode
START
F
F
H
U
F
H
U
F
F
H
H
H
U
U
U
MODE
MODE
MODE
MODE
MODE
GO START
NOTE: In the selection mode, press
To set parameters
to set the parameters.
F
H
U
parameter set successfully
F
H
U
F
H
U
F
H
U
F
H
U
parameter set error
move to previous display
MODE
NOTE: In the parameter setting mode, you can press
to return to the selection mode.
MODE
To shift cursor
START
F
H
U
F
H
U
F
H
U
F
H
U
F
H
U
To modify data
START
F
F
H
U
F
H
U
H
U
To switch display mode
START
F
H
U
F
F
H
U
F
H
U
F
H
U
H
U
MODE
MODE
F
H
U
F
H
U
F
H
U
F
H
U
F
H
U
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Digital Keypad Operation and Start Up|
To copy parameters 1
Copy parameters from the AC Motor Drive to the KPV-CE01
F
F
H
U
F
H
U
F
F
H
H
U
H
U
U
about 2-3 seconds
F
H
U
F
F
H
U
H
U
It will display "End" to indicate that
the first parameter is saved, then
return to "rEAd0".
start blinking
F
F
H
U
F
H
U
F
F
H
H
H
U
U
U
F
F
F
F
H
U
F
H
U
H
U
H
U
H
U
start blinking
It will display "End" to indicate that
the second parameter is saved, then
return to "rEAd1".
about 2-3 seconds
To copy parameters 2
Copy parameters from the KPV-CE01 to the AC Motor Drive
F
F
H
U
F
H
U
F
F
H
H
H
U
U
U
F
F
F
F
H
U
H
U
H
U
H
U
It will display "End" to indicate that
the first parameter is saved, then
return to "SAvEv".
start blinking
about 2-3 seconds
F
F
H
U
F
H
U
F
F
F
H
H
U
H
H
U
U
U
F
H
U
F
F
F
F
H
U
H
U
H
U
H
U
It will display "End" to indicate that
the second parameter is saved, then
return to "SAvEv".
start blinking
about 2-3 seconds
3-4
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Digital Keypad Operation and Start Up|
3.1.3 Dimension of the Digital Keypad
Unit: mm [inch]
F
H
U
KPV-CEO1
RUN STO
P
JOG FW
D
REV EXT PU
JOG MODE PU
LABEL 1
FWD
REV
PROG
DATA
STOP
RESET
RUN
3.1.4 Reference Table for the LCD Display of the Digital Keypad
Digital
LCD
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
English
alphabet
A
b
Cc
d
E
F
G
Hh
I
Jj
LCD
English
alphabet
K
v
L
n
Z
Oo
P
q
r
S
Tt
U
LCD
English
alphabet
Y
LCD
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Digital Keypad Operation and Start Up|
3.1.5 Operation Method
Refer to 3.1.2 How to operate the digital keypad KPV-CE01 and chapter 4 parameters for
setting. Please choose a suitable method depending on application and operation rule. The
operation is usually used as shown in the following table.
Operation Command
Operation Method
KPV-CE01 keypad
Frequency Source
Source
STOP
RESET
RUN
+24V
FWD
REV
MI1
FWD/STOP
REV/STOP
Multi-step 1
Factory setting:
SINK Mode
Sink
Sw1
Factory
setting
Source
Please refer to
Multi-step 2
Multi-step 3
Multi-step 4
No function
No function
MI2
Figure 3 for wiring
of SINK mode and
SOURCEmode.
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
Digital Signal Common
DCM
E
* Don't apply the mains voltage directly
to above terminals.
+10V
ACI current/voltage selection
ACI Switch
Operate from
external signal
Power supply
+10V 20mA
AVI
3
Make sure that power is OFF
before changing the switch
setting.
2
5K
Master Frequency
0 to 10V 47k
1
0-20mA
0-10V
ACI
4~20mA/0~10V
AUI
-10~+10V
ACM
Analog Signal Common
E
Analog Multi-function Output Terminal
AFM analog output selection
AFM Switch
AFM
0~10VDC/2mA
Make sure that power is OFF
before changing the switch
setting.
ACM
Analog Signal common
E
0-10V
0-20mA
Main circuit (power) terminals
Control circuit terminals
Shielded leads & Cable
Operate from
Please refer to the communication address 2000H and 2119H settings in the
communication communication address definition.
3.2 Start-up
3.2.1 Preparations before Start-up
3-6
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Digital Keypad Operation and Start Up|
Carefully check the following items before proceeding.
„
„
Make sure that the wiring is correct. In particular, check that the output terminals U, V, W.
are NOT connected to power and that the drive is well grounded.
Verify that there are no short-circuits between terminals and from terminals to ground or
mains power.
„
„
„
Check for loose terminals, connectors or screws.
Verify that no other equipment is connected to the AC motor
Make sure that all switches are OFF before applying power to ensure that the AC motor
drive doesn’t start running and there is no abnormal operation after applying power.
Make sure that the front cover is well installed before applying power.
Do NOT operate the AC motor drive with humid hands.
„
„
„
The keypad shows briefly "Delta" and then should light up as follows (normal status with
no error)
F
H
U
KPV-CE01
EXT PU
JOG
PU
STOP
RESET
RUN
- If the drive has built-in fan (2hp/1.5kW and above) it should run. The factory setting
of Fan Control Pr.07-19=00 (Fan always on).
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Digital Keypad Operation and Start Up|
3.2.2 Trial Run
After finishing checking the items in “3.2.1 preparation before start-up”, you can perform a
trial run. The factory setting of operation source is from keypad (Pr.00-20=00).
F
1. After applying power, verify that LED “F”
KPV-CE01
RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU
KPV-CE01
RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU
is on and the display shows 60.00Hz.
2. Setting frequency to about 5Hz by using
key.
F
F
RUN
3. Pressing
key for forward running.
KPV-CE01
KPV-CE01
RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU
RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU
And if you want to change to reverse
running, you should press
key. The
F
F
LED will display the status. And if you
KPV-CE01
RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU
KPV-CE01
RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU
want to decelerate to stop, please press
STOP
RESET
key.
F
4. Check following items:
F
KPV-CE01
RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU
„ Check if the motor direction of rotation
is correct.
KPV-CE01
RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU
„ Check if the motor runs steadily
without abnormal noise and vibration.
„ Check if acceleration and deceleration
are smooth.
F
KPV-CE01
RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU
KPV-CE01
RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU
If the results of trial run are normal, please
start formal run.
F
KPV-CE01
RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU
KPV-CE01
RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU
PU
RUN
F
KPV-CE01
RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU
KPV-CE01
RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU
3-8
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Digital Keypad Operation and Start Up|
NOTE
1.
2.
Please stop running immediately if any fault occurs and refer to troubleshooting for solving the
problem.
Please do NOT touch output terminals U, V, W when power is still applied to L1/R, L2/S, L3/T
even when the AC motor drive has stopped. The DC-link capacitors may still be charged to
hazardous voltage levels, even if the power has been turned off.
To avoid damage to components, do not touch them or the circuit boards with metal objects or
your bare hands.
3.
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Digital Keypad Operation and Start Up|
This page intentionally left blank.
3-10
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters
The VFD-VE parameters are divided into 12 groups by property for easy setting. In most applications,
the user can finish all parameter settings before start-up without the need for re-adjustment during
operation.
The 12 groups are as follows:
Group 0: System Parameters
Group 1: Basic Parameters
Group 2: Digital Input/Output Parameters
Group 3: Analog Input/Output Parameters
Group 4: Multi-Step Speed Parameters
Group 5: Motor Parameters
Group 6: Protection Parameters
Group 7: Special Parameters
Group 8: High-function PID Parameters
Group 9: Communication Parameters
Group 10: Speed Feedback Control Parameters
Group 11: Advanced Parameters
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4.1 Summary of Parameter Settings
ꢀ: The parameter can be set during operation.
Group 0 System Parameters
Factory
Setting
0
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Identity Code of the AC
motor drive
Rated Current Display of
the AC motor drive
Read-only
Read-only
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
00-00
00-01
0
0
0: No function
1: Read only
2: Enable group 11 parameters setting
8: Keypad lock
9: All parameters are reset to factory settings (50Hz,
220V/380V)
Parameter Reset
00-02
10: All parameters are reset to factory settings (60Hz,
220V/440V)
0: Display the frequency command value (LED F)
1: Display the actual output frequency (LED H)
2: Multifunction display, see Pr.00-04 (LED U)
3: Display the output current (A)
0: Display output current (A)
0
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Start-up Display Selection
ꢀ00-03
1: Display counter value (C)
2: Display output frequency (H)
u
3: Display DC-BUS voltage (
4: Display output voltage (E)
)
5: Output power factor angle (n)
6: Display output power (kW)
7: Display actual motor speed (HU)
8: Display estimate output torque (kg-m)
9: Display PG position (G) (refer to Pr.10-00 and Pr.10-
01)
10: Display PID feedback
11: Display AVI (%)
12: Display ACI (%)
Content of Multi Function
Display
ꢀ00-04
13: Display AUI (%)
14: Display the temperature of heat sink (°C)
15: Display the temperature of IGBT (°C)
16: The status of digital input (ON/OFF)
17: The status of digital output (ON/OFF)
18: Multi-step speed
19: The corresponding CPU pin status of digital input
20: The corresponding CPU pin status of digital output
21: Number of actual motor revolution (PG1 of PG card)
22: Pulse input frequency (PG2 of PG card)
23: Pulse input position (PG2 of PG card)
Digit 4: decimal point number (0 to 3)
Digit 0-3: 40 to 9999
0
○
○
○
○
○
User-Defined Coefficient K
ꢀ00-05
#.#
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
00-06
Software Version
Password Input
Read-only
1 to 9998 and 10000 to 65535
0 to 2: times of wrong password
1 to 9998 and 10000 to 65535
0: No password set or successful input in Pr.00-07
1: Password has been set
10~1000 %
ꢀ00-07
0
○
○
○
○
○
Password Set
ꢀ00-08
ꢀ00-09
100%
0
○
○
Energy Saving Gain
0: V/f Control
○
○
○
○
1: V/f Control + Encoder (VFPG)
2: Sensorless vector control (SVC)
3: FOC vector control + Encoder (FOCPG)
4: Torque control + Encoder (TQRPG)
0: V/f curve determined by group 01
1: 1.5 power curve
2: Square curve
0: Constant Torque (100%)
1: Variable Torque (125%)
Control Method
00-10
0
0
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
V/f Curve Selection
00-11
○
○
○
○
Constant/Variable Torque
Selection
ꢀ00-12
0: Linear accel./decel. I
1: Auto accel., linear decel.
2: Linear accel., auto decel.
3: Auto accel./decel.
Optimal
Acceleration/Deceleration
Setting
ꢀ00-13
4-2
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory
Setting
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
4: Stall prevention by auto accel./decel. (limited by 01-12
to 01-21)
Time Unit for
0: Unit: 0.01 second
0
○
○
○
○
Acceleration/Deceleration 1: Unit: 0.1 second
and S Curve
00-14
00-15 Reserved
00-16 Reserved
1~15KHz
10
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Carrier Frequency
ꢀ00-17
0: Enable AVR
1: Disable AVR
2: Disable AVR when deceleration stop
Auto Voltage Regulation
(AVR) Function
ꢀ00-18
Auto Energy-saving
Operation
0: Disable
1: Enable
0
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ00-19
ꢀ00-20
0: Digital keypad (KPV-CE01)
1: RS-485 serial communication
2: External analog input (Pr. 03-00)
3: External UP/DOWN terminal
4: Pulse input without direction command (Pr.10-15
without direction)
Source of the Master
Frequency Command
5: Pulse input with direction command (Pr.10-15)
0: Digital keypad (KPV-CE01)
1: External terminals. Keypad STOP disabled.
2: RS-485 serial communication (RJ-11). Keypad STOP
disabled.
0
○
○
○
○
○
Source of the Operation
Command
ꢀ00-21
0: Ramp to stop
1: Coast to stop
0: Enable reverse
1: Disable reverse
0
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Stop Method
ꢀ00-22
ꢀ00-23
Reverse Operation
2: Disable forward
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 1 Basic Parameters
Factory
Setting
60.00/
50.00
60.00/
50.00
220.0
440.0
0.50
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Maximum Output
Frequency
1st Output Frequency
Setting 1
1st Output Voltage
Setting 1
2nd Output Frequency
Setting 1
2nd Output Voltage
Setting 1
3rd Output Frequency
Setting 1
3rd Output Voltage
Setting 1
4th Output Frequency
Setting 1
50.00~600.00Hz
0.00~600.00Hz
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
01-00
01-01
01-02
01-03
230V: 0.1V~255.0V
460V: 0.1V~510.0V
0.00~600.00Hz
230V: 0.1V~255.0V
460V: 0.1V~510.0V
0.00~600.00Hz
5.0
10.0
0.50
ꢀ01-04
01-05
230V: 0.1V~255.0V
460V: 0.1V~510.0V
0.00~600.00Hz
5.0
10.0
0.00
ꢀ01-06
○
○
○
01-07
4th Output Voltage
Setting 1
Start Frequency
230V: 0.1V~255.0V
460V: 0.1V~510.0V
0.00~600.00Hz
0.0
0.0
0.50
ꢀ01-08
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
01-09
Output Frequency Upper
600.00
0.00~600.00Hz
0.00~600.00Hz
ꢀ01-10
ꢀ01-11
ꢀ01-12
ꢀ01-13
ꢀ01-14
ꢀ01-15
ꢀ01-16
ꢀ01-17
ꢀ01-18
ꢀ01-19
ꢀ01-20
Limit
Output Frequency Lower
Limit
0.00
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
10.00/
10.0
10.00/
10.0
10.00/
10.0
10.00/
10.0
10.00/
10.0
10.00/
10.0
10.00/
10.0
10.00/
10.0
Accel Time 1
Decel Time 1
Accel Time 2
Decel Time 2
Accel Time 3
Decel Time 3
Accel Time 4
Decel Time 4
0.00~600.00 sec/0.00~6000.0 sec
0.00~600.00 sec/0.00~6000.0 sec
0.00~600.00 sec/0.00~6000.0 sec
0.00~600.00 sec/0.00~6000.0 sec
0.00~600.00 sec/0.00~6000.0 sec
0.00~600.00 sec/0.00~6000.0 sec
0.00~600.00 sec/0.00~6000.0 sec
0.00~600.00 sec/0.00~6000.0 sec
1.00/
1.0
1.00/
1.0
JOG Acceleration Time 0.00~600.00 sec/0.00~6000.0 sec
JOG Deceleration Time 0.00~600.00 sec/0.00~6000.0 sec
ꢀ01-21
ꢀ01-22
ꢀ01-23
0.00~600.00Hz
JOG Frequency
6.00
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
1st/4th Accel/decel
Frequency
S-curve for Acceleration 0.00~25.00 sec/0.00~250.0 sec
Departure Time 1
S-curve for Acceleration 0.00~25.00 sec /0.00~250.0 sec
0.00~600.00Hz
0.00
0.2/0.0
0.2/0.0
0.2/0.0
0.2/0.0
0.00
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ01-24
ꢀ01-25
ꢀ01-26
Arrival Time 2
S-curve for Deceleration 0.00~25.00 sec /0.00~250.0 sec
Departure Time 1
S-curve for Deceleration 0.00~25.00 sec /0.00~250.0 sec
Arrival Time 2
ꢀ01-27
Skip Frequency 1 (upper 0.00~600.00Hz
01-28
limit)
Skip Frequency 1 (lower 0.00~600.00Hz
0.00
01-29
01-30
01-31
01-32
01-33
limit)
Skip Frequency 2 (upper 0.00~600.00Hz
0.00
limit)
Skip Frequency 2 (lower 0.00~600.00Hz
0.00
limit)
Skip Frequency 3 (upper 0.00~600.00Hz
0.00
limit)
Skip Frequency 3 (lower 0.00~600.00Hz
limit)
0.00
0: Output Waiting
0
Mode Selection when
Frequency < Fmin
01-34
01-35
1: Zero-speed operation
2: Fmin (4th output frequency setting)
0.00~600.00Hz
60.00/
○
○
○
○
○
1st Output Frequency
4-4
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory
Pr.
Explanation
Setting 2
1st Output Voltage
Setting 2
2nd Output Frequency
Setting 2
2nd Output Voltage
Setting 2
3rd Output Frequency
Setting 2
3rd Output Voltage
Setting 2
4th Output Frequency
Setting 2
4th Output Voltage
Setting 2
Settings
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Setting
50.00
220.0
440.0
0.50
230V: 0.1V~255.0V
460V: 0.1V~510.0V
0.00~600.00Hz
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
01-36
01-37
230V: 0.1V~255.0V
460V: 0.1V~510.0V
0.00~600.00Hz
5.0/
10.0
0.50
ꢀ01-38
01-39
230V: 0.1V~255.0V
460V: 0.1V~510.0V
0.00~600.00Hz
5.0/
10.0
0.00
ꢀ01-40
○
○
○
01-41
230V: 0.1V~255.0V
460V: 0.1V~510.0V
0.0/
0.0
ꢀ01-42
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 2 Digital Input/Output Parameters
Factory
Setting
0
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
0: FWD/STOP, REV/STOP
1: FWD/STOP, REV/STOP (Line Start Lockout)
2: RUN/STOP, REV/FWD
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
02-00
2-wire/3-wire Operation
Control
○
○
○
○
○
3: RUN/STOP, REV/FWD (Line Start Lockout)
4: 3-wire (momentary push button)
5: 3-wire (momentary push button and Line Start
Lockout)
02-01
02-02
Multi-Function Input
Command 1 (MI1)
(it is Stop terminal for 3-
wire operation)
1
2
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
0: no function
1: multi-step speed command 1/multi-step position
command 1
2: multi-step speed command 2/ multi-step position
command 2
3: multi-step speed command 3/ multi-step position
command 3
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Multi-Function Input
Command 2 (MI2)
4: multi-step speed command 4/ multi-step position
command 4
02-03
02-04
02-05
02-06
3
4
0
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
5: Reset
Multi-Function Input
Command 3 (MI3)
6: JOG command
7: acceleration/deceleration speed inhibit
8: the 1st, 2nd acceleration/deceleration time selection
9: the 3rd, 4th acceleration/deceleration time selection
10: EF input (07-36)
Multi-Function Input
Command 4 (MI4)
Multi-Function Input
Command 5 (MI5)
○
○
Multi-Function Input
Command 6 (MI6)
(specific terminal for
TRG)
Multi-Function Input
Command 7
Multi-Function Input
Command 8
Multi-Function Input
Command 9
Multi-Function Input
Command 10
Multi-Function Input
Command 11
Multi-Function Input
Command 12
Multi-Function Input
Command 13
11: B.B. input
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
12: Output stop
02-23
02-24
02-25
02-26
02-27
02-28
02-29
02-30
13: cancel the setting of the optimal
acceleration/deceleration time
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
14: switch between drive settings 1 and 2
15: operation speed command form AVI
16: operation speed command form ACI
17: operation speed command form AUI
18: Emergency Stop (07-36)
○
19: Digital Up command
Multi-Function Input
Command 14
20: Digital Down command
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
21: PID function disabled
22: clear counter
23: input the counter value (multi-function input
command 6)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
24: FWD JOG command
25: REV JOG command
○
○
26: TQC+PG/FOC+PG model selection
27: ASR1/ASR2 selection
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
28: Emergency stop (EF1)
29: Signal confirmation for Y-connection
30: Signal confirmation for Δ−connection
31: High torque bias (by Pr.07-29)
32: Middle torque bias (by Pr.07-30)
33: Low torque bias (by Pr.07-31)
34: Enable multi-step position control
35: Enable position control
○
○
○
36: Enable position learning function (valid at stop)
37: Enable pulse position input command
38: Disable write EEPROM function
39: Torque command direction
40: Force stop
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
41: Serial position clock
42: Serial position input
43: Analog input resolution selection
○
4-6
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory
Setting
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
44: Reset initial reel diameter
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
45: Reset initial reel diameter 0
46: Reset initial reel diameter 1
47: Reset PID control integration of tension
48: Mechanical gear ratio switch
49: Reserved
50: Reserved
0: up/down by the accel/decel time
1: up/down constant speed (Pr.02-08)
0.01 ~ 1.00Hz/ms
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
UP/DOWN Key Mode
ꢀ02-07
ꢀ02-08
The
0.01
Acceleration/Deceleration
Speed of the UP/DOWN
Key with Constant Speed
Digital Input Response
Time
0.001~ 30.000 sec
0 ~ 65535
0.005
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ02-09
ꢀ02-10
Digital Input Operation
Direction
Multi-function Output 1
RA, RB, RC(Relay1)
11
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
0: No function
1: Operation indication
ꢀ02-11
ꢀ02-12
Multi-function Output 2
MRA, MRC (Relay2)
2: Operation speed attained
1
0
3: Desired frequency attained 1 (Pr.02-19)
4: Desired frequency attained 2 (Pr.02-21)
5: Zero speed (frequency command)
6: Zero speed with stop (frequency command)
7: Over torque (OT1) (Pr.06-06~06-08)
8: Over torque (OT2) (Pr.06-09~06-11)
9: Drive ready
Multi-function Output 3
(MO1)
ꢀ02-13
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Multi-function Output 4
(MO2)
0
ꢀ02-14
ꢀ02-35
ꢀ02-36
ꢀ02-37
ꢀ02-38
ꢀ02-39
ꢀ02-40
ꢀ02-41
ꢀ02-42
10: User-defined Low-voltage Detection
11: Malfunction indication
Multi-function Output 5
(MO3)
12: Mechanical brake release (Pr.02-31)
13: Overheat
14: Software brake signal
Multi-function Output 6
(MO4)
15: PID feedback error
16: Slip error (oSL)
17: Terminal count value attained (Pr.02-16)
18: Preliminary count value attained (Pr.02-17)
19: Baseblock (B.B.) Indication
20: Warning output
○
○
○
○
○
○
Multi-function Output 7
(MO5)
Multi-function Output 8
(MO6)
21: Over voltage warning
22: Over-current stall prevention warning
23: Over-voltage stall prevention warning
24: Operation mode indication
25: Forward command
Multi-function Output 9
(MO7)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
26: Reverse command
Multi-function Output 10 27: Output when current >= Pr.02-32
(MO8)
○
○
○
○
28: Output when current < Pr.02-32
29: Output when frequency >= Pr.02-33
Multi-function Output 11 30: Output when frequency < Pr.02-33
(MO9)
31: Y-connection for the motor coil
32: Δ connection for the motor coil
Multi-function Output 12 33: Zero speed (actual output frequency)
(MOA)
34: Zero speed with Stop (actual output frequency)
35: Error output selection 1 (Pr.06-23)
36: Error output selection 2 (Pr.06-24)
37: Error output selection 3 (Pr.06-25)
38: Error output selection 4 (Pr.06-26)
39: Position attained (Pr.10-19)
○
○
○
○
40: Speed attained (including zero speed)
○
○
○
41: Multi-position attained
42: Crane function
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
43: Motor zero-speed output (Pr.02-43)
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Setting
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
44: Max. reel diameter attained
45: Empty reel diameter attained
46: Broken belt detection
47: Break release at stop
48: Error PID feedback of tension
49: Reserved
○
50: Reserved
Multi-output Direction
Terminal Count Value
0
0
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
0 ~ 65535
ꢀ02-15
ꢀ02-16
ꢀ02-17
0 ~ 65535
Preliminary Counter
Value
Digital Output Gain
0 ~ 65535
1 ~ 40
1
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ02-18
ꢀ02-19
Desired Frequency
Attained 1
The Width of the Desired
Frequency Attained 1
Desired Frequency
Attained 2
The Width of the Desired
Frequency Attained 2
Brake Delay Time
60.00/
50.00
2.00
0.00 ~ 600.00Hz
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ02-20
ꢀ02-21
ꢀ02-22
0.00 ~ 600.00Hz
0.00 ~ 600.00Hz
60.00/
50.00
2.00
0.00 ~ 600.00Hz
0.000
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
0.000~65.000 Sec
02-31
Output Current Level
Setting for External
Terminals
ꢀ02-32
0~100%
Output Boundary for
External Terminals
External Operation
Control Selection after
Reset
0.00
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ02-33
ꢀ02-34
0.00~+-60.00Hz (it is motor speed when using PG)
0: Disable
1: Drive runs if run command exists after reset
Zero-speed Level of
Motor
0
○
○
○
ꢀ02-43
0~65535 rpm
4-8
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 3 Analog Input/Output Parameters
Factory
Setting
1
Pr.
Explanation
Analog Input 1 (AVI)
Analog Input 2 (ACI)
Settings
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
0: No function
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ03-00
ꢀ03-01
1: Frequency command (torque limit under TQR control
mode)
0
0
Analog Input 3 (AUI) 2: torque command (torque limit under speed mode)
3: Torque compensation command
4: PID target value (refer to group 8)
5: PID feedback signal (refer to group 8)
6: P.T.C. thermistor input value
○
○
ꢀ03-02
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
7: Positive torque limit
8: Negative torque limit
9: Regenerative torque limit
10: Positive/negative torque limit
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
11: PID feedback signal of tension
12: Line speed
13: Reel diameter
14: PID target value of tension (tension closed-loop)
15: Tension setting (tension open-loop)
16: Zero-speed tension
17: Tension taper
Analog Input Bias 1
-100.0~100.0%
(AVI)
Analog Input Bias 2
-100.0~100.0%
(ACI)
Analog Input Bias 3
-100.0~100.0%
(AUI)
Positive/negative Bias
Mode (AVI)
Positive/negative Bias
Mode (ACI)
Positive/negative Bias
Mode (AUI)
Analog Input Gain 1
(AVI)
Analog Input Gain 2
(ACI )
0
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ03-03
ꢀ03-04
ꢀ03-05
ꢀ03-06
ꢀ03-07
ꢀ03-08
ꢀ03-09
ꢀ03-10
ꢀ03-11
ꢀ03-12
ꢀ03-13
ꢀ03-14
ꢀ03-15
ꢀ03-16
ꢀ03-17
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
0
0
0: Zero bias
1: Lower than bias=bias
2: Greater than bias=bias
3: The absolute value of the bias voltage while serving
as the center
0
0
4: Serve bias as the center
100.0
100.0
100.0
0
-500.0~500.0%
-500.0~500.0%
-500.0~500.0%
Analog Input Gain 3
(AUI)
ACI/AVI2 Selection
0: ACI
1: AVI 2
Analog Input Delay
Time (AVI)
Analog Input Delay
Time (ACI)
Analog Input Delay
Time (AUI)
Addition Function of
the Analog Input
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.00~2.00 sec
0.00~2.00 sec
0.00~2.00 sec
0: Disable (AVI, ACI, AUI)
1: Enable
Loss of the ACI Signal 0: Disable
1: Continue operation at the last frequency
0
0
2: Decelerate to stop
3: Stop immediately and display E.F.
Analog Output
Selection 1
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
0: Output frequency (Hz)
1: Frequency command (Hz)
2: Motor speed (Hz)
3: Output current (rms)
4: Output voltage
ꢀ03-18
ꢀ03-21
ꢀ03-24
Analog Output
Selection 2
Analog Output
Selection 3
5: DC Bus Voltage
6: Power factor
7: Power
8: Output torque
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory
Setting
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
9: AVI
10: ACI
11: AUI
12: q-axis current
13: q-axis feedback value
14: d-axis current
15: d-axis feedback value
16: q-axis voltage
17: d-axis voltage
18: Torque command
19: Pulse frequency command
Analog Output Gain 1 0~200.0%
100.0
0
ꢀ03-19
ꢀ03-20
Analog Output Value
in REV Direction 1
0: Absolute value in REV direction
1: Output 0V in REV direction
○
○
○
○
○
2: Enable output voltage in REV direction
Analog Output Gain 2 0~200.0%
100.0
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ03-22
ꢀ03-23
Analog Output Value
in REV Direction 2
0: Absolute value in REV direction
1: Output 0V in REV direction
2: Enable output voltage in REV direction
Analog Output Gain 3 0~200.0%
100.0
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ03-25
ꢀ03-26
Analog Output Value
in REV Direction 3
0: Absolute value in REV direction
1: Output 0V in REV direction
2: Enable output voltage in REV direction
4-10
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 4 Multi-Step Speed Parameters
Factory
Setting
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
1st Step Speed
Frequency
2nd Step Speed
Frequency
3rd Step Speed
Frequency
4th Step Speed
Frequency
5th Step Speed
Frequency
6th Step Speed
Frequency
7th Step Speed
Frequency
8th Step Speed
Frequency
9th Step Speed
Frequency
10th Step Speed
Frequency
11th Step Speed
Frequency
12th Step Speed
Frequency
13th Step Speed
Frequency
14th Step Speed
Frequency
15th Step Speed
Frequency
0.00~600.00Hz
0.00~600.00Hz
0.00~600.00Hz
0.00~600.00Hz
0.00~600.00Hz
0.00~600.00Hz
0.00~600.00Hz
0.00~600.00Hz
0.00~600.00Hz
0.00~600.00Hz
0.00~600.00Hz
0.00~600.00Hz
0.00~600.00Hz
0.00~600.00Hz
0.00~600.00Hz
0.00
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ04-00
ꢀ04-01
ꢀ04-02
ꢀ04-03
ꢀ04-04
ꢀ04-05
ꢀ04-06
ꢀ04-07
ꢀ04-08
ꢀ04-09
ꢀ04-10
ꢀ04-11
ꢀ04-12
ꢀ04-13
ꢀ04-14
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
Multi-position 1
0~65535
0~65535
0~65535
0~65535
0~65535
0~65535
0~65535
0~65535
0~65535
0~65535
0~65535
0~65535
0~65535
0~65535
0~65535
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ04-15
ꢀ04-16
ꢀ04-17
ꢀ04-18
ꢀ04-19
ꢀ04-20
ꢀ04-21
ꢀ04-22
ꢀ04-23
ꢀ04-24
ꢀ04-25
ꢀ04-26
ꢀ04-27
ꢀ04-28
ꢀ04-29
Multi-position 2
Multi-position 3
Multi-position 4
Multi-position 5
Multi-position 6
Multi-position 7
Multi-position 8
Multi-position 9
Multi-position 10
Multi-position 11
Multi-position 12
Multi-position 13
Multi-position 14
Multi-position 15
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 5 Motor Parameters
Factory
Setting
0
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
05-00
Motor Auto Tuning
0: No function
1: Rolling test
2: Static Test
3: Reserved
40-100%
○
○
○
05-01
Full-load Current of
Motor 1
Rated power of Motor 1 0~655.35
#.##
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
#.##
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ05-02
ꢀ05-03
Rated speed of Motor 1 0~65535
1710
(rpm)
1710 (60Hz, 4 poles), 1410 (50Hz, 4 poles)
05-04
05-05
Number of Motor Poles 1 2~20
4
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
No-load Current of Motor 0-factory setting of Pr.05-01
1
#.##
05-06
Rotor Resistance R1 of
Motor 1
#.###
○
○
○
0~65.535Ω
05-07
05-08
05-09
05-10
Rr of Motor 1
#.###
#.#
#.#
1
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
0~65.535Ω
0~6553.5mH
Lm of Motor 1
Lx of Motor 1
0~6553.5mH
Motor 1/Motor 2
Selection
Frequency for Y-
connection/
1: Motor 1
2: Motor 2
0.00~600.00Hz
○
○
○
○
60.00
○
○
ꢀ05-11
Δ−connection Switch
Y-connection
/Δ−connection Switch
05-12
05-13
0: Disable
1: Enable
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Full-load Current of
Motor 2
40-100%
#.##
○
Rated Power of Motor 2 0~655.35
#.##
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ05-14
ꢀ05-15
Rated Speed of Motor 2 0~65535
(rpm)
1710
○
05-16
05-17
Number of Motor Poles 2 2~20
4
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
No-load Current of Motor 0- factory setting of Pr.05-01
2
#.##
05-18
05-19
05-20
05-21
Rs of Motor 2
Rr of Motor 2
Lm of Motor 2
Lx of Motor 2
#.###
#.###
#.#
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
0~65.535Ω
0~65.535Ω
0~6553.5mH
0~6553.5mH
0.001~10.000sec
#.#
Torque Compensation
Time Constant
0.020
○
○
○
○
ꢀ05-22
ꢀ05-23
ꢀ05-24
ꢀ05-25
ꢀ05-26
ꢀ05-27
ꢀ05-28
Slip Compensation Time 0.001~10.000sec
Constant
0.100
0
○
Torque Compensation
Gain
0~10
○
○
Slip Compensation Gain 0.00~10.00
0.00
0
○
○
○
○
Slip Deviation Level
0~1000% (0: disable)
○
○
○
○
○
○
Detection Time of Slip
Deviation
0.0~10.0 sec
1.0
0
0: Warn and keep operation
1: Warn and ramp to stop
2: Warn and coast to stop
0~10000 (0: disable)
Over Slip Treatment
Hunting Gain
2000
○
○
○
ꢀ05-29
Delay Time for Y-
0~60.000 sec
00~1439
0.200
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ05-30
connection/Δ −connection
Accumulative Motor
Operation Time (Min.)
Accumulative Motor
Operation Time (day)
05-31
0
0
○
○
05-32
00~65535
4-12
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 6 Protection Parameters
Factory
Setting
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Low Voltage Level
160.0~220.0Vdc
320.0~440.0Vdc
180.0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ06-00
360.0
Over-voltage Stall
Prevention
0.0: Disable
350.0~450.0Vdc
ꢀ06-01
380.0
760.0
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
700.0~900.0Vdc
Phase-loss Protection 0: Warn and keep operation
1: Warn and ramp to stop
ꢀ06-02
ꢀ06-03
ꢀ06-04
ꢀ06-05
2: Warn and coast to stop
00~250%
Over-current Stall
Prevention during
Acceleration
Over-current Stall
Prevention during
Operation
170
170
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
00~250%
Accel./Decel. Time
Selection of Stall
0: by current accel/decel time
1: by the 1st accel/decel time
Prevention at constant 2: by the 2nd accel/decel time
speed
3: by the 3rd accel/decel time
4: by the 4th accel/decel time
5: by auto accel/decel time
Over-torque Detection 0: disable
Selection (OT1) 1: over-torque detection during constant speed
0
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ06-06
operation, continue to operate after detection
2: over-torque detection during constant speed
operation, stop operation after detection
3: over-torque detection during operation, continue to
operate after detection
4: over-torque detection during operation, stop
operation after detection
Over-torque Detection 10~250%
Level (OT1)
Over-torque Detection 0.0~60.0 sec
Time (OT1)
150
0.1
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ06-07
ꢀ06-08
ꢀ06-09
Over-torque Detection 0: disable
Selection (OT2)
1: over-torque detection during constant speed
operation, continue to operate after detection
2: over-torque detection during constant speed
operation, stop operation after detection
3: over-torque detection during operation, continue to
operate after detection
4: over-torque detection during operation, stop
operation after detection
Over-torque Detection 10~250%
Level (OT2)
Over-torque Detection 0.0~60.0 sec
Time (OT2)
150
0.1
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ06-10
ꢀ06-11
Current Limit
0~250%
150
2
○
○
○
○
ꢀ06-12
ꢀ06-13
Electronic Thermal
Relay Selection (Motor 1: Standard motor
1)
Electronic Thermal
Characteristic for
Motor 1
Heat Sink Over-heat
(OH) Warning
0: Inverter motor
○
○
○
○
○
○
2: Disable
30.0~600.0 sec
60.0
○
○
○
○
ꢀ06-14
0.0~110.0 °C
85.0
50
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ06-15
ꢀ06-16
06-17
Stall Prevention Limit 0~100% (refer to Pr.06-03, Pr.06-04)
Level
Present Fault Record 0: No fault
0
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
1: Over-current during acceleration (ocA)
Second Most Recent
Fault Record
2: Over-current during deceleration (ocd)
3: Over-current during constant speed (ocn)
4: Ground fault (GFF)
06-18
Third Most Recent
Fault Record
5: IGBT short-circuit (occ)
0
0
06-19
06-20
6: Over-curent at stop (ocS)
7: Over-voltage during acceleration (ovA)
8: Over-voltage during deceleration (ovd)
9: Over-voltage during constant speed (ovn)
10: Over-voltage at stop (ovS)
Fourth Most Recent
Fault Record
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory
Setting
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
11: Low-voltage during acceleration (LvA)
12: Low-voltage during deceleration (Lvd)
13: Low-voltage during constant speed (Lvn)
14: Low-voltage at stop (LvS)
15: Phase loss (PHL)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
06-21
Fifth Most Recent
Fault Record
0
0
16: IGBT heat sink over-heat (oH1)
17: Heat sink over-heat (oH2)(for 40HP above)
18: TH1 open loop error (tH1o)
19: TH2 open loop error (tH2o)
20: Fan error signal output
06-22
Sixth Most Recent
Fault Record
21: over-load (oL) (150% 1Min)
22: Motor 1 over-load (EoL1)
23: Motor 2 over-load (EoL2)
24: Motor PTC overheat (oH3)
25: Fuse error (FuSE)
26: over-torque 1 (ot1)
27: over-torque 1 (ot2)
28: Reserved
29: Reserved
30: Memory write-in error (cF1)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
31: Memory read-out error (cF2)
32: Isum current detection error (cd0)
33: U-phase current detection error (cd1)
34: V-phase current detection error (cd2)
35: W-phase current detection error (cd3)
36: Clamp current detection error (Hd0)
37: Over-current detection error (Hd1)
38: Over-voltage detection error (Hd2)
39: Ground current detection error (Hd3)
40: Auto tuning error (AuE)
41: PID feedback loss (AFE)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
42: PG feedback error (PGF1)
43: PG feedback loss (PGF2)
44: PG feedback stall (PGF3)
45: PG slip error (PGF4)
46: PG ref input error (PGr1)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
47: PG ref loss (PGr2)
48: Analog current input loss (ACE)
49: External fault input (EF)
50: Emergency stop (EF1)
51: External Base Block (B.B.)
52: Password error (PcodE)
53: Reserved
54: Communication error (cE1)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
55: Communication error (cE2)
56: Communication error (cE3)
57: Communication error (cE4)
58: Communication Time-out (cE10)
59: PU time-out (cP10)
60: Brake transistor error (bF)
61: Y-connection/Δ-connection switch error (ydc)
62: Decel. Energy Backup Error (dEb)
63: Slip error (oSL)
○
64: Broken belt error (bEb)
○
○
○
65: Error PID feedback signal of tension (tdEv)
Fault Output Option 1 0~65535 (refer to bit table for fault code)
Fault Output Option 2 0~65535 (refer to bit table for fault code)
Fault Output Option 3 0~65535 (refer to bit table for fault code)
Fault Output Option 4 0~65535 (refer to bit table for fault code)
0
0
0
0
2
ꢀ06-23
ꢀ06-24
ꢀ06-25
ꢀ06-26
ꢀ06-27
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Electronic Thermal
Relay Selection (Motor 1: Standard motor
2) 2: Disable
0: Inverter motor
4-14
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory
Setting
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Electronic Thermal
Characteristic for
Motor 2
PTC (Positive
Temperature
30.0~600.0 sec
60.0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ06-28
0: Warn and keep operation
1: Warn and ramp to stop
0
○
○
ꢀ06-29
Coefficient) Detection 2: Warn and coast to stop
Selection
PTC Level
0.0~100.0%
50.0
0.20
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ06-30
ꢀ06-31
Filter Time for PTC
Detection
0.00~10.00sec
Output Frequency for 0.00~655.35 Hz
Malfunction
Output AC Voltage for 0.0~6553.5 V
Malfunction
0.00
0.0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
06-32
06-33
06-34
06-35
06-36
DC Voltage for
Malfunction
0.0~6553.5 V
0.0
Current Value for
Malfunction
0.00~655.35 Amp
0.00
0.0
IGBT Temperature for 0.0~6553.5 °C
Malfunction
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 7 Special Parameters
Factory
Setting
380.0
760.0
0
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Software Brake Level 230V: 350.0~450.0Vdc
460V: 700.0~900.0Vdc
DC Brake Current
Level
DC Brake Time during 0.0~60.0 sec
Start-up
DC Brake Time during 0.0~60.0 sec
Stopping
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ07-00
ꢀ07-01
ꢀ07-02
ꢀ07-03
ꢀ07-04
07-05
0~100%
0.0
0.0
Start-point for DC
Brake
0.00~600.00Hz
0.00
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
DC Brake Voltage
Gain
1~500
50
0
Momentary Power
Loss Operation
Selection
0: Operation stop after momentary power loss
1: Operation continues after momentary power loss,
speed search starts with the Master Frequency
reference value
○
○
ꢀ07-06
2: Operation continues after momentary power loss,
speed search starts with the minimum frequency
0.1~5.0 sec
Maximum Allowable
Power Loss Time
B.B. Time for Speed
Search
Current Limit for
Speed Search
Base-block Speed
Search
2.0
0.5
150
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ07-07
ꢀ07-08
ꢀ07-09
ꢀ07-10
0.1~5.0 sec
20~200%
0: Stop operation
1: Speed search starts with last frequency command
2: Speed search starts with minimum output frequency
0~10
Auto Restart after
Fault
0
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ07-11
ꢀ07-12
Speed Search during 0: Disable
Start-up 1: Speed search from maximum frequency
2: Speed search from start-up frequency
3: Speed search from minimum frequency
Decel. Time Selection 0: Disable
0
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ07-13
for Momentary Power 1: 1st decel. time
Loss
2: 2nd decel. time
3: 3rd decel. time
4: 4th decel. time
5: Current decel. time
6: Auto decel. Time
0.0~25.0 sec
DEB Return Time
0.0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ07-14
ꢀ07-15
ꢀ07-16
Dwell Time at Accel.
0.00~600.00sec
0.00~600.00Hz
0.00
0.00
Dwell Frequency at
Accel.
Dwell Time at Decel.
0.00~600.00sec
0.00~600.00Hz
0.00
0.00
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ07-17
ꢀ07-18
Dwell Frequency at
Decel.
Fan Control
0: Fan always ON
0
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ07-19
1: 1 minute after AC motor drive stops, fan will be OFF
2: AC motor drive runs and fan ON, AC motor drive
stops and fan OFF
3: Fan ON to run when preliminary heat sink
temperature attained
4: Fan always OFF
Torque Command
-100.0~100.0% (Pr. 07-22 setting=100%)
0.0
0
○
○
ꢀ07-20
ꢀ07-21
Torque Command
Source
0: Digital keypad
1: RS485 serial communication (RJ-11)
2: Analog signal (Pr.03-00)
0~500%
Maximum Torque
Command
Filter Time of Torque
Command
Speed Limit Selection 0: By Pr.07-25 and Pr.07-26
1: Frequency command source (Pr.00-20)
Torque Mode +Speed 0~120%
Limit
100
0.000
0
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ07-22
0.000~1.000 sec
ꢀ07-23
07-24
10
ꢀ07-25
ꢀ07-26
Torque Mode-Speed
Limit
0~120%
10
4-16
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory
Setting
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Source of Torque
Offset
0: Disable
1: Analog input (Pr.03-00)
0
○
○
○
ꢀ07-27
2: Torque offset setting
3: Control by external terminal (by Pr.07-29 to Pr.07-
31)
Torque Offset Setting 0.0~100.0%
High Torque Offset 0.0~100.0%
Middle Torque Offset 0.0~100.0%
Low Torque Offset 0.0~100.0%
0.0
30.0
20.0
10.0
200
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ07-28
ꢀ07-29
ꢀ07-30
ꢀ07-31
ꢀ07-32
Forward Motor Torque 0~500%
Limit
Forward Regenerative 0~500%
Torque Limit
Reverse Motor Torque 0~500%
Limit
Reverse Regenerative 0~500%
Torque Limit
Emergency Stop (EF) 0: Coast stop
200
200
200
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ07-33
ꢀ07-34
ꢀ07-35
ꢀ07-36
○
○
○
& Forced Stop
Selection
1: By deceleration Time 1
2: By deceleration Time 2
3: By deceleration Time 3
4: By deceleration Time 4
5: System Deceleration
6: Automatic Deceleration
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 8 High-function PID Parameters
Factory
Setting
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
0: No function
1: Negative PID feedback from external terminal AVI
(Pr.03-00)
2: Negative PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15, skip
direction)
3: Negative PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15)
4: Positive PID feedback from external terminal AVI
(Pr.03-00)
Input Terminal for PID
Feedback
○
○
○
○
0
ꢀ08-00
5: Positive PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15, skip
direction)
6: Positive PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Proportional Gain (P)
Integral Gain (I)
0.0~500.0%
80.0
1.00
0.00
ꢀ08-01
ꢀ08-02
ꢀ08-03
0.00~100.00 sec
0.00~1.00 sec
Derivative Control (D)
Upper limit for Integral
Control
PID Output Frequency
Limit
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
0.0~100.0%
0.0~110.0%
100.0
100.0
ꢀ08-04
ꢀ08-05
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
PID Offset
-100.0~+100.0%
0.0~2.5 sec
0.0
0.0
ꢀ08-06
ꢀ08-07
PID Delay Time
Feedback Signal Detection
Time
○
○
○
○
0.0~3600.0 sec
0.0
ꢀ08-08
0: Warn and keep operating
1: Warn and ramp to stop
2: Warn and coast to stop
○
○
○
○
Feedback Fault Treatment
0
ꢀ08-09
3: Warn and keep at last frequency
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Sleep Frequency
Wake-up Frequency
Sleep Time
0.00~600.00Hz
0.00~600.00Hz
0.0~6000.0 sec
1.0~50.0%
0.00
0.00
0.0
ꢀ08-10
ꢀ08-11
ꢀ08-12
ꢀ08-13
ꢀ08-14
PID Deviation Level
PID Deviation Time
10.0
5.0
0.1~300.0 sec
Filter Time for PID
Feedback
○
○
○
○
0.1~300.0 sec
5.0
ꢀ08-15
08-16
|
Reserved
08-20
Tension Control Selection 0: Disable
1: Closed-loop, speed mode
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
08-21
2: Line speed, speed mode
3: Reserved
4: Open-loop, torque mode
○
○
Wind Mode
0: Rewind
1: Unwind
1-65535
0
○
○
○
○
08-22
Mechanical Gear Ratio A
Mechanical Gear Ratio B
100
100
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
08-23
08-24
08-25
1-65535
Source of the Tension
Command/Line Speed
0: Parameter setting (Pr.08-26)
1: RS-485 communication setting (Pr.08-26)
2: Analog input (Pr. 03-00~03-02 is set to 14 PID target
value of tension, 03-00~03-02 is set to 12 line speed)
0.0~100.0%
PID Target Value of
Tension/Line Speed
Source of Tension/Line
Speed PID Feedback
50.0
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ08-26
0: Analog input (Pr. 03-00~03-02 is set to 11 PID
feedback of tension)
08-27
1: Pulse input (Pr.08-40)
Auto-tuning Tension PID
0: Disable
○
○
○
○
○
08-28
1: Reel diameter (08-29~08-31corresponds to 08-44,
08-32~08-34 corresponds to 08-43)
2: Frequency (08-29~08-31 corresponds to 01-07, 08-
32~08-34 corresponds to 01-00)
0.0~1000.0
Tension PID P1
Tension PID I1
Reserved
50.0
1.00
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ08-29
ꢀ08-30
08-31
0.00~500.00 sec
4-18
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory
Setting
50.0
Pr.
Explanation
Tension PID P2
Settings
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
0.0~1000.0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ08-32
ꢀ08-33
08-34
Tension PID I2
0.00~500.00 sec
1.00
Reserved
PID/Line Speed Output
Status
Tension/Line Speed PID
Output Limit
Source of Line Speed
Input Command
0: Positive output
1: Negative output
0~100.00% (according to Pr,01-00)
0
20.00
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ08-35
08-36
08-37
0: Disable
1: Analog input (Pr. 03-00~03-02 is set to 12 line speed)
2: RS-485 communication setting (Pr.08-41)
3: Pulse input (Pr.08-40)
4: DFM-DCM pulse input (Pr.02-18)
Max. Line Speed
Min. Line Speed
0.0~3000.0m/min
1000.0
0.0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
08-38
08-39
08-40
0.0~3000.0m/min
0.0~6000.0
Pulse Number for Each
Meter
0.0
Current Line Speed
0.0~3000.0m/min
0.0
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ08-41
Source of Reel Diameter
0: Calculated by line speed
1: Calculated by integrating thickness (encoder is on
reel shaft)(Pr.08-49~51, Pr.10-15)
08-42
2: Calculated by integrating thickness (encoder is on
motor)(Pr.08-23~08-24, 08-50~08-51, 10-00~10-01)
3: Calculated by analog input (Pr.03-00~03-02 is set to
13)
Max. Reel Diameter
Empty Reel Diameter
1.0~6000.0mm
1.0~6000.0mm
6000.0
1.0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
08-43
08-44
08-45
Source of Initial Reel
Diameter
Initial Reel Diameter
0: RS-485 communication setting (Pr.08-46)
1: Analog input (Pr.03-00-Pr.03-02 is set to 13)
1.0~6000.0mm
0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ08-46
08-47
08-48
08-49
Initial Reel Diameter 1
Initial Reel Diameter 2
1.0~6000.0mm
1.0~6000.0mm
1~10000ppr
Number of Pulse per
Revolution
Coil Number for Each
Layer
0.001~60.000mm
1.000
○
○
○
○
○
08-50
Material Thickness
0.001~60.000mm
1.000
1.00
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
08-51
Filter Time of Reel
Diameter
0.00 to 100.00 seconds
ꢀ08-52
Auto Compensation of
Reel Diameter
0: Disable
1: Enable
1.00
○
○
○
○
○
08-53
Current Reel Diameter
1.0~6000.0mm
1.0
1
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ08-54
Smart Start
0: Disable
1: Enable
08-55
2: In unwind mode, rewind in reverse direction
Switch Level for Smart
Start and PID function
Frequency for Smart Start 0.00~600.00Hz
0.0~100.0% (according to Pr.08-26)
15.0
○
○
○
○
○
○
08-56
2.00
3.00
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
08-57
ꢀ08-58
08-59
Accel. Time for Smart Start 0.01~600.00 seconds
Broken Belt Detection
0: Disable
1: Enable
Min. Line Speed of Broken 0.0~3000.0m/min
Belt Detection
0.0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
08-60
08-61
Allowance Error of Line
Speed of Broken Belt
Detection
1.0~6000.0mm
100.0
Detection Time of Broken 0.00~100.00 sec
Belt
1.00
100
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
08-62
08-63
Allowance Error Level of
Tension/Line Speed PID
Feedback
0~100%
Allowance Error Detection 0.0~10.0 sec
Time of Tension PID
0.5
○
○
○
○
08-64
Feedback
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory
Setting
0
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Error Treatment of Tension 0: Warn and keep operation
PID Feedback
○
○
○
○
08-65
1: Warn and coast to stop
2: Warn and ramp to stop
Upper Limit of Tension PID 0.0~100.0%
Feedback
Lower Limit of Tension PID 0.0~100.0%
Feedback
100.0
0.0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
08-66
08-67
Reserved
08-68
08-69
DFM Selection
0: Output frequency
1: Frequency command
0.00~100.00 sec
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Low-pass Filter Time of
Line Speed
0.00
08-70
08-71
|
Reserved
08-75
Source of Tension Setting 0: Communication RS-485 (Pr.08-78)
1: Analog input (Pr. 03-00~03-02 is set to 15 tension
0
○
08-76
setting) (Pr.08-78)
Max. Tension
0~30000 N
0
0
0
○
○
○
08-77
08-78
08-79
Tension Setting
0~30000 N
Source of Zero-speed
Tension Setting
0: Disable
1: Communication RS-485 (Pr.08-80)
2: Analog input (Pr. 03-00~03-02 is set to 16 zero-
speed tension) (Pr.08-80)
0~30000 N
Setting of Zero-speed
Tension
Source of Tension Taper
0
0
○
○
08-80
08-81
0: Communication RS-485 (Pr.08-82)
1: Analog input (Pr. 03-00~03-02 is set to 17 tension
taper)(Pr.08-82)
Tension Taper
0~100%
0
0.0
0
○
○
○
08-82
08-83
08-84
Friction Compensation
0.0~100.0%
Compensation Coefficient 0~30000
of Material Inertial
Torque Feedforward Gain 0.0~100.0%
50.0
5.00
○
○
08-85
08-86
Low Pass Filter Time of
Torque Feedforward
0.00~100.00
08-87
|
Reserved
08-99
4-20
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 9 Communication Parameters
Factory
Setting
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Communication
Address
COM1 Transmission
Speed
COM1 Transmission
Fault Treatment
1~254
1
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ09-00
ꢀ09-01
ꢀ09-02
4.8~115.2Kbps
9.6
3
0: Warn and keep operation
1: Warn and ramp to stop
2: Warn and coast to stop
3: No warning and keep operation
0.0~100.0 sec
COM1 Time-out
Detection
COM1 Communication 0: 7N1 (ASCII)
0.0
1
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ09-03
ꢀ09-04
Protocol
1: 7N2 (ASCII)
2: 7E1 (ASCII)
3: 7O1 (ASCII)
4: 7E2 (ASCII)
5: 7O2 (ASCII)
6: 8N1 (ASCII)
7: 8N2 (ASCII)
8: 8E1 (ASCII)
9: 8O1 (ASCII)
10: 8E2 (ASCII)
11: 8O2 (ASCII)
12: 8N1 (RTU)
13: 8N2 (RTU)
14: 8E1 (RTU)
15: 8O1 (RTU)
16: 8E2 (RTU)
17: 8O2 (RTU)
4.8~115.2Kbps
COM2 Transmission
Speed (Keypad)
COM2 Transmission
Fault Treatment
(Keypad)
9.6
3
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ09-05
ꢀ09-06
0: Warn and keep operation
1: Warn and ramp to stop
2: Warn and coast to stop
3: No warning and keep operation
0.0~100.0 sec
COM2 Time-out
Detection (Keypad)
COM2 Communication 0: 7N1 (ASCII)
Protocol (Keypad)
0.0
13
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ09-07
ꢀ09-08
1: 7N2 (ASCII)
2: 7E1 (ASCII)
3: 7O1 (ASCII)
4: 7E2 (ASCII)
5: 7O2 (ASCII)
6: 8N1 (ASCII)
7: 8N2 (ASCII)
8: 8E1 (ASCII)
9: 8O1 (ASCII)
10: 8E2 (ASCII)
11: 8O2 (ASCII)
12: 8N1 (RTU)
13: 8N2 (RTU)
14: 8E1 (RTU)
15: 8O1 (RTU)
16: 8E2 (RTU)
17: 8O2 (RTU)
2.0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Response Delay Time 0.0~200.0ms
ꢀ09-09
ꢀ09-10
Transmission Master
Frequency
0.00~600.00Hz
60.00
Block Transfer 1
Block Transfer 2
Block Transfer 3
Block Transfer 4
Block Transfer 5
Block Transfer 6
Block Transfer 7
Block Transfer 8
Block Transfer 9
0~65535
0~65535
0~65535
0~65535
0~65535
0~65535
0~65535
0~65535
0~65535
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ09-11
ꢀ09-12
ꢀ09-13
ꢀ09-14
ꢀ09-15
ꢀ09-16
ꢀ09-17
ꢀ09-18
ꢀ09-19
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory
Setting
0
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Block Transfer 10
0~65535
0~65535
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ09-20
ꢀ09-21
Multi-function Output
Status
Read-
only
AFM2 Status
0~4095
0~4095
Read-
only
Read-
only
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ09-22
ꢀ09-23
AFM3 Status
4-22
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 10 Speed Feedback Control Parameters
Factory
Setting
600
Pr.
Explanation
Encoder Pulse
Settings
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
10-00
10-01
1~20000
○
○
○
○
○
○
Encoder Input Type
Setting
0: Disable
0
1: Phase A leads in a forward run command and phase
B leads in a reverse run command
2: Phase B leads in a forward run command and phase
A leads in a reverse run command
3: Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a direction
input. (low input=reverse direction, high input=forward
direction)
4: Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a direction
input. (low input=forward direction, high input=reverse
direction)
5: Single-phase input
PG Feedback Fault
Treatment
0: Warn and keep operation
1: Warn and ramp to stop
2: Warn and coast to stop
2
○
○
○
○
ꢀ10-02
Detection Time for PG 0.00~10.0 sec
Feedback Fault
ASR (Auto Speed
Regulation) Control
( P) 1
1.0
10
○
○
○
○
ꢀ10-03
ꢀ10-04
0~40
ASR (Auto Speed
Regulation) Control (I)
1
ASR (Auto Speed
Regulation) Control
( P) 2
ASR (Auto Speed
Regulation) Control (I)
2
ASR 1/ASR2 Switch
Frequency
0.000~10.000 sec
0~40
0.100
10
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ10-05
ꢀ10-06
ꢀ10-07
0.000~10.000 sec
0.100
5.00~600.00Hz
0.000~0.350 sec
0~120% (0: disable)
0.0~2.0 sec
7.00
0.008
115
0.1
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ10-08
ꢀ10-09
ꢀ10-10
ꢀ10-11
ꢀ10-12
ꢀ10-13
ꢀ10-14
ASR Primary Low
Pass Filter Gain
PG Stall Level
○
○
○
○
○
PG Stall Detection
Time
PG Slip Range
0~50% (0: disable)
0.0~10.0 sec
50
PG Slip Detection
Time
0.5
PG Stall and Slip Error 0: Warn and keep operation
Treatment
2
1: Warn and ramp to stop
2: Warn and coast to stop
Pulse Input Type
Setting
0: Disable
0
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ10-15
1: Phase A leads in a forward run command and phase
B leads in a reverse run command
2: Phase B leads in a forward run command and phase
A leads in a reverse run command
3: Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a direction
input. (low input=reverse direction, high input=forward
direction)
4: Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a direction
input. (low input=forward direction, high input=reverse
direction)
Output Setting for
Frequency Division
(denominator)
PG Electrical Gear A
(Channel 1 of PG
card)
PG Electrical Gear B
(Channel 2 of PG
card)
PG Position Control
Point (Home)
1~255
1
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ10-16
ꢀ10-17
ꢀ10-18
1~5000
1~5000
0~20000
100
100
0
○
○
○
○
ꢀ10-19
ꢀ10-20
Range for PG Position 0~20000
Attained (Home range)
10
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory
Setting
10
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
0~40
○
○
○
○
○
○
P Gain of Zero Speed
I Gain of Zero Speed
ꢀ10-21
ꢀ10-22
ꢀ10-23
0.000~10.000 sec
0.100
30
○
○
Feed Forward Gain of 0~100
APR
Decelerate Time of
Position
Max. Frequency for
Resolution Switch
Reserved
0.00~600.00 sec/00~6000.0 sec
3.00
3.0
50.00
○
○
○
○
ꢀ10-24
50.00~600.00Hz
○
○
○
ꢀ10-25
10-26
PG Mechanical Gear
A1
PG Mechanical Gear
B1
PG Mechanical Gear
A2
PG Mechanical Gear
B2
1~65535
1~65535
1~65535
1~65535
100
100
100
100
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ10-27
ꢀ10-28
ꢀ10-29
ꢀ10-30
4-24
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 11 Advanced Parameters
Factory
Setting
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
bit 0: ASR Auto tuning
0
○
bit 1: Inertia estimate (only for FOCPG mode)
bit 2: Zero Servo
bit 3: Reserved
bit 4: Enable gain adjustment of position loop KP
1~65535 (256=1PU)
System Control
ꢀ11-00
ꢀ11-01
Per Unit of System
Inertia
400
○
○
0~40Hz
0~40Hz
0~200%
0~200%
10
10
30
90
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Low-speed Bandwidth
High-speed Bandwidth
PDFF Gain Value
Gain Value of Flux
Weakening Curve for
Motor 1
Gain Value of Flux
Weakening Curve for
Motor 2
Detection Time for
Phase-loss
ꢀ11-02
ꢀ11-03
ꢀ11-04
○
○
○
ꢀ11-05
0~200%
90
○
○
ꢀ11-06
ꢀ11-07
0.01~600.00 sec
0.20
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Reserved
11-08
0.0~320.0
60.0
0
○
○
○
○
Level of Phase-loss
ꢀ11-09
Speed Feed Forward 0~100%
Gain
11-10
0~40Hz
10
65
○
Zero-speed Bandwidth
Speed Response of
ꢀ11-11
ꢀ11-12
0: Disable
Flux Weakening Area 0~150%
○
0~20db
0
○
○
Notch Filter Depth
ꢀ11-13
ꢀ11-14
0.00~200.00
0.00
Notch Filter Frequency
Gain Value of Slip
Compensation
0.00~1.00
1.00
0.100
0.100
10.00
3.00
○
○
○
ꢀ11-15
ꢀ11-16
ꢀ11-17
ꢀ11-18
ꢀ11-19
Low-pass Filter Time
of Keypad Display
0.001~65.535sec
0.000~65.535sec
0.00~40.00
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Low-pass Filter Time
of PG2 Pulse Input
APR Gain
APR Curve Time
0.00~655.35 sec
11-20
|
Reserved
11-28
Accumulative
Operation Time of
Phase-loss
0~65535 (hour)
0
○
○
○
○
○
11-29
11-30
|
Reserved
11-40
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4.2 Version Differences
4.2.1 Version 2.02
New or update parameter groups are:
Group 2: Digital Input/Output Parameters
Group 3: Analog Input/Output Parameters
Group 6: Protection Parameters
Group 8: High-function PID Parameters
Group 10: Speed Feedback Control Parameters
4.2.2 Version 2.04
New or update parameter groups are:
Group 0 System Parameters
Group 2: Digital Input/Output Parameters
Group 3: Analog Input/Output Parameters
Group 5: Motor Parameters
Group 6: Protection Parameters
Group 8: High-function PID Parameters
Group 10: Speed Feedback Control Parameters
Version 2.02
Group 2 Digital Input/Output Parameters
New settings are marked in bold. In version 2.02, the parameters are from Pr.02-00 to Pr.02-34.
Factory
Setting
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
02-01
Multi-Function Input Command 1 (MI1)
(it is Stop terminal for 3-wire operation)
○
○
27: ASR1/ASR2 selection
02-02
02-03
02-04
02-05
02-06
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Multi-Function Input Command 2 (MI2)
Multi-Function Input Command 3 (MI3)
Multi-Function Input Command 4 (MI4)
Multi-Function Input Command 5 (MI5)
Multi-Function Input Command 6 (MI6)
(specific terminal for TRG)
28: Emergency stop (EF1)
29: Signal confirmation for Y-connection
30: Signal confirmation for Δ−connection
31: High torque bias (by Pr.07-29)
○
○
32: Middle torque bias (by Pr.07-30)
02-23
02-24
02-25
02-26
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Multi-Function Input Command 7
Multi-Function Input Command 8
Multi-Function Input Command 9
Multi-Function Input Command 10
33: Low torque bias (by Pr.07-31)
34: Enable multi-step position control
35: Enable position control
36: Enable position learning function
(valid at stop)
02-27
Multi-Function Input Command 11
37: Enable pulse position input
command
38: Disable write EEPROM function
39: Torque command direction
40: Force stop
○
○
○
○
02-28
02-29
02-30
Multi-Function Input Command 12
Multi-Function Input Command 13
Multi-Function Input Command 14
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
41: Serial position clock
42: Serial position input
43: Analog input resolution selection
29: Output when frequency >= Pr.02-33
Multi-function Output 1 RA, RB,
RC(Relay1)
Multi-function Output 2
MRA, MRC (Relay2)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ02-11
ꢀ02-12
30: Output when frequency < Pr.02-33
○
Multi-function Output 3 (MO1)
31: Y-connection for the motor coil
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ02-13
ꢀ02-14
Multi-function Output 4 (MO2)
32: Δ connection for the motor coil
4-26
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory
Setting
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Multi-function Output 5 (MO3)
33: Zero speed (actual output
frequency)
34: Zero speed with Stop (actual output
frequency)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ02-35
ꢀ02-36
Multi-function Output 6 (MO4)
Multi-function Output 7 (MO5)
Multi-function Output 8 (MO6)
Multi-function Output 9 (MO7)
Multi-function Output 10 (MO8)
Multi-function Output 11 (MO9)
Multi-function Output 12 (MOA)
35: Error output selection 1 (Pr.06-23)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ02-37
ꢀ02-38
ꢀ02-39
ꢀ02-40
ꢀ02-41
ꢀ02-42
36: Error output selection 2 (Pr.06-24)
37: Error output selection 3 (Pr.06-25)
38: Error output selection 4 (Pr.06-26)
39: Position attained (Pr.10-19)
40: Speed attained (including zero
speed)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
41: Multi-position attained
42: Crane function
Group 3 Analog Input/Output Parameters
In version 2.02, the parameters are from Pr.03-00 to Pr.03-20. The settings for Pr.03-00 to
Pr.03-02 are from 0 to 10
Factory
Setting
0
Pr.
Explanation
Analog Input 1 (AVI)
Settings
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
2: torque command (torque limit under
speed mode)
○
ꢀ03-00
3: Torque compensation command
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Analog Input 2 (ACI)
Analog Input 3 (AUI)
4: PID target value (refer to group 8)
ꢀ03-01
ꢀ03-02
5: PID feedback signal (refer to group
8)
6: P.T.C. thermistor input value
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
7: Positive torque limit
8: Negative torque limit
9: Regenerative torque limit
10: Positive/negative torque limit
Analog Output Value in REV Direction
0: Absolute value in REV direction
1: Output 0V in REV direction
2: Enable output voltage in REV
direction
0
○
○
○
○
ꢀ03-20
Group 6 Protection Parameters
In version 2.02, the parameters are from Pr.06-00 to Pr.06-31. The settings of Pr.06-01 are
shown as follows. The settings for Pr.06-17 to Pr.06-22 are from 0 to 62.
Factory
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Setting
Over-voltage Stall Prevention
0.0: Disable
350.0~450.0Vdc
ꢀ06-01
380.0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
700.0~900.0Vdc
760.0
06-17
06-18
06-19
06-20
06-21
06-22
Present Fault Record
0: No fault
1: Over-current during acceleration
(ocA)
2: Over-current during deceleration
(ocd)
3: Over-current during constant speed
(ocn)
0
0
0
0
0
0
Second Most Recent Fault Record
Third Most Recent Fault Record
Fourth Most Recent Fault Record
Fifth Most Recent Fault Record
Sixth Most Recent Fault Record
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Setting
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
4: Ground fault (GFF)
5: IGBT short-circuit (occ)
6: Over-curent at stop (ocS)
7: Over-voltage during acceleration
(ovA)
8: Over-voltage during deceleration
(ovd)
9: Over-voltage during constant speed
(ovn)
10: Over-voltage at stop (ovS)
11: Low-voltage during acceleration
(LvA)
12: Low-voltage during deceleration
(Lvd)
13: Low-voltage during constant speed
(Lvn)
14: Low-voltage at stop (LvS)
15: Phase loss (PHL)
16: IGBT heat sink over-heat (oH1)
17: Heat sink over-heat (oH2)(for 40HP
above)
18: TH1 open loop error (tH1o)
19: TH2 open loop error (tH2o)
20: Fan error signal output
21: over-load (oL) (150% 1Min)
22: Motor 1 over-load (EoL1)
23: Motor 2 over-load (EoL2)
24: Motor PTC overheat (oH3)
25: Fuse error (FuSE)
26: over-torque 1 (ot1)
27: over-torque 1 (ot2)
28: Insufficient torque 1
29: Insufficient torque 2
30: Memory write-in error (cF1)
31: Memory read-out error (cF2)
32: Isum current detection error (cd0)
33: U-phase current detection error
(cd1)
34: V-phase current detection error
(cd2)
35: W-phase current detection error
(cd3)
36: Clamp current detection error (Hd0)
37: Over-current detection error (Hd1)
38: Over-voltage detection error (Hd2)
39: Ground current detection error (Hd3)
40: Auto tuning error (AuE)
41: PID feedback loss (AFE)
42: PG feedback error (PGF1)
43: PG feedback loss (PGF2)
44: PG feedback stall (PGF3)
45: PG slip error (PGF4)
46: PG ref input error (PGr1)
47: PG ref loss (PGr2)
48: Analog current input loss (ACE)
49: External fault input (EF)
50: Emergency stop (EF1)
51: External Base Block (B.B.)
52: Password error (PcodE)
53: Software error (ccodE)
54: Communication error (cE1)
55: Communication error (cE2)
56: Communication error (cE3)
57: Communication error (cE4)
58: Communication Time-out (cE10)
59: PU time-out (cP10)
60: Brake transistor error (bF)
61: Y-connection/Δ-connection switch
error (ydc)
62: Decel. Energy Backup Error (dEb)
Filter Time for PTC Detection
0.00~10.00sec
0.20
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ06-31
Group 8 High-function PID Parameters
4-28
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
In version 2.02, the parameters are from Pr.08-00 to Pr.08-15.
Factory
Setting
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Filter Time for PID Feedback
0.1~300.0 sec
5.0
○
○
○
○
ꢀ08-15
Group 10 Speed Feedback Control Parameters
In version 2.02, the parameters are from Pr.10-00 to Pr.10-28.
Factory
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Setting
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
○
○
○
PG Mechanical Gear B1
1~5000
100
ꢀ10-28
Group 11 Advanced Parameters
In version 2.02, the parameters are from Pr.11-00 to Pr.11-30.
Factory
Setting
60.0
Pr.
Explanation
Level of Phase-loss
Settings
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
0.0~320.0
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ11-09
Reserved
11-10
11-18
|
Reserved
11-28
Accumulative Operation Time of Phase-
loss
11-29
0~65535 (hour)
0
○
○
○
○
○
APR Curve Time
0.00~655.35 sec
3.00
○
ꢀ11-30
Version 2.04
Group 0 System Parameters
Factory
Setting
0
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
0: Display the frequency command value (LED F)
1: Display the actual output frequency (LED H)
2: Multifunction display, see Pr.00-04 (LED U)
3: Display the output current (A)
○
○
○
○
○
Start-up Display Selection
ꢀ00-03
0: Display output current (A)
0
○
○
○
○
○
1: Display counter value (C)
2: Display output frequency (H)
u
3: Display DC-BUS voltage (
4: Display output voltage (E)
)
5: Output power factor angle (n)
6: Display output power (kW)
7: Display actual motor speed (HU)
8: Display estimate output torque (kg-m)
9: Display PG position (G) (refer to Pr.10-00 and Pr.10-
01)
10: Display PID feedback
11: Display AVI (%)
12: Display ACI (%)
Content of Multi Function
Display
ꢀ00-04
13: Display AUI (%)
14: Display the temperature of heat sink (°C)
15: Display the temperature of IGBT (°C)
16: The status of digital input (ON/OFF)
17: The status of digital output (ON/OFF)
18: Multi-step speed
19: The corresponding CPU pin status of digital input
20: The corresponding CPU pin status of digital output
21: Number of actual motor revolution (PG1 of PG
card)
22: Pulse input frequency (PG2 of PG card)
23: Pulse input position (PG2 of PG card)
Group 2 Digital Input/Output Parameters
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
New settings 44~50 for Pr.02-00~Pr.02-06 and new parameter 02-43.
Factory
Setting
0
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
0: FWD/STOP, REV/STOP
1: FWD/STOP, REV/STOP (Line Start Lockout)
2: RUN/STOP, REV/FWD
3: RUN/STOP, REV/FWD (Line Start Lockout)
4: 3-wire (momentary push button)
5: 3-wire (momentary push button and Line Start
Lockout)
0: no function
1: multi-step speed command 1/multi-step position
command 1
2: multi-step speed command 2/ multi-step position
command 2
3: multi-step speed command 3/ multi-step position
command 3
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
02-00
2-wire/3-wire Operation
Control
○
○
○
○
○
○
02-01
02-02
Multi-Function Input
Command 1 (MI1)
(it is Stop terminal for 3-
wire operation)
1
2
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Multi-Function Input
Command 2 (MI2)
4: multi-step speed command 4/ multi-step position
command 4
02-03
02-04
02-05
02-06
3
4
0
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
5: Reset
Multi-Function Input
Command 3 (MI3)
6: JOG command
7: acceleration/deceleration speed inhibit
8: the 1st, 2nd acceleration/deceleration time selection
9: the 3rd, 4th acceleration/deceleration time selection
10: EF input (07-36)
Multi-Function Input
Command 4 (MI4)
Multi-Function Input
Command 5 (MI5)
○
○
○
Multi-Function Input
Command 6 (MI6)
(specific terminal for
TRG)
11: B.B. input
12: Output stop
02-23
02-24
02-25
02-26
02-27
02-28
02-29
02-30
Multi-Function Input
Command 7
Multi-Function Input
Command 8
Multi-Function Input
Command 9
Multi-Function Input
Command 10
Multi-Function Input
Command 11
Multi-Function Input
Command 12
Multi-Function Input
Command 13
Multi-Function Input
Command 14
13: cancel the setting of the optimal
acceleration/deceleration time
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
14: switch between drive settings 1 and 2
15: operation speed command form AVI
16: operation speed command form ACI
17: operation speed command form AUI
18: Emergency Stop (07-36)
○
19: Digital Up command
20: Digital Down command
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
21: PID function disabled
22: clear counter
23: input the counter value (multi-function input
command 6)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
24: FWD JOG command
25: REV JOG command
○
○
26: TQC+PG/FOC+PG model selection
27: ASR1/ASR2 selection
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
28: Emergency stop (EF1)
29: Signal confirmation for Y-connection
30: Signal confirmation for Δ−connection
31: High torque bias (by Pr.07-29)
32: Middle torque bias (by Pr.07-30)
33: Low torque bias (by Pr.07-31)
34: Enable multi-step position control
35: Enable position control
○
○
○
36: Enable position learning function (valid at stop)
37: Enable pulse position input command
38: Disable write EEPROM function
39: Torque command direction
40: Force stop
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
41: Serial position clock
42: Serial position input
43: Analog input resolution selection
4-30
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory
Setting
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
44: Reset initial reel diameter
45: Reset initial reel diameter 0
46: Reset initial reel diameter 1
47: Reset PID control integration of tension
48: Mechanical gear ratio switch
49: Reserved
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
50: Reserved
Multi-function Output 1
RA, RB, RC(Relay1)
11
1
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
0: No function
1: Operation indication
ꢀ02-11
ꢀ02-12
Multi-function Output 2
MRA, MRC (Relay2)
2: Operation speed attained
3: Desired frequency attained 1 (Pr.02-19)
4: Desired frequency attained 2 (Pr.02-21)
5: Zero speed (frequency command)
6: Zero speed with stop (frequency command)
7: Over torque (OT1) (Pr.06-06~06-08)
8: Over torque (OT2) (Pr.06-09~06-11)
9: Drive ready
Multi-function Output 3
(MO1)
0
0
ꢀ02-13
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Multi-function Output 4
(MO2)
0
ꢀ02-14
ꢀ02-35
ꢀ02-36
ꢀ02-37
ꢀ02-38
ꢀ02-39
ꢀ02-40
ꢀ02-41
ꢀ02-42
10: User-defined Low-voltage Detection
11: Malfunction indication
Multi-function Output 5 12: Mechanical brake release (Pr.02-31)
(MO3)
13: Overheat
14: Software brake signal
Multi-function Output 6 15: PID feedback error
(MO4)
16: Slip error (oSL)
17: Terminal count value attained (Pr.02-16)
○
○
○
○
○
○
Multi-function Output 7 18: Preliminary count value attained (Pr.02-17)
(MO5)
19: Baseblock (B.B.) Indication
20: Warning output
Multi-function Output 8 21: Over voltage warning
(MO6)
22: Over-current stall prevention warning
23: Over-voltage stall prevention warning
Multi-function Output 9 24: Operation mode indication
(MO7)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
25: Forward command
26: Reverse command
Multi-function Output
10 (MO8)
27: Output when current >= Pr.02-32
28: Output when current < Pr.02-32
29: Output when frequency >= Pr.02-33
30: Output when frequency < Pr.02-33
31: Y-connection for the motor coil
○
○
○
○
Multi-function Output
11 (MO9)
32: Δ connection for the motor coil
Multi-function Output
12 (MOA)
33: Zero speed (actual output frequency)
34: Zero speed with Stop (actual output frequency)
35: Error output selection 1 (Pr.06-23)
36: Error output selection 2 (Pr.06-24)
37: Error output selection 3 (Pr.06-25)
38: Error output selection 4 (Pr.06-26)
39: Position attained (Pr.10-19)
○
○
○
○
40: Speed attained (including zero speed)
○
○
○
41: Multi-position attained
42: Crane function
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
43: Motor zero-speed output (Pr.02-43)
44: Max. reel diameter attained
45: Empty reel diameter attained
46: Broken belt detection
47: Break release at stop
48: Error PID feedback of tension
49: Reserved
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Setting
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
50: Reserved
0~65535 rpm
Zero-speed Level of
Motor
0
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ02-43
Group 3 Analog Input/Output Parameters
New settings 11~16 for Pr.03-00~Pr.03-02 and new parameters 03-21~03-26.
Factory
Setting
1
Pr.
Explanation
Analog Input 1 (AVI)
Analog Input 2 (ACI)
Settings
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
0: No function
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ03-00
ꢀ03-01
1: Frequency command (torque limit under TQR
control mode)
2: torque command (torque limit under speed mode)
0
0
Analog Input 3 (AUI)
○
○
ꢀ03-02
3: Torque compensation command
4: PID target value (refer to group 8)
5: PID feedback signal (refer to group 8)
6: P.T.C. thermistor input value
7: Positive torque limit
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
8: Negative torque limit
9: Regenerative torque limit
10: Positive/negative torque limit
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
11: PID feedback signal of tension
12: Line speed
13: Reel diameter
14: PID target value of tension (tension closed-
loop)
○
○
○
15: Tension setting (tension open-loop)
16: Zero-speed tension
17: Tension taper
Analog Output Selection
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
0: Output frequency (Hz)
1: Frequency command (Hz)
2: Motor speed (Hz)
3: Output current (rms)
4: Output voltage
5: DC Bus Voltage
6: Power factor
ꢀ03-18
ꢀ03-21
ꢀ03-24
Analog Output
Selection 2
Analog Output
Selection 3
7: Power
8: Output torque
9: AVI
10: ACI
11: AUI
12: q-axis current
13: q-axis feedback value
14: d-axis current
15: d-axis feedback value
16: q-axis voltage
17: d-axis voltage
18: Torque command
19: Pulse frequency command
Analog Output Gain 2 0~200.0%
100.0
0
ꢀ03-22
ꢀ03-23
Analog Output Value in 0: Absolute value in REV direction
REV Direction 2
○
○
○
○
○
1: Output 0V in REV direction
2: Enable output voltage in REV direction
Analog Output Gain 3 0~200.0%
100.0
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ03-25
ꢀ03-26
Analog Output Value in 0: Absolute value in REV direction
REV Direction 3
1: Output 0V in REV direction
2: Enable output voltage in REV direction
4-32
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 5 Motor Parameters
Factory
Setting
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
05-00
Motor Auto Tuning
0: No function
1: Rolling test
2: Static Test
3: Reserved
40-100%
0
○
○
○
05-01
Full-load Current of
Motor 1
Rated power of Motor 1 0~655.35
#.##
○
○
○
○
○
○
#.##
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ05-02
ꢀ05-03
Rated speed of Motor 1 0~65535
(rpm)
1710
1710 (60Hz, 4 poles), 1410 (50Hz, 4 poles)
Group 6 Protection Parameters
New setting 0 for Pr.06-01, new settings 64~65 for Pr.06-17~Pr.06-22 and new parameters 06-
32~06-36.
Factory
Setting
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Over-voltage Stall
Prevention
0.0: Disable
ꢀ06-01
350.0~450.0Vdc
700.0~900.0Vdc
0: No fault
380.0
760.0
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
06-17
06-18
Present Fault Record
1: Over-current during acceleration (ocA)
2: Over-current during deceleration (ocd)
3: Over-current during constant speed (ocn)
4: Ground fault (GFF)
Second Most Recent
Fault Record
0
0
0
Third Most Recent Fault 5: IGBT short-circuit (occ)
06-19
06-20
Record
6: Over-curent at stop (ocS)
7: Over-voltage during acceleration (ovA)
8: Over-voltage during deceleration (ovd)
9: Over-voltage during constant speed (ovn)
10: Over-voltage at stop (ovS)
Fourth Most Recent
Fault Record
11: Low-voltage during acceleration (LvA)
06-21
06-22
Fifth Most Recent Fault 12: Low-voltage during deceleration (Lvd)
Record
13: Low-voltage during constant speed (Lvn)
14: Low-voltage at stop (LvS)
0
0
15: Phase loss (PHL)
16: IGBT heat sink over-heat (oH1)
Sixth Most Recent Fault 17: Heat sink over-heat (oH2)(for 40HP above)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Record
18: TH1 open loop error (tH1o)
19: TH2 open loop error (tH2o)
20: Fan error signal output
21: over-load (oL) (150% 1Min)
22: Motor 1 over-load (EoL1)
23: Motor 2 over-load (EoL2)
24: Motor PTC overheat (oH3)
25: Fuse error (FuSE)
26: over-torque 1 (ot1)
27: over-torque 1 (ot2)
28: Reserved
29: Reserved
30: Memory write-in error (cF1)
31: Memory read-out error (cF2)
32: Isum current detection error (cd0)
33: U-phase current detection error (cd1)
34: V-phase current detection error (cd2)
35: W-phase current detection error (cd3)
36: Clamp current detection error (Hd0)
37: Over-current detection error (Hd1)
38: Over-voltage detection error (Hd2)
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Setting
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
39: Ground current detection error (Hd3)
40: Auto tuning error (AuE)
41: PID feedback loss (AFE)
42: PG feedback error (PGF1)
43: PG feedback loss (PGF2)
44: PG feedback stall (PGF3)
45: PG slip error (PGF4)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
46: PG ref input error (PGr1)
47: PG ref loss (PGr2)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
48: Analog current input loss (ACE)
49: External fault input (EF)
50: Emergency stop (EF1)
51: External Base Block (B.B.)
52: Password error (PcodE)
53: Reserved
54: Communication error (cE1)
55: Communication error (cE2)
56: Communication error (cE3)
57: Communication error (cE4)
58: Communication Time-out (cE10)
59: PU time-out (cP10)
60: Brake transistor error (bF)
61: Y-connection/Δ-connection switch error (ydc)
62: Decel. Energy Backup Error (dEb)
63: Slip error (oSL)
○
64: Broken belt error (bEb)
○
○
○
65: Error PID feedback signal of tension (tdEv)
Output Frequency for 0.00~655.35 Hz
Malfunction
Output AC Voltage for 0.0~6553.5 V
Malfunction
0.00
0.0
06-32
06-33
06-34
06-35
06-36
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
DC Voltage for
Malfunction
Current Value for
Malfunction
0.0~6553.5 V
0.0
0.00~655.35 Amp
0.00
0.0
IGBT Temperature for 0.0~6553.5 °C
Malfunction
Group 8 High-function PID Parameters
New parameters 08-21~08-99
Factory
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Setting
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
Input Terminal for PID
Feedback
0: No function
1: Negative PID feedback from external terminal AVI
(Pr.03-00)
ꢀ08-00
0
○
○
○
○
2: Negative PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15,
skip direction)
3: Negative PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15)
4: Positive PID feedback from external terminal AVI
(Pr.03-00)
5: Positive PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15,
skip direction)
6: Positive PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15)
Proportional Gain (P)
0.0~500.0%
ꢀ08-01
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
80.0
0
Tension Control
Selection
0: Disable
08-21
1: Closed-loop, speed mode
2: Line speed, speed mode
3: Reserved
4: Open-loop, torque mode
○
4-34
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory
Setting
Pr.
Explanation
Wind Mode
Settings
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
0: Rewind
1: Unwind
08-22
08-23
08-24
08-25
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Mechanical Gear Ratio 1-65535
A
Mechanical Gear Ratio 1-65535
B
Source of the Tension
Command/Line Speed
100
100
0
0: Parameter setting (Pr.08-26)
1: RS-485 communication setting (Pr.08-26)
2: Analog input (Pr. 03-00~03-02 is set to 14 PID
target value of tension, 03-00~03-02 is set to 12
line speed)
PID Target Value of
Tension/Line Speed
Source of Tension/Line 0: Analog input (Pr. 03-00~03-02 is set to 11 PID
0.0~100.0%
ꢀ08-26
50.0
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
08-27
Speed PID Feedback
feedback of tension)
1: Pulse input (Pr.08-40)
Auto-tuning Tension
PID
0: Disable
08-28
○
○
○
○
○
1: Reel diameter (08-29~08-31corresponds to 08-
44, 08-32~08-34 corresponds to 08-43)
2: Frequency (08-29~08-31 corresponds to 01-07,
08-32~08-34 corresponds to 01-00)
0.0~1000.0
Tension PID P1
Tension PID I1
Reserved
ꢀ08-29
ꢀ08-30
50.0
1.00
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
0.00~500.00 sec
08-31
ꢀ08-32
ꢀ08-33
08-34
Tension PID P2
Tension PID I2
0.0~1000.0
50.0
1.00
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
0.00~500.00 sec
Reserved
PID/Line Speed Output 0: Positive output
Status 1: Negative output
Tension/Line Speed PID 0~100.00% (according to Pr,01-00)
Output Limit
0
20.00
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ08-35
08-36
08-37
Source of Line Speed
Input Command
0: Disable
1: Analog input (Pr. 03-00~03-02 is set to 12 line
speed)
2: RS-485 communication setting (Pr.08-41)
3: Pulse input (Pr.08-40)
4: DFM-DCM pulse input (Pr.02-18)
0.0~3000.0m/min
Max. Line Speed
Min. Line Speed
1000.0
0.0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
08-38
08-39
08-40
0.0~3000.0m/min
Pulse Number for Each 0.0~6000.0
Meter
0.0
Current Line Speed
0.0~3000.0m/min
0.0
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ08-41
Source of Reel
Diameter
0: Calculated by line speed
08-42
1: Calculated by integrating thickness (encoder
is on reel shaft)(Pr.08-49~51, Pr.10-15)
2: Calculated by integrating thickness (encoder
is on motor)(Pr.08-23~08-24, 08-50~08-51, 10-
00~10-01)
3: Calculated by analog input (Pr.03-00~03-02 is
set to 13)
Max. Reel Diameter
Empty Reel Diameter
1.0~6000.0mm
6000.0
1.0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
08-43
08-44
08-45
1.0~6000.0mm
Source of Initial Reel
Diameter
Initial Reel Diameter
0: RS-485 communication setting (Pr.08-46)
1: Analog input (Pr.03-00-Pr.03-02 is set to 13)
1.0~6000.0mm
0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ08-46
08-47
08-48
08-49
Initial Reel Diameter 1
Initial Reel Diameter 2
1.0~6000.0mm
1.0~6000.0mm
1~10000ppr
Number of Pulse per
Revolution
Coil Number for Each
Layer
0.001~60.000mm
1.000
○
○
○
○
○
08-50
Material Thickness
0.001~60.000mm
1.000
1.00
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
08-51
Filter Time of Reel
Diameter
0.00 to 100.00 seconds
ꢀ08-52
Auto Compensation of 0: Disable
1.00
○
○
○
○
○
08-53
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Setting
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
Reel Diameter
1: Enable
Current Reel Diameter
Smart Start
1.0~6000.0mm
1.0
1
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ08-54
0: Disable
1: Enable
08-55
2: In unwind mode, rewind in reverse direction
Switch Level for Smart 0.0~100.0% (according to Pr.08-26)
Start and PID function
15.0
2.00
3.00
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
08-56
08-57
ꢀ08-58
08-59
08-60
08-61
Frequency for Smart
Start
0.00~600.00Hz
Accel. Time for Smart
Start
0.01~600.00 seconds
Broken Belt Detection
0: Disable
1: Enable
Min. Line Speed of
0.0~3000.0m/min
0.0
Broken Belt Detection
Allowance Error of Line 1.0~6000.0mm
Speed of Broken Belt
100.0
Detection
Detection Time of
Broken Belt
Allowance Error Level
of Tension/Line Speed
PID Feedback
0.00~100.00 sec
0~100%
1.00
100
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
08-62
08-63
Allowance Error
0.0~10.0 sec
0.5
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
08-64
08-65
08-66
08-67
Detection Time of
Tension PID Feedback
Error Treatment of
Tension PID Feedback 1: Warn and coast to stop
2: Warn and ramp to stop
0: Warn and keep operation
Upper Limit of Tension 0.0~100.0%
PID Feedback
100.0
0.0
○
○
Lower Limit of Tension 0.0~100.0%
PID Feedback
Reserved
08-68
08-69
DFM Selection
0: Output frequency
1: Frequency command
Low-pass Filter Time of 0.00~100.00 sec
Line Speed
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
0.00
08-70
08-71
|
Reserved
08-75
Source of Tension
Setting
0: Communication RS-485 (Pr.08-78)
0
○
08-76
1: Analog input (Pr. 03-00~03-02 is set to 15
tension setting) (Pr.08-78)
0~30000 N
Max. Tension
0
0
0
○
○
○
08-77
08-78
08-79
Tension Setting
0~30000 N
Source of Zero-speed
Tension Setting
0: Disable
1: Communication RS-485 (Pr.08-80)
2: Analog input (Pr. 03-00~03-02 is set to 16 zero-
speed tension) (Pr.08-80)
0~30000 N
Setting of Zero-speed
Tension
Source of Tension
Taper
0
0
○
○
08-80
08-81
0: Communication RS-485 (Pr.08-82)
1: Analog input (Pr. 03-00~03-02 is set to 17
tension taper)(Pr.08-82)
Tension Taper
0~100%
0
0.0
0
○
○
○
08-82
08-83
08-84
Friction Compensation 0.0~100.0%
Compensation
Coefficient of Material
Inertial
0~30000
Torque Feed Forward
Gain
Low Pass Filter Time of 0.00~100.00
Torque Feed Forward
0.0~100.0%
50.0
5.00
○
○
08-85
08-86
08-87
|
Reserved
08-99
4-36
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 9 Communication Parameters
Factory
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Setting
Read-
only
Read-
only
Multi-function Output
Status
AFM2 Status
0~65535
0~4095
0~4095
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ09-21
ꢀ09-22
ꢀ09-23
AFM3 Status
Read-
only
Group 10 Speed Feedback Control Parameters
New parameters 10-29~10-30
Factory
Setting
10
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
ASR (Auto Speed
Regulation) Control ( P) 1
ASR (Auto Speed
Regulation) Control ( P) 2
0~40
0~40
0~40
○
○
○
○
ꢀ10-04
ꢀ10-06
10
10
○
○
○
○
○
○
P Gain of Zero Speed
ꢀ10-21
ꢀ10-29
ꢀ10-30
PG Mechanical Gear A2 1~5000
PG Mechanical Gear B2 1~5000
100
100
○
○
Group 11 Advanced Parameters
Updated parameters 11-00 and 11-09~11-10 and new parameters 11-18~11-40.
Factory
Setting
0
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
bit 0: ASR Auto tuning
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
○
bit 1: Inertia estimate
System Control
bit 2: Zero Servo
bit 3: Reserved
bit 4: Enable gain adjustment of position loop KP
0.01~600.00 sec
ꢀ11-00
ꢀ11-07
Detection Time for
Phase-loss
0.20
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Reserved
11-08
0.0~320.0
60.0
0
○
○
Level of Phase-loss
ꢀ11-09
Speed Feed Forward 0~100%
Gain
11-10
Zero-speed
Bandwidth
Speed Response of
Flux Weakening Area 0~150%
0~40Hz
10
65
○
○
○
ꢀ11-11
0: Disable
○
ꢀ11-12
ꢀ11-13
ꢀ11-14
0~20db
0
○
○
Notch Filter Depth
Notch Filter
Frequency
0.00~200.00
0.00
Gain Value of Slip
Compensation
ꢀ11-15
ꢀ11-16
ꢀ11-17
ꢀ11-18
ꢀ11-19
0.00~1.00
1.00
0.100
0.100
10.00
3.00
○
○
○
Low-pass Filter Time
of Keypad Display
0.001~65.535sec
0.000~65.535sec
0.00~40.00
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Low-pass Filter Time
of PG2 Pulse Input
APR Gain
APR Curve Time
0.00~655.35 sec
11-20
|
Reserved
11-28
Accumulative
Operation Time of
Phase-loss
0~65535 (hour)
0
○
○
○
○
○
11-29
11-30
|
Reserved
11-40
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4.3 Description of Parameter Settings
Group 0 User Parameters
ꢀ: This parameter can be set during operation.
00-00 Identity Code of the AC Motor Drive
Control
mode
Factory setting: ##
Factory setting: ##
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
Read Only
00-01 Rated Current Display of the AC Motor Drive
Control
mode
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
Read Only
Pr. 00-00 displays the identity code of the AC motor drive. The capacity, rated current, rated
voltage and the max. carrier frequency relate to the identity code. Users can use the following
table to check how the rated current, rated voltage and max. carrier frequency of the AC motor
drive correspond to the identity code.
Pr.00-01 displays the rated current of the AC motor drive. By reading this parameter the user
can check if the AC motor drive is correct.
The factory setting is rated current for the constant torque and can be set in Pr.00-12.
230V Series
kW
HP
Pr.00-00
0.75
1.0
4
1.5
2.0
6
2.2
3.0
8
3.7
5.0
10
5.5
7.5
12
7.5
10
14
11
15
16
15
20
18
18.5
25
20
22
30
22
30
40
24
37
50
26
Rated Current
for Constant
Torque (A)
Rated Current
for Variable
Torque (A)
Max. Carrier
Frequency
5
7.5
9.4
11
17
25
33
49
65
75
90
120
146
183
6.3
13.8
21.3
31.3
41.3
61.3
81.3
93.8
113
150
15kHz
9kHz
460V Series
kW
HP
Pr.00-00
0.75 1.5
2.2
3.0
9
3.7
5.0
11
5.5
7.5
13
7.5
10
15
11
15
17
15 18.5
20
19
22
30
23
30
40
25
37
50
27
45
60
29
55
75
31
75
100
33
1.0
5
2.0
7
25
21
Rated Current
for Constant
Torque (A)
Rated Current
for Variable
Torque (A)
Max. Carrier
Frequency
3
4.2
5.3
6
8.5
13
18
24
32
38
45
60
73
91
110 150
3.8
7.5 10.6 16.3 22.5 30
15kHz
40 47.5 56.3 75 91.3 113.8 138 188
9kHz 6kHz
4-38
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Parameter Reset
00-02
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0
1
2
8
9
No Function
Read Only
Enable Group 11 Parameters Setting
Keypad Lock
All parameters are reset to factory settings (50Hz, 220V/380V)
10 All parameters are reset to factory settings (60Hz, 220V/440V)
When it is set to 1, all parameters are read only except Pr.00-00~00-07 and it can be used
with password setting for password protection.
This parameter allows the user to reset all parameters to the factory settings except the fault
records (Pr.06-17 ~ Pr.06-22).
50Hz: Pr.01-01 is set to 50Hz and Pr.01-02 is set to 230V or 400V.
60Hz: Pr.01-01 is set to 60Hz and Pr.01-02 is set to 230Vor 460V.
When Pr.00-02=08, the KPV-CE01 keypad is locked and only Pr.00-02 can be set. To unlock
the keypad, set Pr.00-02=00.
When Pr.00-02 is set to 1 or 8, Pr.00-02 setting should be set to 0 before setting to other
setting.
After setting Pr.00-02 to 2, it can display group 11 to re-connect the keypad after disconnection
or re-power on after the power off.
ꢀStart-up Display Selection
00-03
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings 0
Display the frequency command value. (LED F)
Display the actual output frequency (LED H)
Multifunction display, see Pr.00-04 (LED U)
Display the output current (A)
1
2
3
This parameter determines the start-up display page after power is applied to the drive.
00-04 ꢀContent of Multi-Function function Display
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
00-04 ꢀContent of Multi-Function function Display
Settings
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Display the output current in A supplied to the motor
U
U
U
U
Display the counter value which counts the number of
pulses on TRG terminal
Display actual output frequency (H)
Display the actual DC BUS voltage in VDC of the AC
motor drive
Display the output voltage in VAC of terminals U, V, W
to the motor.
U
U
U
U
U
Display the power factor angle in º of terminals U, V, W
to the motor.
Display the output power in kW of terminals U, V and W
to the motor.
Display the actual motor speed in rpm (enabled when
using with PG card).
Display the estimated value of torque in Nm as it relates
to current.
Display PG position. When Pr.10-01 is set to 1 or 2, it
means that motor angle is 0~4XPr.10-00.
U
U
10 Display analog feedback signal value in %.
Display the signal of AVI analog input terminal in %.
11
U
U
U
Range 0~10V corresponds to 0~100%. (1.)
Display the signal of ACI analog input terminal in %.
12
Range 4~20mA/0~10V corresponds to 0~100%. (2.)
Display the signal of AUI analog input terminal in %.
13
Range -10V~10V corresponds to 0~100%. (3.)
14
15
Display the temperature of heat sink in °C.
Display the temperature of IGBT in °C.
U
U
U
U
16 Display digital input status ON/OFF (i)
17 Display digital output status ON/OFF (o)
18 Display multi-step speed
U
U
U
19 The corresponding CPU pin status of digital input (i.)
20 The corresponding CPU pin status of digital output (o.)
4-40
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
00-04 ꢀContent of Multi-Function function Display
21 Number of actual motor revolution (PG1 of PG card) (Z)
22 Pulse input frequency (PG2 of PG card) (4)
U
U
U
23 Pulse input position (PG2 of PG card) (4.)
This parameter sets the display when Pr. 00-03 is set to 2.
It is used to display the content when LED U is ON. It is helpful for getting the AC motor drive’s
status by this parameter.
Terminal MI14 MI13 MI12 MI11 MI10 MI9 MI8 MI7 MI6 MI5 MI4 MI3 MI2 MI1 REV FWD
Status
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0: OFF, 1: ON
MI1: Pr.02-01 is set to 1 (multi-step speed command 1/multi-step position command 1)
MI6: Pr.02-06 is set to 8 (the 1st, 2nd acceleration/deceleration time selection)
If REV, MI1 and MI6 are ON, the value is 0000 0000 1000 01102 in binary and 0086H in HEX.
At the meanwhile, if Pr.00-04 is set to “16” or “19”, it will display “0086” with LED U is ON on
the keypad KPV-CE01. The setting 16 is the status of digital input and the setting 19 is the
corresponding CPU pin status of digital input. User can set to 16 to monitor digital input status
and then set to 19 to check if the wire is normal.
Terminal
Status
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
MO2 MO1 RA MRA
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
MRA: Pr.02-11 is set to 9 (Drive ready).
After applying the power to the AC motor drive, if there is no other abnormal status, the
contact will be ON. At the meanwhile, if Pr.00-04 is set to 17 or 20, it will display 0001 with
LED U is ON on the keypad. The setting 17 is the status of digital output and the setting 20 is
the corresponding CPU pin status of digital output. User can set 17 to monitor the digital
output status and then set to 20 to check if the wire if normal.
00-05 ꢀUser Defined Coefficient K
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
Digit 4: decimal point number (0 to 3)
Digit 0-3: 40 to 9999
It is used digital setting method
Digital 4: decimal point number (0: no decimal point, 1: 1 decimal point and so on.)
Digit 0-3: 40 to 9999 (the corresponding value for the max. frequency).
Digital
4
3
2
1
0
F
H
U
corresponding value
decimal point number
For example, if use uses rpm to display the motor speed and the corresponding value to the 4-
pole motor 60Hz is 1800. This parameter can be set to 01800 to indicate that the
corresponding value for 60Hz is 1800rpm. If the unit is rps, it can be set 10300 to indicate the
corresponding value for 60Hz is 30.0 (a decimal point).
00-06 Software Version
Control
mode
Factory setting: Read Only
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
Display
Read Only
#.##
00-07 ꢀPassword Input
Unit: 1
Control
mode
Factory setting: 00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
Display
1 to 9998 and 10000 to 65535
00~02 (times of wrong password)
The function of this parameter is to input the password that is set in Pr.00-08. Input the correct
password here to enable changing parameters. You are limited to a maximum of 3 attempts.
After 3 consecutive failed attempts, a blinking “PcodE” will show up to force the user to restart
the AC motor drive in order to try again to input the correct password.
When forgetting password, you can decode by setting 9999 and press button
Please note that all the settings will be set to factory setting.
twice.
Unit: 1
00-08 ꢀPassword Set
4-42
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Control
mode
Factory setting: 00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
Display
1 to 9998 and 10000 to 65535
00
01
No password set or successful input in Pr. 00-07
Password has been set
To set a password to protect your parameter settings.
If the display shows 00, no password is set or password has been correctly entered in Pr.00-
07. All parameters can then be changed, including Pr.00-08.
The first time you can set a password directly. After successful setting of password the display
will show 01.
Be sure to record the password for later use.
To cancel the parameter lock, set the parameter to 00 after inputting correct password into Pr.
00-07.
The password consists of min. 2 digits and max. 5 digits.
How to make the password valid again after decoding by Pr.00-07:
Method 1: Re-input original password into Pr.00-08 (Or you can enter a new password if you
want to use a changed or new one).
Method 2: After rebooting, password function will be recovered.
Password Decode Flow Chart
Password Setting
Decoding Flow Chart
00-07
00-08
00-08
Displays 01 when
entering correct
password into
Pr.00-08.
Displays 00 when
entering correct
password into
Pr.00-07.
Incorrect Password
Correct Password
END
END
00-08
00-07
Forgetting Passwrod
Displays 00 when
entering correct
password into
Pr.00-07.
3 chances to enter the correct
password.
00-07
1st time displays "01" if
password is incorrect.
2nd time displays "02", if
password is incorrect.
3rd time displays "P code"
(blinking)
After entering 9999, press
twice to decode. The parameter
setting will be set to factory setting.
If the password was entered
incorrectly after three tries,
the keypad will be locked.
Turn the power OFF/ON to
re-enter the password.
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Unit: 1
00-09 ꢀEnergy Saving Gain
Control
FOCPG
mode
Factory setting: 100%
Settings
10~1000 %
When Pr.00-19 is set to1, this parameter can be used for energy saving. The setting should be
decreased when the energy saving is not well. When the motor is vibrated, the setting should
be increased.
00-10 Control Method
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0
1
2
3
4
V/f control
V/f + Encoder (VFPG)
Sensorless vector control (SVC)
FOC vector control + Encoder (FOCPG)
Torque control + Encoder (TQRPG)
This parameter determines the control method of the AC motor drive:
Setting 0: user can design V/f ratio by requirement and control multiple motors simultaneously.
Setting 1: User can use PG card with Encoder to do close-loop speed control.
Setting 2: To have optimal control characteristic by auto-tuning.
Setting 3: To increase torque and control speed precisely. (1:1000)
Setting 4: To increase accuracy for torque control.
00-11 V/f Curve Selection
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
VF
VFPG
Settings
0
1
2
V/f curve determined by group 01
1.5 power curve
Square curve
When it is set to 0, the V/f curve setting for the motor 1 is according to Pr.01-01~Pr.01-08 and
Pr. 01-35~01-42 are for the motor 2.
When setting to 1 or 2, the settings of the 2nd voltage/frequency and the 3rd voltage/frequency
are invalid.
4-44
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
01-02 voltage%
100
90
80
1.5 Power curve
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
Square curve
0
80
100
20
40
60
00-12 ꢀ Constant/Variable Torque Selection
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
Settings
0
1
Constant Torque (100%)
Variable Torque (125%)
When “1” is selected, the oL level is 125% of rated drive current. All other overload ratings will
not change, example: 150% of rated drive current for 60 seconds.
00-13 ꢀ Optimal Acceleration/Deceleration Setting
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
Settings
0
1
Linear accel./decel. I
Auto accel., linear decel.
2
3
4
Linear accel., auto decel.
Auto accel./decel. I
Stall prevention by auto accel./decel. (limited by 01-12 to 01-21)
It can decrease the drive’s vibration during load starts and stops by setting this parameter.
Also it will speed up to the setting frequency with the fastest and smoothest start-up current
when it detects small torque. At deceleration, it will auto stop the drive with the fastest and the
smoothest deceleration time when the regenerated voltage of the load is detected.
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Frequency
01-00
Max.
1
Frequency
1
2
When Pr.00-13 is set to 0.
When Pr.00-13 is set to 3.
2
Min.
Frequency
01-05
Time
decel. time
accel. time
01-12 01-14
01-13 01-15
01-17 01-19
01-18
01-16
Accel./Decel. Time
00-14 Time Unit for Acceleration/Deceleration and S Curve
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
Settings
0
1
Unit: 0.01 second
Unit: 0.1 second
This parameter determines the time unit for the Acceleration/Deceleration setting. Refer to
Pr.01-12 ~ Pr.01-19 (accel./decel. Time 1 to 4), Pr. 01-20~Pr.01-21 (JOG accel./decel. Time)
and Pr. 01-24~Pr.01-27 (S curve accel./decel. Time).
00-15 Reserved
00-16 Reserved
Unit: 1
00-17 ꢀCarrier Frequency
Control
mode
Factory setting: 10
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
1~15kHz
This parameter determinates the PWM carrier frequency of the AC motor drive.
230V/460V Series
1-5HP
0.75-3.7kW
01~15kHz
10kHz
7.5-25HP
5.5-18.5kW
01~15kHz
9kHz
30-60HP
22-45kW
01~09kHz
6kHz
75-100HP
55-75Kw
01~06kHz
6kHz
Models
Setting Range
Factory Setting
Electromagnetic
Noise or Leakage
Current
Heat
Dissipation
Current
Wave
Carrier
Frequency
Acoustic
Noise
Significant
Minimal
Minimal
1kHz
8kHz
15kHz
Minimal
Significant
Significant
4-46
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
From the table, we see that the PWM carrier frequency has a significant influence on the
electromagnetic noise, AC motor drive heat dissipation, and motor acoustic noise.
00-18 ꢀAuto Voltage Regulation (AVR) Function
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0
1
2
Enable AVR
Disable AVR
Disable AVR when deceleration stop
It is used to select the AVR mode. AVR is used to regulate the output voltage to the motor. For
example, if V/f curve is set to AC200V/50Hz and the input voltage is from 200 to 264VAC, the
output voltage won’t excess AC200V/50Hz. If the input voltage is from 180 to 200V, the output
voltage to the motor and the input voltage will be in direct proportion.
When setting Pr.00-18 to 1 during ramp to stop and used with auto accel./decel. function, the
acceleration will be smoother and faster.
00-19 ꢀ Auto Energy-saving Operation
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
Settings
0
1
Disable
Enable
When the Auto Energy-saving function is enabled, the drive will operate with full voltage during
acceleration and deceleration. At constant speed, the AC drive will calculate the optimal output
voltage value for the load. It is possible for the output voltage to be 25% below Maximum
Output Voltage during auto energy-saving operation. This function should not be used with
variable loads or continuous rated output loads.
When output frequency is constant, i.e. constant operation, the output voltage will be auto
decreased with load reduction. To make the AC motor drive runs under the energy-saving with
the minimum value of the product of voltage and current.
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Output Voltage
100%
The maximum output voltage
reduction is 25%.
75%
Frequency
Auto Energy-saving Operation
00-20 ꢀ Source of the Master Frequency Command
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
Settings
0
1
Digital keypad (KPV-CE01)
RS-485 serial communication
2
3
4
5
External analog input (Pr. 03-00)
External UP/DOWN terminal
Pulse input without direction command (Pr.10-15 without direction)
Pulse input with direction command (Pr.10-15)
This parameter determines the drive’s master frequency source.
00-21 ꢀ Source of the Operation Command
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0
1
Digital keypad (KPV-CE01)
External terminals. Keypad STOP disabled.
2
RS-485 serial communication (RJ-11). Keypad STOP disabled.
When Pr.00-21 is set to 1, it also needs to set Pr.00-20 and Pr.00-21 to 0. After pressing PU
key to make LED PU to be light, RUN, JOG and STOP key are valid now.
00-22 ꢀ Stop Method
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0
1
Ramp to stop
Coast to stop
4-48
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
The parameter determines how the motor is stopped when the AC motor drive receives a valid
stop command.
Output
Frequency
Output
Frequency
Time
Time
Free running
to stop
Operation
Command
Operation
Command
RUN
STOP
RUN
STOP
Ramp to stop: the AC motor drive decelerates from the maximum output frequency (Pr. 01-
00) to minimum output frequency (Pr. 01-09) according to the deceleration time and then
stop.
Coast to stop: the AC motor drive stops the output instantly upon a STOP command and
the motor free runs until it comes to a complete standstill.
(1) It is recommended to use “ramp to stop” for safely of personnel or to prevent material
from being wasted in applications where the motor has to stop after the drive is stopped.
The deceleration time has to be set accordingly.
(2) If the motor free running is allowed or the load inertia is large, it is recommended to
select “coast to stop”. For example, blowers, punching machines and pumps.
The stop method of the torque control is also set by Pr.00-22.
00-23 ꢀ Reverse Operation
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0
1
Enable reverse
Disable reverse
2
Disable forward
This parameter enables the AC motor drives to run in the Reverse Direction. It may be used to
prevent a motor from running in a direction that would consequently injure humans or damage
the equipment.
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 1 Basic Parameters
Unit: 0.01
01-00 Maximum Output Frequency
Control
mode
Factory setting: 60.00/50.00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
50.0 to 600.00Hz
This parameter determines the AC motor drive’s Maximum Output Frequency. All the AC
motor drive frequency command sources (analog inputs 0 to +10V, 4 to 20mA and -10V to
+10V) are scaled to correspond to the output frequency range.
01-01 1st Output Frequency Setting 1
01-35 1st Output Frequency Setting 2
Control
Unit: 0.01
Factory setting: 60.00/50.00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
mode
Settings
0.00~600.00Hz
These are for the base frequency and motor rated frequency.
This value should be set according to the rated frequency of the motor as indicated on the
motor nameplate. If the motor is 60Hz, the setting should be 60Hz. If the motor is 50Hz, it
should be set to 50Hz.
Pr.01-35 is used for the application occasion that uses double base motor.
01-02 1st Output Voltage Setting 1
01-36 1st Output Voltage Setting 2
Control
Unit: 0.1
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
mode
Settings 230V series 0.1 to 255.0V
460V series 0.1 to 510.0V
Factory Setting: 220.0
Factory Setting: 440.0
These are for the base frequency and motor rated frequency.
This value should be set according to the rated voltage of the motor as indicated on the motor
nameplate. If the motor is 220V, the setting should be 220.0. If the motor is 200V, it should be
set to 200.0.
There are many motor types in the market and the power system for each country is also
difference. The economic and convenience method to solve this problem is to install the AC
motor drive. There is no problem to use with the different voltage and frequency and also can
amplify the original characteristic and life of the motor.
01-03 2nd Output Frequency Setting 1
Unit: 0.01
4-50
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0.50
VF
VFPG
SVC
Settings
0.00~600.00Hz
01-04 ꢀ2nd Output Voltage Setting 1
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
VF
VFPG
SVC
Settings
230V series
460V series
0.1 to 255.0V
0.1 to 510.0V
Factory Setting: 5.0
Factory Setting: 10.0
Unit: 0.01
01-37 2nd Output Frequency Setting 2
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0.50
VF
VFPG
SVC
Settings
0.00~600.00Hz
01-38 ꢀ2nd Output Voltage Setting 2
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
VF
VFPG
SVC
Settings
230V series
460V series
0.1 to 255.0V
0.1 to 510.0V
Factory Setting: 5.0
Factory Setting: 10.0
Unit: 0.01
01-05 3rd Output Frequency Setting 1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.50
VF
VFPG
SVC
Settings
0.00~600.00Hz
01-06 ꢀ3rd Output Voltage Setting 1
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
VF
VFPG
SVC
Settings
230V series
460V series
0.1 to 255.0V
0.1 to 510.0V
Factory Setting: 5.0
Factory Setting: 10.0
Unit: 0.01
01-39 3rd Output Frequency Setting 2
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.50
VF
VFPG
SVC
Settings
0.00~600.00Hz
01-40 ꢀ3rd Output Voltage Setting 2
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
VF
VFPG
SVC
Settings
230V series
460V series
0.1 to 255.0V
0.1 to 510.0V
Factory Setting: 5.0
Factory Setting: 10.0
Unit: 0.01
01-07 4th Output Frequency Setting 1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
Settings
0.00~600.00Hz
01-08 ꢀ4th Output Voltage Setting 1
Unit: 0.1
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Control
mode
VF
VFPG
SVC
Settings
230V series
460V series
0.1 to 255.0V
0.1 to 510.0V
Factory Setting: 0.0
Factory Setting: 0.0
Unit: 0.01
01-41 4th Output Frequency Setting 2
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0.00~600.00Hz
01-42 ꢀ4th Output Voltage Setting 2
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
VF
VFPG
SVC
Settings
230V series
460V series
0.1 to 255.0V
0.1 to 510.0V
Factory Setting: 0.0
Factory Setting: 0.0
V/f curve setting is usually set by the motor’s allowable loading characteristics. Pay special
attention to the motor’s heat dissipation, dynamic balance, and bearing lubricity, if the loading
characteristics exceed the loading limit of the motor.
For the V/f curve setting, it should be Pr.01-01≥ Pr.01-03≥ Pr.01-05≥ Pr.01-07. There is no
limit for the voltage setting, but a high voltage at the low frequency may cause motor damage,
overheat, stall prevention or over-current protection. Therefore, please use the low voltage at
the low frequency to prevent motor damage.
Pr.01-35 to Pr.01-42 is the V/f curve for the motor 2. When multi-function input terminals Pr.02-
01 to Pr.02-14 is set to 14 and enabled or switch to the Δ-connection, the AC motor drive will
act as the 2nd V/f curve.
01-09 Start Frequency
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.50
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
Settings
0.00~600.00Hz
When start frequency is higher than the min. output frequency, drives’ output will be from start
frequency to the setting frequency. Please refer to the following diagram for details.
Fcmd=frequency command,
Fstart=start frequency (Pr.01-09),
fstart=actual start frequency of drive,
Fmin=4th output frequency setting (Pr.01-07/Pr.01-41),
Flow=output frequency lower limit (Pr.01-11)
4-52
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
NO
Fcmd>Fmin
by Pr.01-34
fstart=Fmin
YES
YES
NO
Flow=0
H=Fcmd
Hz
Fcmd
Fstart>Fmin
YES
Fmin
fstart=Fstart
Fstart
Time
NO
operation after
start-up
NO
Flow=0
Fcmd>Flow
NO
YES
by
Pr.01-34
YES
Fcmd<Fmin
NO
by
Pr.01-34
Fcmd>Fmin
NO
YES
H=Flow
YES
H=Fcmd
Hz
H=Fcmd
Hz
Hz
60Hz
H=Flow
Flow>Fcmd1
>Fmin
60Hz
Flow
Fcmd1
Fmin
H=Fcmd1
Fcmd1>Flow&
Fcmd1>Fmin
Fcmd
Fcmd1
Fmin
Fcmd2
Flow
Fstart
Fmin
Fcmd2
Time
by Pr.01-34
Time
Time
by Pr.01-34
Fmin>Fcmd2
Fcmd2>Flow&
Fcmd2<Fmin
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
NO
Fcmd>Fmin
by Pr.01-34
fstart=Fmin
YES
YES
NO
Flow=0
H=Fcmd
Fstart>Fmin
Hz
Fcmd
YES
Fmin
fstart=Fstart
Fstart
Time
NO
operation after
start-up
NO
Flow=0
Fcmd>Flow
NO
YES
by
Pr.01-34
YES
Fcmd<Fmin
NO
by
Pr.01-34
Fcmd>Fmin
NO
YES
H=Flow
YES
H=Fcmd
Hz
H=Fcmd
Hz
Hz
60Hz
H=Flow
Flow>Fcmd1
>Fmin
60Hz
Flow
Fcmd1
Fmin
H=Fcmd1
Fcmd1>Flow &
Fcmd1>Fmin
Fcmd
Fcmd1
Fmin
Fcmd2
Flow
Fstart
Fmin
Fcmd2
Time
by Pr.01-34
Time
Time
by Pr.01-34
Fmin>Fcmd2
Fcmd2>Flow &
Fcmd2<Fmin
01-10 Output Frequency Upper Limit
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 600.00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
Settings
0.00~600.00Hz
01-11 Output Frequency Lower Limit
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
Settings
0.00~600.00Hz
The upper/lower output frequency setting is used to limit the actual output frequency. If the
frequency setting is higher than the upper limit, it will run with the upper limit frequency. If
output frequency lower than output frequency lower limit and frequency setting is higher than
4-54
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
min. frequency, it will run with lower limit frequency. The upper limit frequency should be set to
be higher than the lower limit frequency.
Voltage
Output Frequency
Upper Limit
Output Frequency
Lower Limit
1st Output
01-10
01-11
Voltage Setting 1
01-02
Frequency output
ranges limitation
2nd Output
Voltage Setting 1
01-04
Regular V/f Curve
Special V/f Curve
3rd Output
Voltage Setting 1
01-06
4th Output
Voltage Setting 1
Frequency
01-08
4th Freq.
01-07 01-09
01-05 01-03
3rd Freq.
01-01
1st Freq.
01-00
Maximum Output
2nd Freq.
Start Freq.
Frequency
V/f Curve
01-12 ꢀAccel. Time 1
01-13 ꢀDecel. Time 1
01-14 ꢀAccel. Time 2
01-15 ꢀDecel. Time 2
01-16 ꢀAccel. Time 3
01-17 ꢀDecel. Time 3
01-18 ꢀAccel. Time 4
01-19 ꢀDecel. Time 4
Control
Unit: 0.1/0.01
Unit: 0.1/0.01
Unit: 0.1/0.01
Unit: 0.1/0.01
Unit: 0.1/0.01
Unit: 0.1/0.01
Unit: 0.1/0.01
Unit: 0.1/0.01
Factory Setting: 10.00/10.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
mode
Settings 0.00~600.00 sec/0.00~6000.0 sec
01-20 ꢀ JOG Acceleration Time
01-21 ꢀ JOG Deceleration Time
Control
Unit: 0.1/0.01
Unit: 0.1/0.01
Factory Setting: 1.00/1.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
mode
Settings
0.00~600.00 sec/0.00~6000.0 sec
The Acceleration Time is used to determine the time required for the AC motor drive to ramp
from 0Hz to Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01-00).
The Deceleration Time is used to determine the time require for the AC motor drive to
decelerate from the Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01-00) down to 0Hz.
The Acceleration/Deceleration Time is invalid when using Pr.00-13 Optimal
Acceleration/Deceleration Setting.
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
The Acceleration/Deceleration Time 1, 2, 3, 4 are selected according to the Multi-function Input
Terminals settings. See Pr.02-01 to Pr.02-30 for details.
When enabling torque limit and stall prevention function, actual accel./decel. time will longer
than the above action time.
Frequency
01-00
Max. Output
Frequency
Frequency
Setting
Time
accel. time
decel. time
01-13,15,17,19,21
01-12,14,16,18,20
Accel./Decel. Time
01-22 ꢀ JOG Frequency
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 6.00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0.00~600.00Hz
Both external terminal JOG and key “JOG” on the keypad can be used. When the jog
command is ON, the AC motor drive will accelerate from 0Hz to jog frequency (Pr.01-22).
When the jog command is OFF, the AC motor drive will decelerate from Jog Frequency to zero.
The used Accel./Decel. time is set by the Jog Accel./Decel. time (Pr.01-20, Pr.01-21).
01-23 ꢀ1st/4th Accel./decel. Frequency
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
Settings
0.00~600.00Hz
This parameter selects the frequency point for transition from acceleration/deceleration time 1
to acceleration/deceleration time 4.
The transition from acceleration/deceleration time 1 to acceleration/deceleration time 4, may
also be enabled by the external terminals (Pr. 02-01 to 02-08). The external terminal has
priority over Pr. 01-23.
01-24 ꢀ S-curve for Acceleration Departure Time 1
01-25 ꢀ S-curve for Acceleration Arrival Time 2
01-26 ꢀ S-curve for Deceleration Departure Time 1
Unit: 0.1/0.01
Unit: 0.1/0.01
Unit: 0.1/0.01
4-56
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
01-27 ꢀ S-curve for Deceleration Arrival Time 2
Unit: 0.1/0.01
Factory Setting: 0.2/0.0
Control
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
mode
Settings
0.00~25.00 sec /0.00~250.0 sec
It is used to give the smoothest transition between speed changes. The accel./decel. curve
can adjust the S-curve of the accel./decel. When it is enabled, the drive will have different
accel./decel. curve by the accel./decel. time.
The S-curve function is disabled when Pr.00-13 is set to 0.
The Actual Accel. Time = selected accel. Time + (Pr.01-24 + Pr.01-25)/2
The Actual Decel. Time = selected decel. Time + (Pr.01-26 + Pr.01-27)/2
Frequency
01-26
01-25
Time
01-24
01-27
01-28 Skip Frequency 1 (upper limit)
01-29 Skip Frequency 1 (lower limit)
01-30 Skip Frequency 2 (upper limit)
01-31 Skip Frequency 2 (lower limit)
01-32 Skip Frequency 3 (upper limit)
01-33 Skip Frequency 3 (lower limit)
Control
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 0.00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
mode
Settings
0.00~600.00Hz
These parameters are used to set the skip frequency of the AC drive. The skip frequencies are
useful when a motor has vibration at a specific frequency bandwidth. By skipping this
frequency, the vibration will be avoided.
01-34 Mode Selection when Frequency< Fmin
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
Settings
0
1
Output Waiting
Zero-speed operation
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
2
Fmin (4th output frequency setting)
When the frequency is less than Fmin (Pr.01-07 or Pr.01-41), it will operate by this parameter.
When it is set to 0, the AC motor drive will be in waiting mode without voltage output from
terminals U/V/W.
When setting 1, it will execute DC brake by Vmin(Pr.01-08 and Pr.01-42) in V/f, VFPG and
SVC modes.
When it is set to 2, the AC motor drive will run by Fmin (Pr.01-07, Pr.01-41) and Vmin (Pr.01-
08, Pr.01-42) in V/f, VFPG, SVC and FOCPG modes.
In V/f, VFPG and SVC modes
fout
01-34=1
01-34=2
01-34=0
stop output
fmin
01-07
0Hz
0Hz
stop waiting for output
0Hz operation
(DC brake)
In FOCPG mode, when Pr.01-34 is set to 2, it will act according Pr.01-34 setting.
fout
01-34=1
01-34=2
01-34=0
fmin
01-07
frequency command
frequency command
4-58
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 2 Digital Input/Output Parameters
02-00 ꢀ2-wire/3-wire Operation Control
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0
1
2
3
4
5
FWD/STOP, REV/STOP
FWD/STOP, REV/STOP (Line Start Lockout)
RUN/STOP, REV/FWD
RUN/STOP, REV/FWD (Line Start Lockout)
3-wire (momentary push button)
3-wire (momentary push button and Line Start Lockout)
Three of the six methods include a “Line Start Lockout” feature. When line start lockout is
enabled, the drive will not run once applying the power. The Line Start Lockout feature doesn’t
guarantee the motor will never start under this condition. It is possible the motor may be set in
motion by a malfunctioning switch.
02-00
Control Circuits of the External Terminal
0, 1
FWD:("OPEN":STOP)
FWD/STOP
2-wire operation control (1)
("CLOSE":FWD)
REV/STOP
FWD/STOP
REV/STOP
REV:("OPEN": STOP)
("CLOSE": REV)
DCM
VFD-VE
2, 3
FWD:("OPEN":STOP)
("CLOSE":RUN)
2-wire operation control (2)
RUN/STOP
FWD/REV
REV:("OPEN": FWD)
("CLOSE": REV)
RUN/STOP
REV/FWD
DCM
VFD-VE
4, 5
FWD "CLOSE":RUN
MI1 "OPEN":STOP
3-wire operation control
RUN
STOP
REV/FWD "OPEN": FWD
"CLOSE": REV
REV/FWD
DCM
VFD-VE
02-01 Multi-Function Input Command 1 (MI1)
02-02 Multi-Function Input Command 2 (MI2)
02-03 Multi-Function Input Command 3 (MI3)
Factory Setting: 1
Factory Setting: 2
Factory Setting: 3
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
02-04 Multi-Function Input Command 4 (MI4)
Factory Setting: 4
Factory Setting: 0
Factory Setting: 0
Factory Setting: 0
Factory Setting: 0
Factory Setting: 0
Factory Setting: 0
Factory Setting: 0
Factory Setting: 0
Factory Setting: 0
Factory Setting: 0
02-05 Multi-Function Input Command 5 (MI5)
02-06 Multi-Function Input Command 6 (MI6)
02-23 Multi-Function Input Command 7 (MI7)
02-24 Multi-Function Input Command 8 (MI8)
02-25 Multi-Function Input Command 9 (MI9)
02-26 Multi-Function Input Command 10 (MIA)
02-27 Multi-Function Input Command 11 (MIB)
02-28 Multi-Function Input Command 12
02-29 Multi-Function Input Command 13
02-30 Multi-Function Input Command 14
Settings
0-50
Control Mode
Settings
VF
○
○
VFPG
○
SVC
○
FOCPG TQRPG
○
○
0: no function
1: multi-step speed command 1/multi-step position
command 1
○
○
○
2: multi-step speed command 2/ multi-step position
command 2
3: multi-step speed command 3/ multi-step position
command 3
4: multi-step speed command 4/ multi-step position
command 4
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
5: Reset
6: JOG command
7: acceleration/deceleration speed inhibit
8: the 1st, 2nd acceleration/deceleration time selection
9: the 3rd, 4th acceleration/deceleration time selection
10: EF input (07-36)
○
○
○
11: B.B. input
12: Output stop
4-60
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Control Mode
Settings
VF
○
VFPG
○
SVC
○
FOCPG TQRPG
○
13: cancel the setting of the optimal
acceleration/deceleration time
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
14: switch between drive settings 1 and 2
15: operation speed command form AVI
16: operation speed command form ACI
17: operation speed command form AUI
18: Emergency Stop (07-36)
○
19: Digital Up command
20: Digital Down command
21: PID function disabled
○
○
22: clear counter
23: input the counter value (multi-function input command
6)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
24: FWD JOG command
25: REV JOG command
○
○
26: TQC+PG/FOC+PG model selection
27: ASR1/ASR2 selection
28: Emergency stop (EF1)
29: Signal confirmation for Y-connection
30: Signal confirmation for connection
31: High torque bias (by Pr.07-29)
32: Middle torque bias (by Pr.07-30)
33: Low torque bias (by Pr.07-31)
34: Enable multi-step position control
35: Enable position control
○
○
○
○
○
36: Enable position learning function (valid at stop)
37: Enable pulse position input command
38: Disable write EEPROM function
39: Torque command direction
40: Force stop
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
41: Serial position clock
42: Serial position input
43: Analog input resolution selection
44: Reset initial reel diameter
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
45: Reset initial reel diameter 0
46: Reset initial reel diameter 1
47: Reset PID control integration of tension
48: Mechanical Gear Ratio Switch
49: Reserved
50: Reserved
This parameter selects the functions for each multi-function terminal.
The terminals of Pr.02-23~Pr.02-27 are virtual and set as MI7~MIB when using with optional
card EMV-APP01
If Pr.02-00 is set to 3-wire operation control. Terminal MI1 is needed for the 3rd wire position.
Therefore, MI1 is not allowed for any other operation.
Multi-function input commands 7-14 are the extension terminals of Pr.02-01 to Pr.02-06. There
are 14 terminals but the terminals 7-14 are virtual terminals and you can set the status of bit 8-
15 of Pr.02-10 to ON or OFF by KPV-CE01 or communication.
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Settings
Functions
Descriptions
0
No Function
Multi-step speed
1
command 1/multi-step
position command 1
Multi-step speed
command 2/ multi-step
position command 2
15 step speeds could be conducted through the digital
statuses of the 4 terminals, and 17 in total if the master speed
and JOG are included. (Refer to Pr. 04-00~04-29)
2
3
4
Multi-step speed
command 3/ multi-step
position command 3
Multi-step speed
command 4/ multi-step
position command 4
After the error of the drive is eliminated, use this terminal to
reset the drive.
5
6
Reset
JOG Command
JOG operation
When this function is enabled, acceleration and deceleration
is stopped and the AC motor drive start to accel./decel. from
the inhibit point.
Acceleration/deceleration
Speed Inhibit
7
8
The 1st, 2nd acceleration The acceleration/deceleration time of the drive could be
or deceleration time
selection
selected from this function or the digital statuses of the
terminals; there are 4 acceleration/deceleration speeds in
total for selection.
The 3rd, 4th acceleration
or deceleration time
selection
9
10
EF Input
External fault input terminal
If the ON/OFF function of the terminal is pre-determined,
output of the drive will be cut off immediately, and the motor
will then be of the B.B. status. And once the ON/OFF function
is restored, the drive will then trace from the bottom upward to
catch up with its mutual rotation speed with the same
frequency before B.B., then speed up to the pre-set
frequency. Even if the motor is of a complete stop after B.B.,
as long as the ON/OFF status is restored, the speed-tracing
function could still be operated.
11
B.B. Input
If the ON/OFF function of the terminal is pre-determined,
output of the drive will be cut off immediately, and the motor
will then be free run. And once the ON/OFF function is
restored, the drive will accelerate to the setting frequency.
12
13
Output Stop
Cancel the setting of the Before using this function, Pr.00-13 should be set to
4-62
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Settings
Functions
Descriptions
optimal accel./decel. time 01/02/03/04 first. When this function is enabled, OFF is for
auto mode and ON is for linear accel./decel.
Switch between drive
settings 1 and 2
When this function is enabled, the drive will start to use motor
2 parameters.
14
15
16
17
Operation speed
command form AVI
When this function is enabled, the source of the frequency will
force to be AVI.
Operation speed
command form ACI
When this function is enabled, the source of the frequency will
force to be ACI.
Operation speed
command form AUI
When this function is enabled, the source of the frequency will
force to be AUI.
When this function is enabled, the drive will ramp to stop by
Pr.07-36 setting.
18
19
20
21
Emergency Stop (07-36)
Digital Up command
Digital Down command
PID function disabled
When this function is enabled, the frequency will be increased
and decreased. If this function keeps ON, the frequency will
be increased/decreased by Pr.02-07/Pr.02-08. This function is
the same as the ▲▼ key on the keypad.
When this function is ON, the PID function is disabled.
When this function is enabled, it will clear current counter
value and display “0”. Only when this function is disabled, it
will keep counting upward.
22
23
Clear counter
Input the counter value
(multi-function input
command 6)
When this function is enabled, the counter value will increase
1.
When this function is enabled, the drive will execute forward
Jog command.
24
25
FWD JOG command
REV JOG command
When this function is enabled, the drive will execute reverse
Jog command.
OFF: FOC+PG speed control mode.
ON: TQR+PG torque control mode.
TQC+PG/FOC+PG
model selection
26
27
ON: speed will be adjusted by ASR 2 setting.
OFF: speed will be adjusted by ASR 1 setting.
ASR1/ASR2 selection
Emergency stop (EF1)
When it is ON, the drive will execute emergency stop. (it will
have fault code record)
28
29
30
31
Signal confirmation for Y-
connection
When it is ON, the drive will operate by 1st V/f.
When it is ON, the drive will operate by 2nd V/f.
The high torque bias is according to the Pr.07-29 setting.
Signal confirmation for
Δ−connection
High torque bias (by
Pr.07-29)
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Settings
Functions
Descriptions
Middle torque bias (by
Pr.07-30)
32
The middle torque bias is according to the Pr.07-30 setting.
Low torque bias (by
Pr.07-31)
33
The low torque bias is according to the Pr.07-31 setting.
When this function is enabled, the corresponding 15-step
speed for the multi-function inputs 1-4 will be 15 positions.
(Refer to Pr.04-15 to Pr.04-29)
position mode
speed mode
speed mode
Run
MI=d35
MI=d34
MI=d1
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
MI=d2
MI=d3
1
1
1
1
1
1
MI=d4
1
04-11
10-19
position
(Home)
04-27
multi-
position
13
04-26
multi-
position
12
12th step
speed
frequency
Enable multi-step
position control
34
position mode
speed mode
Run
MI=d34
MI=d35
MI=d1
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
MI=d2
MI=d3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
MI=4
主 速
04-12
13th step
speed
04-26
04-27
multi-
position
13
multi-
position
12
frequency
4-64
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Settings
Functions
Descriptions
When this function is enabled, the AC motor drive will start to
execute position control.
Motor
Frequency
PG
Feedback
10-19
10-00
10-01
RUN
MI=d35
MO=d39
35
Enable position control
Time
Motor
frequency
PG
feedback
10-00
10-19
10-01
RUN
MI=d35
MO=d39
RUN
RUN
Time
When this function is enabled, it will select the corresponding
Enable position learning multi-position by the ON/OFF status of multi-function inputs 1-
36
function (valid at stop)
4 and written the current motor position into the corresponding
multi-position.
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Settings
Functions
Descriptions
Run/Stop
10102=10
10112=11
corresponds to
Pr.04-24
corresponds
to Pr.04-25
1
0
0
MI=d1
MI=d2
1
0
1
0
1
0
MI=d3
MI=d4
1
1
1
MI=d36
The motor position
is from encoder feedback
and written into the
corresponding multi-
position of ON/OFF
status of MI1 to MI4
(Pr.04-25)
The motor position
is from encoder feedback
and written into the
corresponding multi-
position of ON/OFF
status of MI1 to MI4
(Pr.04-24)
When this function is enabled, the pulse of PG card will
change from speed command to position command. It is
recommended to set Pr.10-23 to 0.
Example: When it is controlled by pulse (Pr.00-20 is set to 5),
please refer to the following diagram for returning home.
Enable pulse position
input command
RUN
37
MI=d35
MO=d5
MI=d37
Time
Disable write EEPROM
function
38
39
When this function is enabled, you can’t write into EEPROM.
Torque command
direction
When the torque command source is AVI or ACI, it can
change torque direction by enabling this function.
40
41
Force stop
When this function is enabled, the drive will free run to stop.
The position method of the main shaft:
Serial position clock
4-66
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Settings
Functions
Descriptions
When using setting 41 and setting 42, it needs to use with 2
input terminals for multi-position control.
PG position
control point
Pr.10-19
SPI Position Command Clock
DO
DI
CNC
Controller
(PLC)
SPI Position Command Data
main
shaft
DO
DI
VFD-VE
transmission start
PG position
co ntr ol point
Pr.10-19
1
2
3
4
11 12
OSS
Clock
42
Serial position input
Rea dy for t ra nsmission
main shaft
VFD-VE
OSS
Data
test example
Encoder
40 96
40 95
20 48
10 24
51 2
b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b11 b10
angle
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
360
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
180
90
45
0
0
0
1
1
0
15 58
35 04
36 87
137
308
Analog input resolution
selection
43
44
45
46
47
Refer to Pr.10-25.
Reset initial reel
diameter
When this function is enabled, the initial reel diameter is reset.
When this function is enabled, Pr.08-46~08-48 is valid.
Reset initial reel
diameter 0
Reset initial reel
diameter 1
Reset PID control
integration of tension
When this function is enabled, the PID control integration of
tension is reset.
When this functioni is enabled, the mechanical gear ratio
switch will be the second group A2/B2 (refer to Pr.10-29 and
Pr.10-30).
Mechanical Gear Ratio
Switch
48
49
|
Reserved
50
02-07 ꢀ UP/DOWN Key Mode
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
Settings
0
1
Up/down by the accel/decel time
Up/down constant speed (Pr.02-08)
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
ꢀ The Acceleration/Deceleration Speed of the UP/DOWN Key
with Constant Speed
02-08
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0.01
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
Settings
0.01 ~ 1.00Hz/ms
These settings are used when multi-function input terminals are set to 19/20.
02-09 Digital Input Response Time
Unit: 0.001
Factory setting: 0.005
Control
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
mode
Settings
0.001~ 30.000 sec
This parameter is used for digital input terminal signal delay and confirmation. The delay time
is confirmation time to prevent some uncertain interferences that would result in error (except
for the counter input) in the input of the digital terminals (FWD, REV and MI1~6). Under this
condition, confirmation for this parameter could be improved effectively, but the response time
will be somewhat delayed.
02-10 ꢀ Digital Input Operation Direction
Unit: 1
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0 ~ 65535
This parameter is used to set the input signal level and it won’t be affected by the
SINK/SOURCE status.
Bit0 is for FWD terminal, bit1 is for REV terminal and bit2 to bit15 is for MI1 to MI14.
User can change terminal status by communicating.
For example, MI1 is set to 1 (multi-step speed command 1), MI2 is set to 2 (multi-step speed
command 2). Then the forward + 2nd step speed command=1001(binary)=9 (Decimal). Only
need to set Pr.02-10=9 by communication and it can forward with 2nd step speed. It doesn’t
need to wire any multi-function terminal.
bit15 bit14 bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10 bit9 bit8 bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
MI14 MI13 MI12 MI11 MI10 MI9 MI8 MI7 MI6 MI5 MI4 MI3 MI2 MI1 REV FWD
02-11 ꢀ Multi-function Output 1 RA, RB, RC (Relay1)
Factory Setting: 11
ꢀ Multi-function Output 2 MRA, MRC (Relay2)
02-12
4-68
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory Setting: 1
ꢀ Multi-function Output 3 (MO1)
02-13
Factory Setting: 0
Factory Setting: 0
Factory Setting: 0
Factory Setting: 0
02-14 ꢀ Multi-function Output 4 (MO2)
02-35 ꢀ Multi-function Output 5 (MO3) (need to use with EMV-APP01)
02-36 ꢀMulti-function Output 5 6 (MO4) (need to use with EMV-APP01)
02-37 ꢀ Multi-function Output 5 7 (MO3MO5) (need to use with EMV-APP01)
02-38 ꢀ Multi-function Output 8 (MO6) (need to use with EMV-APP01)
02-39 ꢀ Multi-function Output 9 (MO7) (need to use with EMV-APP01)
02-40 ꢀ Multi-function Output 10 (MO8) (need to use with EMV-APP01)
Factory Setting: 0
Factory Setting: 0
Factory Setting: 0
Factory Setting: 0
02-41 ꢀ Multi-function Output 11 (MO9) (need to use with EMV-APP01)
02-42 ꢀ Multi-function Output 12 (MOA) (need to use with EMV-APP01)
Factory Setting: 0
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0-50
Control Mode
Settings
VF
VFPG
SVC
FOCPG TQRPG
0: No function
1: Operation indication
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2: Operation speed attained
3: Desired frequency attained 1 (Pr.02-19)
4: Desired frequency attained 2 (Pr.02-21)
5: Zero speed (frequency command)
6: Zero speed with stop (frequency command)
7: Over torque (OT1) (Pr.06-06~06-08)
8: Over torque (OT2) (Pr.06-09~06-11)
9: Drive ready
○
○
○
○
○
10: User-defined Low-voltage Detection
11: Malfunction indication
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Control Mode
VFPG FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
VF
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
SVC
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
12: Mechanical brake release (Pr.02-31)
13: Overheat
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
14: Software brake signal
15: PID feedback error
16: Slip error (oSL)
17: Terminal count value attained (Pr.02-16)
18: Preliminary count value attained (Pr.02-17)
19: Baseblock (B.B.) Indication
20: Warning output
○
○
○
○
○
21: Over voltage warning
22: Over-current stall prevention warning
23: Over-voltage stall prevention warning
24: Operation mode indication
25: Forward command
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
26: Reverse command
27: Output when current >= Pr.02-32
28: Output when current < Pr.02-32
29: Output when frequency >= Pr.02-33
30: Output when frequency < Pr.02-33
31: Y-connection for the motor coil
32: Δ connection for the motor coil
33: Zero speed (actual output frequency)
34: Zero speed with Stop (actual output frequency)
35: Error output selection 1 (Pr.06-23)
36: Error output selection 2 (Pr.06-24)
37: Error output selection 3 (Pr.06-25)
38: Error output selection 4 (Pr.06-26)
39: Position attained (Pr.10-19)
40: Speed attained (including zero speed)
41: Multi-position attained
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
42: Crane function
43: Motor zero-speed output (Pr.02-43)
44: Max. reel diameter attained
45: Empty reel diameter attained
46: Broken belt detection
○
○
○
○
○
47: Break release at stop
48: Error PID feedback of tension
49: Reserved
50: Reserved
Settings
Functions
No Function
Descriptions
0
1
Operation Indication
Active when the drive is not at STOP.
Master Frequency
Attained
Active when the AC motor drive reaches the output frequency
setting.
2
3
Desired Frequency
Attained 1 (Pr.02-19)
Active when the desired frequency (Pr.02-19) is attained.
4-70
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Settings
Functions
Descriptions
Active when the desired frequency (Pr.02-21) is attained.
Desired Frequency
Attained 2 (Pr.02-21)
4
Zero Speed (frequency Active when frequency command =0. (the drive should be at
5
6
command)
RUN mode)
Zero Speed with Stop
(frequency command)
Active when frequency command =0 or stop.
Active when detecting over-torque. Refer to Pr.06-06 (over-
torque detection selection-OT1), Pr.06-07 (over-torque
detection level-OT1) and Pr.06-08 (over-torque detection time-
OT1).
Over Torque (OT1)
(Pr.06-06~06-08)
7
8
Active when detecting over-torque. Refer to Pr.06-09 (over-
torque detection selection-OT2), Pr.06-10 (over-torque
detection level-OT2) and Pr.06-11 (over-torque detection time-
OT2).
Over Torque (OT2)
(Pr.06-09~06-11)
9
Drive Ready
Active when the drive is ON and no abnormality detected.
User-defined Low-
voltage Detection
Active when the DC Bus voltage is too low. (refer to Pr.06-00
low voltage level)
10
11
Malfunction Indication
Active when fault occurs (except Lv stop).
When drive runs after Pr.02-31, it will be ON. This function
should be used with DC brake and it is recommended to use
contact ”b”(N.C).
Mechanical Brake
Release (Pr.02-31)
12
13
Active when IGBT or heat sink overheats to prevent OH turn
off the drive. (refer to Pr.06-05)
Overheat
This function is used in conjunction with a VFDB Brake Unit.
The output will be activated when the drive needs help braking
the load. A smooth deceleration is achieved by using this
function. (refer to Pr.07-00)
14
Software Brake Signal
15
16
17
18
19
20
PID Feedback Error
Slip Error (oSL)
Active when the feedback signal is abnormal.
Active when the slip error is detected.
Terminal Count Value
Attained
Active when the counter reaches Terminal Counter Value
(Pr.02-16).
Preliminary Counter
Value Attained
Active when the counter reaches Preliminary Counter Value
(Pr.02-17).
Baseblock (B.B.)
Indication
Active when the output of the AC motor drive is shut off during
baseblock.
Warning Output
Active when the warning is detected.
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Settings
Functions
Descriptions
21
Over-voltage Warning
Active when the over-voltage is detected.
Over-current Stall
Prevention Warning
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Active when the over-current stall prevention is detected.
Active when the over-voltage stall prevention is detected.
Over-voltage Stall
prevention Warning
Operation Mode
Indication
Active when the operation command is controlled by external
terminal.
Forward Command
Reverse Command
Active when the operation direction is forward.
Active when the operation direction is reverse.
Active when current is >= Pr.02-32.
Output when Current >=
Pr.02-32
Output when Current <
Pr.02-32
Active when current is < Pr.02-32.
Output when frequency
>= Pr.02-33
Active when frequency is >= Pr.02-33.
Active when frequency is < Pr.02-33.
Output when Frequency
< Pr.02-33
Y-connection for the
Motor Coil
Active when PR.05-12 is less than PR.05-11 and time is more
than Pr.05-30.
Active when PR.05-12 is higher than PR.05-11 and time is
more than Pr.05-30.
Δ-connection for the
Motor Coil
Zero Speed (actual
output frequency)
Active when the actual output frequency is 0. (the drive should
be at RUN mode)
Zero Speed with Stop
(actual output
34
Active when the actual output frequency is 0 or Stop.
frequency)
Error Output Selection 1
(Pr.06-23)
35
36
37
38
39
Active when Pr.06-23 is ON.
Error Output Selection 2
(Pr.06-24)
Active when Pr.06-24 is ON.
Error Output Selection 3
(Pr.06-25)
Active when Pr.06-25 is ON.
Error Output Selection 4
(Pr.06-26)
Active when Pr.06-26 is ON.
Position Attained
(Pr.10-19)
Active when the PG position control point reaches Pr.10-19.
4-72
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Settings
Functions
Descriptions
Speed Attained
(including zero speed) stop.
Active when the output frequency reaches frequency setting or
40
User can set any three multi-function input terminals to 41. The
current position action status of these three terminals will be
outputted. Example: if setting Pr.02-11, Pr.02-12 and Pr.02-13
to 41 and only the multi-position of the second point has been
done. Therefore, current status are RA (OFF), MRA (ON) and
MO1 (OFF). In this way, their status is 010.
41
42
Multi-position Attained
This function should be used with Pr.02-31, Pr.02-32 and
Pr.02-33.
Active when setting Pr.07-16=Pr.02-33 and Fcmd > Pr.02-33
and output current > Pr.02-32 and Time > Pr.02-31.
Crane Function
The example of the crane application is in the following for
your reference.
Motor Zero-speed
Output (Pr.02-43)
43
44
45
Active when motor actual speed is less than Pr.02-43.
Active when the reel diameter is equal to Pr.08-43.
Active when the reel diameter is equal to Pr.08-44.
Max. Reel Diameter
Attained
Empty Reel Diameter
Attained
The broken belt occurs when 1. line speed is higher than
Pr.08-61, 2. the error of reel diameter exceeds Pr.08-61, 3.
detection time exceeds Pr.08-62
46
Broken Belt Detection
When drive stops, the corresponding multi-function terminal
will be ON if the frequency is less than Pr.02-33. After it is ON,
it will be OFF when brake delay time exceeds Pr.02-31.
Frequency
command
Frequency
command <02-33
47
Break Release at Stop
RUN
RUN
Multi-function
output MO=47
02-31
When the error between PID target value and PID feedback
Error PID Feedback of exceeds Pr.08-63 and allowance error detection time of
48
49
Tension
tension PID feedback exceeds Pr.08-64, please refer to Pr. 08-
64 for error treatment of tension PID feedback.
Reserved
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Settings
Functions
Reserved
Descriptions
50
Example of crane function
Frequency
command
Freq. command<02-33
or output current <02-32
Freq. command>02-31
& output current >02-32
multi-function output
MO=42 (Active when
Fcom>=02-33, output
current>02-32 and time
>02-31)
02-31
02-31
It is recommended to be used with Dwell function (Pr.07-15 to Pr.07-18) as shown in the following:
Set 07-18=02-33 and
output current <02-32
Set 07-16=02-33and
output current >02-32
07-18 Dwell Freq.
at Decel.
07-16 Dwell
Freq.
at Accel.
07-15
Dwell Time at Accel.
07-17
Dwell Time atDecel.
Output Freq.
Multi-functioni output
MO= 42
( Activate when
Fcmd >= 02-33
output current > 02-32
Time > 02-31)
02-31
Brake Delay Time
02-31
Brake Delay Time
Mechanical breaker
Crane function will be activated when
setting 07-16=02-33 and Fcmd>02-33
and output current>02-32 and
Time > 02-31
02-15 ꢀ Multi-output Direction
Unit:1
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0 ~ 65535
This parameter is set via bit setting. If a bit is 1, the corresponding output acts in the opposite
way.
Example:
If Pr02-11=1 and Pr02-15=0, Relay 1 RA-RC is closed when the drive runs and is open when
the drive is stopped.
4-74
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
If Pr02-11=1 and Pr02-15=1, Relay 1 RA-RC is open when the drive runs and is closed when
the drive is stopped.
Bit setting
bit3
MO2
0
0
bit2
MO1
0
0
bit1
RA
0
bit0
MRA
0
1
Pr02-15
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
2
0
0
1
1
3
0
1
0
0
4
0
1
0
1
5
0
1
1
0
6
0
1
1
1
7
1
0
0
0
8
1
0
0
1
9
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
02-16 ꢀ Terminal Count Value
Unit:1
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0 ~ 65535
The counter trigger can be set by the multi-function terminal MI6 (set Pr.02-06 to 23). Upon
completion of counting, the specified output terminal will be activated (Pr.02-11 to Pr.02-14 is
set to 17).
02-17 ꢀPreliminary Count Value
Unit:1
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0 ~ 65535
When the counter value reaches this value, the corresponding multi-function output terminal
will be activated, provided one of Pr. 02-11 to 02-14 set to 18 (Preliminary Count Value
Setting). This parameter can be used for the end of the counting to make the drive runs from
the low speed to stop.
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Display value
[00-04=01]
[02-06=23]
TRG
Counter Trigger
The width of trigger signal
(output signal)
Preliminary Counter Value
(Pr.02-11 ~Pr.02-14)
02-13=18
02-14=17
02-17=3
Terminal Counter Value
02-16=5
02-18 ꢀ Digital Output Gain
Unit:1
Control
mode
Factory setting: 1
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
1 ~ 40
It is used to set the signal for the digital output terminals (DFM-DCM) and digital frequency
output (pulse X work period=50%). Output pulse per second = output frequency X Pr.02-18.
02-19 ꢀDesired Frequency Attained 1
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory setting: 60.00/50.00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
02-20 ꢀ The Width of the Desired Frequency Attained 1
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory setting: 2.00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
02-21 ꢀ Desired Frequency Attained 2
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory setting: 60.00/50.00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
02-22 ꢀ The Width of the Desired Frequency Attained 2
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory setting: 2.00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
Settings
0.00 ~ 600.00Hz
Once output frequency reaches desired frequency and the corresponding multi-function output
terminal is set to 3 or 4 (Pr.02-11~Pr.02-14), this multi-function output terminal will be ON.
4-76
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
H
Fcmd=60Hz
42Hz
40Hz
38Hz
02-21=40Hz
02-22=2Hz
12Hz
10Hz
8Hz
02-19=10Hz
02-20=2Hz
T
02-11~14=3
02-11~14=4
02-31 Brake Delay Time
Unit:0.001
Factory setting: 0.000
Control
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
mode
Settings
0.000~65.000 Sec
When the AC motor drive runs after Pr.02-31 delay time, the corresponding multi-function
output terminal (12: mechanical brake release) will be ON. This function should be used with
DC brake.
07 -0 3
07 -0 2
DC br ake
DC br ake
time during
stop pi ng
time during
star t-up
Moto r sp ee d/
Output frequenc y
DC br ake
DC br ake
RUN/STOP
ON
STOP
02 -3 1 b rake d elay ti me
Mul ti- func ti on o utpu t
(me cha ni cal b rake re le ase )
Pr.02 -11 to 0 2-1 4=12
bounce timeof mec hanical brake
br ake d
br ake d
release
Mec han i cal br ake
02-32 ꢀ Output Current Level Setting for External Terminals
Unit:1
Factory setting: 0
Control
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
mode
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Settings
0~100%
When output current is higher than Pr.02-32, it will activate multi-function output terminal
(Pr.02-11 to Pr.02-14 is set to 27).
When output current is lower than Pr.02-32, it will activate multi-function output terminal
(Pr.02-11 to Pr.02-14 is set to 28).
02-33 ꢀ Output Boundary for External Terminals
Unit:0.01
Factory setting: 0.00
Control
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
mode
Settings
0.00~+-60.00Hz
When output frequency is higher than Pr.02-33, it will activate the multi-function terminal
(Pr.02-11 to Pr.02-14 is set to 29).
When output frequency is lower than Pr.02-33, it will activate the multi-function terminal
(Pr.02-11 to Pr.02-14 is set to 30).
02-34 ꢀ External Operation Control Selection after Reset
Unit:1
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC
Settings
0: Disable
1: Drive runs if run command exists after reset
After clearing fault once a fault is detected and the external terminal for RUN keeps ON, the
drive can run after pressing RESET key.
02-43 ꢀ Zero-speed Level of Motor
Unit: 1
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0~65535rpm
4-78
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 3 Analog Input/Output Parameters
03-00 ꢀAnalog Input 1 (AVI)
Factory Setting: 1
03-01 ꢀAnalog Input 2 (ACI)
03-02 ꢀAnalog Input 3 (AUI)
Factory Setting: 0
Factory Setting: 0
Control Mode
Settings
VF
○
○
VFPG
○
SVC
○
FOCPG TQRPG
○
○
0: No function
1: Frequency command (torque limit under TQR control
mode)
○
○
○
○
○
○
2: torque command (torque limit under speed mode)
3: Torque compensation command
4: PID target value (refer to group 8)
5: PID feedback signal (refer to group 8)
6: P.T.C. thermistor input value
7: Positive torque limit
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
8: Negative torque limit
9: Regenerative torque limit
10: Positive/negative torque limit
11: PID feedback signal of tension
12: Line speed
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
13: Reel diameter
14: PID target value of tension (tension closed-loop)
15: Tension setting (tension open-loop)
16: Zero-speed tension
17: Tension taper
When it is frequency command or TQR speed limit, the corresponding value for 0~±
10V/4~20mA is 0 – max. output frequency(Pr.01-00)
When it is torque command or torque limit, the corresponding value for 0~±10V/4~20mA is 0 –
max. output torque (Pr.07-22).
When it is torque compensation, the corresponding value for 0~±10V/4~20mA is 0 – rated
torque.
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Positive torque
03-00~02=7
Positive torque limit
03-00~02=9
Regenerative
torque limit
03-00~02=10
Positive/negative torque limit
Reverse
Forward
03-00~02=10
Positive/negative torque limit
03-00~02=9
Regenerative
torque limit
03-00~02=8
Negative torque limit
Negative Torque
03-03 ꢀAnalog Input Bias 1 (AVI)
Unit: 0.1
Factory setting: 0
Control
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
mode
Settings
-100.0~100.0%
It is used to set the corresponding AVI voltage of the external analog input 0.
03-04 ꢀAnalog Input Bias 1 (ACI)
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
-100.0~100.0%
It is used to set the corresponding ACI voltage of the external analog input 0.
03-05 ꢀAnalog Input Bias 1 (AUI)
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
-100.0~100.0%
It is used to set the corresponding AUI voltage of the external analog input 0.
03-06 ꢀ Positive/negative Bias Mode (AVI)
03-07 ꢀ Positive/negative Bias Mode (ACI)
03-08 ꢀ Positive/negative Bias Mode (AUI)
4-80
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0
1
2
3
4
Zero bias
Lower than bias=bias
Greater than bias=bias
The absolute value of the bias voltage while serving as the center
Serve bias as the center
In a noisy environment, it is advantageous to use negative bias to provide a noise margin. It is
recommended NOT to use less than 1V to set the operation frequency.
03-00
to
03-02
03-09~03-11 gain is positive
0
1
2
3
4
Zero bias
Lower than bias =bias
4
4
Greater than bias=bias
The absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
Serve bias as the center
2
8
2
6
-10V-9 -8 -7-6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1
Negative bias
1
2
3
4
5
7
9 10V
bias
2
4
bias
Positive bias
03-09 ꢀ Analog Input Gain 1 (AVI)
03-10 ꢀ Analog Input Gain 1 (ACI)
03-11 ꢀ Analog Input Gain 1 (AUI)
Control
Unit: 1
Unit: 1
Unit: 1
Factory setting: 100.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
mode
Settings
-500.0~500.0%
Parameters 03-03 to 03-11 are used when the source of frequency command is the analog
voltage/current signal.
03-12 ꢀ ACI/AVI2 Selection
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0
1
ACI
AVI 2
There are two AVI analog inputs can be used when this parameter is set to 1 and the SW2 on
the control board is set to AVI2. At this moment, ACI is for voltage input.
03-13 ꢀ Analog Input Delay Time (AVI)
Unit: 0.01
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
03-14 ꢀ Analog Input Delay Time (ACI)
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
03-15 ꢀ Analog Input Delay Time (AUI)
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0.01
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0.00 to 2.00 sec
These input delays can be used to filter noisy analog signal.
03-16 ꢀ Addition Function of the Analog Input
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0
1
Disable (AVI, ACI, AUI)
Enable
When Pr.03-16 is set to 0 and the analog input setting is the same, the priority for AVI, ACI
and AUI are AVI>ACI>AUI.
Frequency
Voltage
Fmax(01-00)
Fcommand=[(ay bias)*gain]*
10V or 16mA
Fcommand: the corresponding
frequency for 10V or 20mA
ay : 10 or 16mA
bias : Pr.03-03,Pr. 03-04, Pr.03-05
gain : Pr.03-09, Pr.03-10, Pr.03-11
03-17 ꢀ Loss of the ACI Signal
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0
1
2
3
Disable
Continue operation at the last frequency
Decelerate to stop
Stop immediately and display E.F.
This parameter determines the behavior when ACI is lost.
03-18 ꢀ Analog Output Selection 1
Unit: 1
Unit: 1
03-21 ꢀ Analog Output Selection 2 (need to be used with EMV-APP01)
03-24 ꢀ Analog Output Selection 3 (need to be used with EMV-APP01)
Control
Unit: 1
Factory setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
mode
4-82
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Settings
0 to 19
Settings
Functions
Descriptions
0
1
Output frequency (Hz)
Max. frequency Pr.01-00 is regarded as 100%.
Max. frequency Pr.01-00 is regarded as 100%.
Frequency command
(Hz)
2
3
Motor speed (Hz)
Output current (rms)
Output voltage
DC Bus Voltage
Power factor
Power
600Hz is regarded as 100%
2.5 X rated current is regarded as 100%
2 X rated voltage is regarded as 100%
450V (900V)=100%
4
5
6
-1.000~1.000=100%
7
Rated power is regarded as 100%
Full-load torque is regarded as 100%
0~10V=0~100%
8
Output torque
AVI
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
ACI
0~20mA=0~100%
AUI
-10~10V=0~100%
q-axis current
q-axis feedback value
d-axis current
d-axis feedback value
q-axis voltage
d-axis voltage
Torque command
(2.5 X rated current) is regarded as 100%
(2.5 X rated current) is regarded as 100%
(2.5 X rated current) is regarded as 100%
(2.5 X rated current) is regarded as 100%
250V (500V) =100%
250V (500V) =100%
Rated torque is regarded as 100%
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Settings
Functions
Descriptions
Pulse frequency
command
19
Max. frequency Pr.01-00 is regarded as 100%.
03-19 ꢀ Analog Output Gain 1
Unit: 0.1
Unit: 0.1
03-22 ꢀ Analog Output Gain 2 (need to be used with EMV-APP01)
03-25 ꢀ Analog Output Gain 3 (need to be used with EMV-APP01)
Control
Unit: 0.1
Factory setting: 100.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
mode
Settings
0 to 200.0%
It is used to adjust the analog voltage level that terminal AFM outputs.
This parameter is set the corresponding voltage of the analog output 0.
03-20 ꢀ Analog Output Value in REV Direction 1
03-23 ꢀ Analog Output Value in REV Direction 2
03-26 ꢀ Analog Output Value in REV Direction 3
Control
Factory setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
mode
Settings
0
1
Absolute value in REV direction
Output 0V in REV direction
2
Enable output voltage in REV direction
10V(20mA)
10V(20mA)
10V(20mA)
03-18
03-21
03-24
Frequency
5V
(12mA)
Frequency
0V
(0mA)
0V
(0mA)
03-20=1
03-23=1
03-26=1
03-20=2
03-23=2
03-26=2
03-20=0
03-23=0
03-26=0
Selections for the analog output direction
4-84
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 4 Multi-Step Speed Parameters
04-00 ꢀ1st Step Speed Frequency
04-01 ꢀ2nd Step Speed Frequency
04-02 ꢀ3rd Step Speed Frequency
04-03 ꢀ4th Step Speed Frequency
04-04 ꢀ5th Step Speed Frequency
04-05 ꢀ6th Step Speed Frequency
04-06 ꢀ7th Step Speed Frequency
04-07 ꢀ8th Step Speed Frequency
04-08 ꢀ9th Step Speed Frequency
04-09 ꢀ10th Step Speed Frequency
04-10 ꢀ11th Step Speed Frequency
04-11 ꢀ12th Step Speed Frequency
04-12 ꢀ13th Step Speed Frequency
04-13 ꢀ14th Step Speed Frequency
04-14 ꢀ15th Step Speed Frequency
Control
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Factory setting: 0.00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
mode
Settings
0.00 to 600.00 Hz
ꢀMulti-position 1
ꢀMulti-position 2
ꢀMulti-position 3
ꢀMulti-position 4
ꢀMulti-position 5
ꢀMulti-position 6
ꢀMulti-position 7
ꢀMulti-position 8
ꢀMulti-position 9
ꢀMulti-position 10
ꢀMulti-position 11
ꢀMulti-position 12
ꢀMulti-position 13
ꢀMulti-position 14
ꢀMulti-position 15
04-15
04-16
04-17
04-18
04-19
04-20
04-21
04-22
04-23
04-24
04-25
04-26
04-27
04-28
04-29
Unit: 1
Unit: 1
Unit: 1
Unit: 1
Unit: 1
Unit: 1
Unit: 1
Unit: 1
Unit: 1
Unit: 1
Unit: 1
Unit: 1
Unit: 1
Unit: 1
Unit: 1
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
VFPG FOCPG
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Settings
0 to 65535
Please refer to the explanation of Pr.02-00 to Pr.02-06.
MI4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
MI3
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
MI2
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
MI1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Pr.10-19 setting
Master frequency
04-15 multi-position 1
04-16 multi-position2
04-17 multi-position 3
04-18 multi-position 4
04-19 multi-position 5
04-20 multi-position 6
04-21 multi-position 7
04-22 multi-position 8
04-23 multi-position 9
04-24 multi-position 10
04-25 multi-position 11
04-26 multi-position 12
04-27 multi-position 13
04-28 multi-position 14
04-29 multi-position 15
04-00 1st step speed frequency
04-01 2nd step speed frequency
04-02 3rd step speed frequency
04-03 4th step speed frequency
04-04 5th step speed frequency
04-05 6th step speed frequency
04-06 7th step speed frequency
04-07 8th step speed frequency
04-08 9th step speed frequency
04-09 10th step speed frequency
04-10 11th step speed frequency
04-11 12th step speed frequency
04-12 13th step speed frequency
04-13 14th step speed frequency
04-14 15th step speed frequency
4-86
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 5 Motor Parameters
05-00 Motor Auto Tuning
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
SVC
FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0
1
2
3
No function
Rolling test
Static Test
Reserved
Starting auto tuning by pressing RUN key and it will write the measure value into Pr.05-05 to
Pr.05-09 for motor 1 and Pr.05-17 to Pr.05-21 for motor 2.
The steps to AUTO-Tuning are: (when setting to 1)
1.
Make sure that all the parameters are set to factory settings and the motor wiring is
correct.
2.
Make sure the motor has no-load before executing auto-tuning and the shaft is not
connected to any belt or gear motor. It is recommended to set to 2 or 3 if the motor can’t
separate from the load.
3.
Motor 1: fill in Pr.01-02, Pr.01-01, Pr.05-01, Pr.05-02, Pr.05-03 and Pr.05-04 with correct
values. Refer to motor capacity to set accel./decel. time.
Motor 2: fill in Pr.01-36, Pr.01-35, Pr.05-13, Pr.05-14, Pr.05-15 and Pr.05-16 with correct
values. Refer to motor capacity to set accel./decel. time.
4.
5.
When Pr.05-00 is set to 1, the AC motor drive will execute auto-tuning immediately after
receiving a “RUN” command. (NOTE: the motor will run!)
After executing, please check if there are values filled in Pr.05-05 to Pr.05-09 for motor 1
and Pr.05-17 to Pr.05-21 for motor 2.
If Pr.05-00 is set to 2, it needs to input Pr.05-05 for motor 1/Pr.05-17 for motor 2.
NOTE
1.
2.
In torque/vector control mode, it is not recommended to have motors run in parallel.
It is not recommended to use torque/vector control mode if motor rated power exceeds the
rated power of the AC motor drive.
3.
When tuning 2 motors, it needs to set multi-function input terminals or change Pr.05-10 for
motor 1/motor 2 selection.
4.
5.
The no-load current is usually 20~50% X rated current.
The rated speed can’t be larger or equal to 120f/p.
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
05-01 Full-load Current of Motor 1
Control
mode
Factory setting: #.##
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
40 to 100%
This value should be set according to the rated frequency of the motor as indicated on the
motor nameplate. The factory setting is 90% X rated current.
Example: The rated current for 7.5HP (5.5kW) is 25 and factory setting is 22.5A. The range for
setting will be 10~30A.(25*40%=10 and 25*120%=30)
05-02 ꢀRated Power of Motor 1
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory setting: #.##
SVC
FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0 to 655.35 kW
It is used to set rated power of the motor 1. The factory setting is the power of the drive.
05-03 ꢀ Rated Speed of Motor 1 (rpm)
Unit: 1
Factory setting: 1710 (60Hz, 4 poles)
1410 (50Hz, 4 poles)
Control
mode
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0 to 65535
It is used to set the rated speed of the motor and need to set according to the value indicated
on the motor nameplate.
05-04 Number of Motor Poles 1
Control
mode
Factory setting: 4
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
2 to 20
It is used to set the number of motor poles (must be an even number).
05-05 No-load Current of Motor 1
Unit: Amp
Control
mode
Factory setting: #.##
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0 to factory setting of Pr.05-01
The factory setting is 40% X rated current.
4-88
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
05-06 Rotor Resistance R1 of Motor 1
Unit: 0.001
Rr of Motor 1
05-07
Unit: 0.001
Control
mode
Factory setting: #.###
SVC
FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0~65.535Ω
05-08 Lm of Motor 1
05-09 Lx of Motor 1
Control
Unit: 0.1
Unit: 0.1
Factory setting: #.#
SVC
FOCPG TQRPG
mode
Settings
0~6553.5mH
05-10 Motor 1/Motor 2 Selection
Control
mode
Factory setting: 1
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
1
2
Motor 1
Motor 2
It is used to set the motor that driven by the AC motor drive.
05-11
Unit: 0.01
ꢀ Frequency for Y-connection/ Δ−connection Switch
Control
mode
Factory setting: 60.00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0.00 to 600.00Hz
05-12
Y-connection /Δ−connection Switch
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0
1
Disable
Enable
05-30
Unit: 0.001
ꢀ Delay Time for Y-connection/Δ −connection
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0.200
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
Settings
0 to 60.000
Pr.05-12 is used to enable/disable Y-connection/ Δ−connection Switch.
When Pr.05-12 is set to 1, the drive will select by Pr.05-11 setting and current motor frequency
to switch motor to Y-connection or Δ−connection. AT the same time, it will also affect motor
parameters (Pr.05-01 to 05-10/Pr.05-13 to Pr.05-21).
Pr.05-30 is used to set the switch delay time of Y-connection/Δ −connection.
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
When output frequency reaches Y-connection/Δ −connection switch frequency, drive will delay
by Pr.05-30 before multi-function output terminals are active.
Y-
connection switch: can be used for wide range motor
Y connection for low speed: higher torque can be used for rigid tapping
connection for high speed: higher torque can be used for high-speed drilling
connection is finished
U
Pr.02-01~06=30
V
MI1
W
U
X
V
W
Z
connection control
Pr.02-11~14=32
Y-connection is finished
Pr.02-01~06=29
MI2
RA
IM
Y
Y connection control
Pr.02-11~14=31
MRA
Y-connection
confirmation input
If switch point is 60Hz,
the accel. switch point is 62Hz
Decel. switch point is 58Hz
Bandwidth is 2Hz
Pr.05-11
Y-△
switch
In this area, motor is in free
run status. AC motor drive
stops outputting.
frequency
Motor speed will
decrease
Motor speed/
frequency
by load inertia.
Pr. 05-30 Delay Time for Y-connection
/D -connection(Min. is 0.2 seconds)
Y-connection output
ON
ON
ON
ON
Pr.02-11~14=31
Pr.02-11~14=29
ON
Y-conenction
confirmation input
△-connection output
Pr.02-11~14=32
△
-connection
ON
confirmation input
Pr.02-11~14=30
:
mechanical bounce time
4-90
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
free run status
output
frequency
Y-connection output
Pr.02-11~14=31
Y-connection
confirmation input
Pr.02-01~06=29
ON
ON
△
-connection output
Pr.02-11~14=32
ON
△-connection
confirmation input
Pr.02-01~06=30
ON
Y-
△
switch error
frequency
2 seconds
delay time
Pr.05-30
05-13 Full-load Current of Motor 2
Unit: 1%
Control
mode
Factory setting: #.##
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
40 to 100%
This value should be set according to the rated frequency of the motor as indicated on the
motor nameplate. The factory setting is 90% X rated current.
Example: The rated current for 7.5HP (5.5kW) is 25 and factory setting is 22.5A. The range for
setting will be 10~30A.(25*40%=10 and 25*120%=30)
05-14 ꢀRated Power of Motor 2
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory setting: #.##
SVC
FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0 to 655.35
It is used to set rated power of the motor 2. The factory setting is the power of the drive.
05-15 ꢀ Rated Speed of Motor 2 (rpm)
Unit: 1
Control
mode
Factory setting: 1710
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0 to 65535
It is used to set the rated speed of the motor and need to set according to the value indicated
on the motor nameplate.
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
05-16 Number of Motor Poles 2
Control
mode
Factory setting: 4
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
2 to 20
It is used to set the number of motor poles (must be an even number).
05-17 No-load Current of Motor 2
Unit: Amp
Control
mode
Factory setting: #.##
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0 to factory setting of Pr.05-01
The factory setting is 40% X rated current.
05-18 Rotor Resistance R1 of Motor 2
Unit: 0.001
Unit: 0.001
Rr of Motor 2
05-19
Control
mode
Factory setting: #.###
SVC
FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0~65.535Ω
05-20 Lm of Motor 2
05-21 Lx of Motor 2
Control
Unit: 0.1
Unit: 0.1
Factory setting: #.#
SVC
FOCPG TQRPG
mode
Settings
0~6553.5mH
It will have different setting by the rated current.
05-22 ꢀ Torque Compensation Time Constant
Unit: 0.001
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0.020
VF
VFPG
SVC
Settings
0.001 to 10.000 sec
05-23 ꢀ Slip Compensation Time Constant
Unit: 0.001
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0.100
VFPG
SVC
Settings
0.001 to 10.000 sec
Setting Pr.05-22 and Pr.05-23 change the response time for the compensation.
When Pr.05-22 and Pr.05-23 are set to 10.00 seconds, its response time for the compensation
will be the longest. But if the settings are too short, unstable system may occur.
4-92
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
05-24 ꢀ Torque Compensation Gain
Unit: 1
Factory setting: 0
Control
VF
VFPG
mode
Settings
0 to10
This parameter may be set so that the AC motor drive will increase its voltage output to obtain
a higher torque. Only to be used for SVC control mode.
Too high torque compensation can overheat the motor.
05-25 ꢀ Slip Compensation Gain
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0.00
VF
SVC
Settings
0.00 to10.00
When the asynchronous motor is driven by the drive, the load and slip will be increased. This
parameter can be used to correct frequency and lower the slip to make the motor can run near
the synchronous speed under rated current. When the output current is larger than the motor
no-load current, the drive will compensate the frequency by Pr.05-25 setting. If the actual
speed is slower than expectation, please increase the setting and vice versa.
It is only valid in SVC/VF mode.
The factory settings are:
A. In SVC mode, the factory setting is 1.00.
B. In VF mode, the factory setting is 0.00.
05-26 ꢀ Slip Deviation Level
Unit: 1
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
Settings
0 to 1000% (0: disable)
05-27 ꢀ Detection time of Slip Deviation
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory setting: 1.0
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
Settings
0.0 to 10.0 sec
05-28 ꢀOver Slip Treatment
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
Settings
0
1
2
Warn and keep operation
Warn and ramp to stop
Warn and coast to stop
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Pr.05-26 to Pr.05-28 are used to set allowable slip level/time and over slip treatment when the
drive is running.
05-29 ꢀ Hunting Gain
Unit: 1
Control
mode
Factory setting: 2000
VF
VFPG
SVC
Settings
0 to 10000 (0: disable)
The motor will have current wave motion in some specific area. It can improve this situation by
setting this parameter. (When it is high frequency or run with PG, Pr.05-29 can be set to 0.
when the current wave motion happens in the low frequency, please increase Pr.05-29.)
05-31 Accumulative Motor Operation Time (Min.)
Unit: 1
Control
mode
Factory setting: 00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
00 to1439
05-32
Accumulative Motor Operation Time (Day)
Unit: 1
Control
mode
Factory setting: 00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
00 to 65535
Pr. 05-31 and Pr.05-32 are used to record the motor operation time. They can be cleared by
setting to 00 and time won’t be recorded when it is less than 60 seconds.
4-94
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 6 Protection Parameters
06-00 ꢀLow Voltage Level
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings 230V series 160.0~220.0Vdc
460V series 320.0~440.0Vdc
Factory Setting: 180.0
Factory Setting: 360.0
It is used to set the Lv level.
input voltage
30V(60V)
Pr. 06-00
LV
06-01 ꢀOver-Voltage Stall Prevention
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings 230V series 350.0~450.0Vdc
460V series 700.0~900.0Vdc
Factory Setting: 380.0
Factory Setting: 760.0
0.0: disable (when brake resistor used)
During deceleration, the DC bus voltage may exceed its Maximum Allowable Value due to
motor regeneration. When this function is enabled, the AC motor drive will not decelerate
further and keep the output frequency constant until the voltage drops below the preset value
again.
Deceleration characteristic
when Over-Voltage Stall
Prevention enabled
output
frequency
Frequency Held
time
previous
deceleration time
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
06-02 ꢀPhase-loss Protection
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0
1
2
Warn and keep operation
Warn and ramp to stop
Warn and coast to stop
It is used to set the phase-loss treatment. The phase-loss will effect driver’s control
characteristic and life.
06-03 ꢀOver-Current Stall Prevention during Acceleration
Unit: 1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 170
VF
VFPG
SVC
Settings
00~250%
During acceleration, the AC drive output current may increase abruptly and exceed the value
specified by Pr.06-03 due to rapid acceleration or excessive load on the motor. When this
function is enabled, the AC drive will stop accelerating and keep the output frequency constant
until the current drops below the maximum value.
06-03
Over-Current
Detection
current
Level
Output
Over-Current Stall
Frequency
prevention during
Acceleration,
frequency held
time
actual acceleration time when over-current stall
prevention is enabled
06-04 ꢀOver-current Stall Prevention during Operation
Unit: 1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 170
VF
VFPG
SVC
Settings
00 to 250%
If the output current exceeds the setting specified in Pr.06-04 when the drive is operating, the
drive will decrease its output frequency to prevent the motor stall. If the output current is lower
than the setting specified in Pr.06-04, the drive will accelerate again to catch up with the set
frequency command value.
4-96
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Over-Current Stall
Prevention during
Operation, output
frequency decrease
Over-Current
Detection Level
06-04
Output Current
Output
Frequency
Time
over-current stall prevention during operation
06-05 ꢀAccel./Decel. Time Selection of Stall Prevention at Constant Speed
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC
Settings
0
1
2
3
4
5
by current accel/decel. time
by the 1st accel/decel. time
by the 2nd accel/decel. time
by the 3rd accel/decel. time
by the 4th accel/decel. time
by auto accel/decel. time
It is used to set the accel./decel. Time selection when stall prevention occurs at constant
speed.
06-06 ꢀOver-torque Detection Selection (OT1)
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0
1
Over-Torque detection disabled.
Over-torque detection during constant speed operation, continue to
operate after detection
2
3
4
Over-torque detection during constant speed operation, stop
operation after detection
Over-torque detection during operation, continue to operate after
detection
Over-torque detection during operation, stop operation after
detection
06-07 ꢀOver-torque Detection Level (OT1)
Unit: 1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 150
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Settings
10 to 250%
06-08 ꢀOver-torque Detection Time (OT1)
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.1
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0.0 to 60.0 sec
06-09 ꢀOver-torque Detection Selection (OT2)
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0
1
Over-Torque detection disabled.
Over-torque detection during constant speed operation, continue to
operate after detection
2
3
4
Over-torque detection during constant speed operation, stop
operation after detection
Over-torque detection during operation, continue to operate after
detection
Over-torque detection during operation, stop operation after
detection
06-10 ꢀOver-torque Detection Level (OT2)
Unit: 1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 150
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
10 to 250%
06-11 ꢀOver-torque Detection Time (OT2)
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.1
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0.0 to 60.0 sec
Pr.06-06 and Pr.06-09 determine the operation mode of the drive after the over-torque is
detected via the following method: if the output current exceeds the over-torque detection level
(Pr.06-19) and also exceeds the Pr.06-08 Over-Torque Detection Time, the fault code
“OT1/OT2” is displayed. If a Multi-Functional Output Terminal is to over-torque detection, the
output is on. Please refer to Pr.02-11~02-14 for details.
4-98
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
current
5%
Pr.06-07,
Pr.06-10
Pr.06-08, 06-11
06-12 ꢀ Current Limit
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 150
Control
FOCPG TQRPG
mode
Settings
0 to 250%
It is used to set the current limit.
06-13 ꢀ Electronic Thermal Relay Selection (Motor 1)
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 2
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0
1
2
Operate with a Inverter Motor (forced external cooling)
Operate with a Standard Motor (self-cooled by fan)
Disabled
06-27 ꢀ Electronic Thermal Relay Selection (Motor 2)
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 2
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0
1
2
Operate with a Inverter Motor (forced external cooling)
Operate with a Standard Motor (self-cooled by fan)
Disabled
It is used to prevent self-cooled motor overheats under low speed. User can use electrical
thermal relay to limit driver’s output power.
06-14 ꢀElectronic Thermal Characteristic for Motor 1
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 60.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
30.0 to 600.0 sec
06-28 ꢀElectronic Thermal Characteristic for Motor 2
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 60.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
30.0 to 600.0 sec
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
The parameter is set by the output frequency, current and operation time of the drive for
activating the I2t electronic thermal protection function. The function will be activated for the
150% * setting current for the setting of Pr.06-14/Pr.06-28.
Operation
time(min)
5
60Hz or more
4
50Hz
3
2
1
10Hz
5Hz
Load
factor (%)
0
20 40 60 80100120140160180200
06-15 ꢀ Heat Sink Over-heat (OH) Warning
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 85.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0.0 to 110.0 oC
06-16 ꢀ Stall Prevention Limit Level
Unit: 1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 50
VF
VFPG
SVC
Settings
0 to 100% (refer to Pr.06-03, Pr.06-04)
When operation frequency is larger than Pr.01-01, Pr06-03=150%, Pr. 06-04=100% and Pr.
06-28=80%:
Stall Prevention Level during acceleration = 06-03x06-28=150x80%=120%.
Stall Prevention Level at constant speed= 06-03x06-28=100x80%=80%.
06-17 Present Fault Record
06-18 Second Most Recent Fault Record
06-19 Third Most Recent Fault Record
06-20 Fourth Recent Fault Record
06-21 Fifth Most Recent Fault Record
06-22 Sixth Most Recent Fault Record
Settings
0 to 65
Factory Setting: 0
Control Mode
VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
VF
4-100
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Control Mode
Settings
VF
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
VFPG
SVC
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
FOCPG TQRPG
0: No fault
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
1: Over-current during acceleration (ocA)
2: Over-current during deceleration (ocd)
3: Over-current during constant speed (ocn)
4: Ground fault (GFF)
5: IGBT short-circuit (occ)
6: Over-curent at stop (ocS)
7: Over-voltage during acceleration (ovA)
8: Over-voltage during deceleration (ovd)
9: Over-voltage during constant speed (ovn)
10: Over-voltage at stop (ovS)
11: Low-voltage during acceleration (LvA)
12: Low-voltage during deceleration (Lvd)
13: Low-voltage during constant speed (Lvn)
14: Low-voltage at stop (LvS)
15: Phase loss (PHL)
16: IGBT heat sink over-heat (oH1)
17: Heat sink over-heat (oH2)(for 40HP above)
18: TH1 open loop error (tH1o)
19: TH2 open loop error (tH2o)
20: Fan error signal output
21: over-load (oL) (150% 1Min)
22: Motor 1 over-load (EoL1)
23: Motor 2 over-load (EoL2)
24: Motor PTC overheat (oH3)
25: Fuse error (FuSE)
26: over-torque 1 (ot1)
27: over-torque 1 (ot2)
28: Reserved
29: Reserved
30: Memory write-in error (cF1)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
31: Memory read-out error (cF2)
32: Isum current detection error (cd0)
33: U-phase current detection error (cd1)
34: V-phase current detection error (cd2)
35: W-phase current detection error (cd3)
36: Clamp current detection error (Hd0)
37: Over-current detection error (Hd1)
38: Over-voltage detection error (Hd2)
39: Ground current detection error (Hd3)
40: Auto tuning error (AuE)
41: PID feedback loss (AFE)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
42: PG feedback error (PGF1)
43: PG feedback loss (PGF2)
44: PG feedback stall (PGF3)
45: PG slip error (PGF4)
46: PG ref input error (PGr1)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
47: PG ref loss (PGr2)
48: Analog current input loss (ACE)
49: External fault input (EF)
50: Emergency stop (EF1)
51: External Base Block (B.B.)
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Control Mode
Settings
VF
○
VFPG
○
SVC
○
FOCPG TQRPG
52: Password error (PcodE)
○
○
53: Reserved
54: Communication error (cE1)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
55: Communication error (cE2)
56: Communication error (cE3)
57: Communication error (cE4)
58: Communication Time-out (cE10)
59: PU time-out (cP10)
60: Brake transistor error (bF)
61: Y-connection/Δ-connection switch error (ydc)
62: Decel. Energy Backup Error (dEb)
63: Slip error (oSL)
○
64: Broken belt error (bEb)
○
○
65: Error PID feedback signal of tension (tdEv)
It will record when the fault occurs and force stopping. For the Lv, it will record when it is
operation, or it will warn without record.
Setting 62: when DEB function is enabled, the drive will execute DEB and record to the Pr.06-
17 to Pr.06-22 simultaneously.
06-23 ꢀ Fault Output Option 1
06-24 ꢀ Fault Output Option 2
06-25 ꢀ Fault Output Option 3
06-26 ꢀ Fault Output Option 4
Control
Unit: 1
Unit: 1
Unit: 1
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
mode
Settings
0 to 65535 sec (refer to bit table for fault code)
These parameters can be used with multi-function output (set Pr.02-11 to Pr.02-14 to 35-38)
for the specific requirement. When the fault occurs, the corresponding terminals will be
activated (It needs to convert binary value to decimal value to fill in Pr.06-23 to Pr.06-26).
Bit0
Bit1
Bit2
OL
Bit3
SYS
Bit4
FBK
Bit5
EXI
Bit6
CE
Fault code
current Volt.
0: No fault
1: Over-current during acceleration
(ocA)
●
●
●
2: Over-current during deceleration
(ocd)
3: Over-current during constant
speed (ocn)
4-102
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Bit0
Bit1
Bit2
OL
Bit3
SYS
Bit4
FBK
Bit5
EXI
●
Bit6
CE
Fault code
current Volt.
4: Ground fault (GFF)
●
●
●
5: IGBT short-circuit (occ)
6: Over-curent at stop (ocS)
7: Over-voltage during acceleration
(ovA)
8: Over-voltage during deceleration
(ovd)
●
●
9: Over-voltage during constant
speed (ovn)
●
●
10: Over-voltage at stop (ovS)
11: Low-voltage during
acceleration (LvA)
12: Low-voltage during
deceleration (Lvd)
●
●
●
13: Low-voltage during constant
speed (Lvn)
14: Low-voltage at stop (LvS)
15: Phase loss (PHL)
●
●
●
16: IGBT heat sink over-heat (oH1)
17: Heat sink over-heat (oH2)(for
40HP above)
●
●
18: TH1 open loop error (tH1o)
19: TH2 open loop error (tH2o)
20: Fan error signal output
21: over-load (oL) (150% 1Min)
22: Motor 1 over-load (EoL1)
23: Motor 2 over-load (EoL2)
24: Motor PTC overheat (oH3)
25: Fuse error (FuSE)
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
26: over-torque 1 (ot1)
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Bit0
Bit1
Bit2
OL
●
Bit3
SYS
Bit4
FBK
Bit5
EXI
Bit6
CE
Fault code
current Volt.
27: over-torque 1 (ot2)
28: Reserved
29: Reserved
●
●
●
30: Memory write-in error (cF1)
31: Memory read-out error (cF2)
32: Isum current detection error
(cd0)
33: U-phase current detection error
(cd1)
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
34: V-phase current detection error
(cd2)
35: W-phase current detection
error (cd3)
36: Clamp current detection error
(Hd0)
37: Over-current detection error
(Hd1)
38: Over-voltage detection error
(Hd2)
39: Ground current detection error
(Hd3)
40: Auto tuning error (AuE)
41: PID feedback loss (AFE)
42: PG feedback error (PGF1)
43: PG feedback loss (PGF2)
44: PG feedback stall (PGF3)
45: PG slip error (PGF4)
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
46: PG ref input error (PGr1)
47: PG ref loss (PGr2)
48: Analog current input loss
(ACE)
●
49: External fault input (EF)
4-104
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Bit0
Bit1
Bit2
OL
Bit3
SYS
Bit4
FBK
Bit5
EXI
●
Bit6
CE
Fault code
current Volt.
50: Emergency stop (EF1)
51: External Base Block (B.B.)
52: Password error (PcodE)
53: Reserved
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
54: Communication error (cE1)
55: Communication error (cE2)
56: Communication error (cE3)
57: Communication error (cE4)
58: Communication Time-out
(cE10)
●
59: PU time-out (cP10)
●
●
60: Brake transistor error (bF)
61: Y-connection/Δ-connection
switch error (ydc)
62: Decel. Energy Backup Error
(dEb)
●
63: Slip error (oSL)
●
●
●
64: Broken belt error (bEb)
65: Error PID feedback signal of
tension (tdEv)
06-29 ꢀ PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient) Detection Selection
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0
1
2
Warn and keep operating
Warn and ramp to stop
Warn and coast to stop
It is used to set the treatment after detecting PTC.
06-30 ꢀPTC Level
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 50.0
Control
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
mode
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Settings
0.0 to 100.0%
It is used to set the PTC level, and the corresponding value for 100% is max. analog input
value.
06-31 ꢀ Filter Time for PTC Detection
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.20
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0.00 to 10.00 sec
06-32 Output Frequency for Malfunction
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0.00 to 655.35 Hz
06-33 Output AC Voltage for Malfunction
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0.0~6553.5 V
06-34 DC Voltage for Malfunction
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0.0~6553.5 V
06-35 Current Value for Malfunction
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0.00~655.35 Amp
06-36 IGBT Temperature for Malfunction
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0.0~6553.5 °C
4-106
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 7 Special Parameters
07-00 ꢀ Software Brake Level
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings 230V series 350.0~450.0Vdc
460V series 700.0~900.0Vdc
Factory Setting: 380.0
Factory Setting: 760.0
This parameter sets the DC-bus voltage at which the brake chopper is activated.
07-01 ꢀ DC Brake Current Level
Unit: 1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0 to 100%
This parameter sets the level of DC Brake Current output to the motor during start-up and
stopping. When setting DC Brake Current, the Rated Current (Pr.00-01) is regarded as 100%.
It is recommended to start with a low DC Brake Current Level and then increase until proper
holding torque has been attained.
When it is in FOCPG/TQRPG mode, it can enable DC brake function by setting to any value.
07-02 ꢀ DC Brake Time during Start-up
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0.0 to 60.0 sec
This parameter determines the duration of the DC Brake current after a RUN command. When
the time has elapsed, the AC motor drive will start accelerating from the Minimum Frequency
(Pr.01-05).
07-03 ꢀ DC Brake Time during Stopping
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0.00 to 60.00 sec
This parameter determines the duration of the DC Brake current during stopping.
07-04 ꢀ Start-Point for DC Brake
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.00
VF
VFPG
SVC TQRPG
Settings
0.00 to 600.00Hz
This parameter determines the frequency when DC Brake will begin during deceleration.
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Output frequency
DC Braking Time
during Stopping
01-09
Start-point for
DC braking
time during
stopping
Minimum
output
frequency
Run/Stop
OFF
Time
ON
DC Braking Time
DC Brake during Start-up is used for loads that may move before the AC drive starts, such as
fans and pumps. Under such circumstances, DC Brake can be used to hold the load in
position before setting it in motion.
DC Brake during stopping is used to shorten the stopping time and also to hold a stopped load
in position. For high inertia loads, a dynamic brake resistor may also be needed for fast
decelerations.
07-05 DC Brake Proportional Gain
Unit: 1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 50
VF
VFPG
SVC
Settings
1 to 500Hz
It is used to set the output voltage gain when DC brake.
07-06 ꢀ Momentary Power Loss Operation Selection
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0
1
Operation stops after momentary power loss.
Operation continues after momentary power loss, speed search
starts with the Master Frequency reference value.
2
Operation continues after momentary power loss, speed search
starts with the minimum frequency.
This parameter determines the operation mode when the AC motor drive restarts from a
momentary power loss.
In PG control mode, the AC motor drive will execute the speed search function automatically
by the PG speed when this setting isn’t set to 0.
07-07 ꢀMaximum Allowable Power Loss Time
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 2.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
4-108
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Settings
0.1 to 5.0 sec
If the duration of a power loss is less than this parameter setting, the AC motor drive will
resume operation. If it exceeds the Maximum Allowable Power Loss Time, the AC motor drive
output is then turned off (coast stop).
The selected operation after power loss in Pr.07-06 is only executed when the maximum
allowable power loss time is ≤5 seconds and the AC motor drive displays “Lu”.
But if the AC motor drive is powered off due to overload, even if the maximum allowable power
loss time is ≤5 seconds, the operation mode as set in Pr.07-06 is not executed. In that case it
starts up normally.
07-08 ꢀBaseblock Time for Speed Search (BB)
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.5
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0.1 to 5.0 sec
When momentary power loss is detected, the AC drive will block its output and then wait for a
specified period of time (determined by Pr.07-08, called Base-Block Time) before resuming
operation. This parameter should be set at a value to ensure that any residual regeneration
voltage from the motor on the output has disappeared before the drive is activated again.
7
Input B.B. signal
Stop output voltage
Disable B.B. signal
Waiting time Pr.07-08
Speed search
Output frequency(H)
Output voltage(V)
Output current
A
Synchronization speed detection
Frequency command before B.B.
07-09
Current Limit for
Speed Search
7
Time
FWD Run
B.B.
B.B. Search with last output frequency downward timing chart
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Output frequency
Input B.B. signal
(H)
Stop output voltage
Disable B.B. signal
Waiting time 08.07
Speed Search
Output voltage
(V)
output current A
07-09 Current Limit
for Speed Search Speed
Synchronization speed detection
Time
FWD Run
B.B.
B.B. Search with minimum output frequency upward timing chart
Input B.B. signal
Output frequency(H)
Stop voltage output
Disable B.B. signal
Waiting time Pr.07-08
Speed search
Output voltage(V)
Output current
A
Synchronization speed detection
06-03
Over-Current Stall
Prevention
during Accel.
Time
FWD Run
B.B.
B.B. Search with minimum output frequency upward timing chart
ꢀCurrent Limit for Speed Search
07-09
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 150
Control
mode
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
20 to 200%
Following a momentary power loss, the AC motor drive will start its speed search operation
only if the output current is greater than the value set by Pr.8-07. When the output current is
less than the value of Pr.8-07, the AC motor drive output frequency is at “speed
synchronization point”. The drive will start to accelerate or decelerate back to the operating
frequency at which it was running prior to the power loss.
When executing speed search, the V/f curve is operated by group 1 setting. The maximum
current for the optimum accel./decel. and start speed search is set by Pr.07-09.
4-110
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
07-10 ꢀBase Block Speed Search
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0
1
2
Stop operation
Speed search starts with last frequency command
Speed search starts with minimum output frequency
This parameter determines the AC motor drive restart method after External Base Block is
enabled.
In PG control mode, the AC motor drive will execute the speed search function automatically
by the PG speed when this setting isn’t set to 0.
07-11 ꢀAuto Restart After Fault
Unit: 1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0 to 10
Only after an over-current OC or over-voltage OV fault occurs, the AC motor drive can be
reset/restarted automatically up to 10 times.
Setting this parameter to 0 will disable the reset/restart operation after any fault has occurred.
When enabled, the AC motor drive will restart with speed search, which starts at the frequency
before the fault. To set the waiting time before restart after a fault, please set Pr. 07-08 Base
Block Time for Speed Search.
07-12 ꢀ Speed Search during Start-up
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0
1
2
3
Disable
Speed search from maximum frequency
Speed search from start-up frequency
Speed search from minimum frequency
This parameter is used for starting and stopping a motor with high inertia. A motor with high
inertia will take a long time to stop completely. By setting this parameter, the user does not
need to wait for the motor to come to a complete stop before restarting the AC motor drive. If a
PG card and encoder is used on the drive and motor, then the speed search will start from the
speed that is detected by the encoder and accelerate quickly to the commanded frequency.
The output current is set by the Pr.07-09.
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
In PG control mode, the AC motor drive will execute the speed search function automatically
by the PG speed when this setting isn’t set to 0.
07-13 ꢀ Decel. Time Selection for Momentary Power Loss (DEB function)
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Disable
1st decel. time
2nd decel. time
3rd decel. time
4th decel. time
Current decel. time
Auto decel. time
This parameter is used for the decel. time selection for momentary power loss.
07-14 ꢀ DEB Return Time
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
Settings
0.0 to 25.0 sec
The DEB (Deceleration Energy Backup) function is the AC motor drive decelerates to stop
after momentary power loss. When the momentary power loss occurs, this function can be
used for the motor to decelerate to 0 speed with deceleration stop method. When the power is
on again, motor will run again after DEB return time.
Status 1: Insufficient power supply due to momentary power-loss/unstable power (due to low
voltage)/sudden heavy-load
4-112
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
DC BUS voltage
it doesn't need
multi-function terminals
The level for DEB return time
(Lv=+30V+58V)
The level for soft start relay to be ON
(Lv+30)
Lv level
Soft start relay at
power side
DEB function is activated
Output frequency
Pr.07-13 Decel. time selection for
momentary power loss
07-14
DEB return time
NOTE
When Pr.07-14 is set to 0, the AC motor drive will be stopped and won't re-start
at the power-on again.
Status 2: unexpected power off, such as momentary power loss
DC BUS voltage
The level for DEB return time
(Lv=+30V+58V)
The level for soft start relay to be ON
(Lv+30)
Lv level
Soft start relay at
power side
DEB function is activated
Output frequency
Pr.07-13 Decel. time selection for
momentary power loss
07-14
DEB return time
NOTE
For example, in textile machinery, you will hope that all the machines can be decelerated to stop to
prevent broken stitching when power loss. In this case, the host controller will send a message to the
AC motor drive to use DEB function with deceleration time via EF.
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
07-15 ꢀ Dwell Time at Accel.
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
Settings
0.00 to 600.00 sec
07-16 ꢀ Dwell Frequency at Accel.
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
Settings
0.00 to 600.00 Hz
07-17 ꢀ Dwell Time at Decel.
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
Settings
0.00 to 600.00 sec
07-18 ꢀ Dwell Frequency at Decel.
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
Settings
0.00 to 600.00 Hz
In the heavy load situation, Dwell can make stable output frequency temporarily.
Pr.07-15 to Pr.07-18 is for heavy load to prevent OV or OC occurs.
Frequency
07-18
Dwell
Frequency
at Decel.
07-16
Dwell
Frequency
at Accel.
07-17
Dwell Time
at Decel.
07-15
Dwell Time
at Accel.
Time
Dwell at accel./decel.
07-19 ꢀ Fan Control
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0
1
2
3
4
Fan always ON
1 minute after AC motor drive stops, fan will be OFF
AC motor drive runs and fan ON, AC motor drive stops and fan OFF
Fan ON to run when preliminary heat sink temperature attained
Fan always OFF
This parameter is used for the fan control.
4-114
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
07-20 ꢀ Torque Command
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 0.0
Control
TQRPG
mode
Settings
-100.0 to 100.0%
(Pr. 07-22 setting=100%)
This parameter is torque command. When Pr.07-22 is 250% and Pr.07-20 is 100%, the actual
torque command = 250%X100% X motor rated torque.
07-21 ꢀ Torque Command Source
Control
Factory Setting: 0
TQRPG
mode
Settings
0
1
2
Digital keypad
RS485 serial communication (RJ-11)
Analog signal (Pr.03-00)
This parameter is torque command source and the torque command is in Pr.07-20.
07-22 ꢀ Maximum Torque Command
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 100
Control
TQRPG
mode
Settings
0 to 500%
This parameter is for the max. torque command (motor rated torque is 100%).
07-23 ꢀ Filter Time of Torque Command
Unit: 0.001
Control
TQRPG
mode
Factory Setting: 0.000
Settings
0.000 to 1.000 sec
When the setting is too long, the control will be stable but the control response will be delay.
When the setting is too short, the response will be quickly but the control maybe unstable.
User can adjust the setting by the control and response situation.
07-24 Speed Limit Selection
Control
Factory Setting: 0
TQRPG
mode
Settings
0
1
By Pr.07-25 and Pr.07-26
Frequency command source (Pr.00-20)
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
torque
torque
torque
frequency
frequency
frequency
07-25
07-26
07-25
07-26
07-24=1
When it is forward running,
running direction is limited
by Pr.00-20
opposite running direction
is limited by Pr.07-26.
00-20
00-20
07-24=1
Pr.07-24=0
Running/opposite running
direction are
limited by Pr.07-25
and Pr.07-26.
When it is reverse running,
running direction is limited
by Pr.07-25
opposite running direction
is limited by Pr.00-20.
07-25 ꢀ Torque Mode +Speed Limit
07-26 ꢀ Torque Mode-Speed Limit
Unit: 1
Unit: 1
Control
TQRPG
mode
Factory Setting: 10
Settings
0 to 120%
These parameters are used in the torque mode to limit the running direction and opposite
direction. (Pr.01-00 max. output frequency=100%)
07-27 ꢀ Source of Torque Offset
Control
Factory Setting: 0
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
mode
Settings
0
1
2
3
Disable
Analog input (Pr.03-00)
Torque offset setting
Control by external terminal (by Pr.07-29 to Pr.07-31)
This parameter is the source of torque offset.
When it is set to 3, the source of torque offset will decide to Pr.07-29, Pr.07-30 and Pr.07-31
by the multi-function input terminals setting (31, 32 or 33).
02-01~02-06 is set to 31 02-01~02-06 is set to 32 02-01~02-06 is set to 33
Torque offset
None
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
07-33
OFF
ON
07-32
ON
07-33+07-32
07-31
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
07-31+07-33
07-31+07-32
07-31+07-32+07-33
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
4-116
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
07-28 ꢀ Torque Offset Setting
Unit: 0.1
Control
Factory Setting: 0.0
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
mode
Settings
0.0 to 100.0%
This parameter is torque offset. The motor rated torque is 100%.
07-29 ꢀ High Torque Offset
Unit: 0.1
Control
Factory Setting: 30.0
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
mode
Settings
0.0 to 100.0%
07-30 ꢀ Middle Torque Offset
Unit: 0.1
Control
Factory Setting: 20.0
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
mode
Settings
0.0 to 100.0%
07-31 ꢀ Low Torque Offset
Unit: 0.1
Control
Factory Setting: 10.0
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
mode
Settings
0.0 to 100.0%
When it is set to 3, the source of torque offset will decide to Pr.07-29, Pr.07-30 and Pr.07-31
by the multi-function input terminals setting (31, 32 or 33). The motor rated torque is 100%.
07-32 ꢀ Forward Motor Torque Limit
Unit: 1
Unit: 1
07-33 ꢀ Forward Regenerative Torque Limit
07-34 ꢀ Reverse Motor Torque Limit
07-35 ꢀ Reverse Regenerative Torque Limit
Unit: 1
Unit: 1
Control
Factory Setting: 200
FOCPG TQRPG
mode
Settings
0 to 500%
The motor rated torque is 100%. The settings for Pr.07-32 to Pr.07-35 will compare with Pr.03-
00=7, 8, 9, 10. The minimum of the comparison result will be torque limit as shown in the
following figure.
P(ω)
W(rad / s)
According to the formula of motor rated torque:
, where P(ω) is Pr.05-
T(N.M ) =
RPM
02 and W(rad/s) is Pr.05-03.
= rad / s
60×2π
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Positive
torque
Reverse motor mode
06-12 current limit
Forward motor mode
06-12 current limit
External analog terminals
Pr.03-00~02
7: positive torque limit
10: positive/negative torque limit
9: regenerative torque limit
External analog terminals
Pr.03-00~02
7: positive torque limit
The level of torque limit will be
the min. value of following three values
1. torque limit of Pr.07-32 to Pr.07-35
2. Torque limit of external analog terminals
(AVI, ACI and AUI)
10: positive/negative torque limit
3. Pr.06-12 current limit
Pr.07-35
Reverse regenerative
torque limit
Pr.07-32
Forward motor
torque limit
speed
speed
Quadrant I
Quadrant II
Quadrant III Quadrant IV
Pr.07-33
Forward regenerative
torque limit
Pr.07-34
Reverse motor
torque limit
External analog terminals
Pr.03-00~03-02
External analog terminals
Pr.03-00~03-02
8: negative torque limit
10: positive/negative torque limit
8: negative torque limit
10: positive/negative torque limit
06-12 current limit
Reverse motor mode
06-12 current limit
Forward motor mode
Negative
torque
07-36 ꢀ Emergency Stop (EF) & Forced Stop Selection
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Coast stop
By deceleration Time 1
By deceleration Time 2
By deceleration Time 3
By deceleration Time 4
System Deceleration
Automatic Deceleration
When the multi-function input terminal is set to 10 or 18 and it is ON, the AC motor drive will be
operated by Pr.07-36.
4-118
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 8 High-function PID Parameters
08-00 ꢀ Input Terminal for PID Feedback
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
Settings
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
No function
Negative PID feedback from external terminal AVI (Pr.03-00)
Negative PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15, skip direction)
Negative PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15)
Positive PID feedback from external terminal AVI (Pr.03-00)
Positive PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15, skip direction)
Positive PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15)
Negative feedback means: +target value – feedback. It is used for the detection value will be
increased by increasing the output frequency.
Positive feedback means: -target value + feedback. It is used for the detection value will be
decreased by increasing the output frequency.
08-01 ꢀ Proportional Gain (P)
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 80.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
Settings
0.0 to 500.0%
This parameter determinates the gain of the feedback loop. If the gain is large, the response
will be strong and immediate (if the gain is too large, vibration may occur). If the gain is small,
the response will weak and slow.
08-02 ꢀ Integral Gain (I)
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 1.00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
Settings
0.00 to 100.00 sec
This parameter determines the speed of response for the PID feedback loop. If the integral
time is long, the response will be slow. If the integral time is short, the response will be quick.
Be careful not to set(I) too small, since a rapid response may cause oscillation in the PID loop.
If the integral time is set as 0.00, Pr.08-02 will be disabled.
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
08-03 ꢀ Derivative Control (D)
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
Settings
0.00 to 1.00 sec
This parameter determines the damping effect for the PID feedback loop. If the differential time
is long, any oscillation will quickly subside. If the differential time is short, the oscillation will
subside slowly.
08-04 ꢀ Upper limit for Integral Control
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 100.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
Settings
0.0 to 100.0%
This parameter defines an upper bound or limit for the integral gain (I) and therefore limits the
Master Frequency.
The formula is: Integral upper bound = Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01-00) x (Pr.08-04).
08-05 ꢀ PID Output Frequency Limit
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 100.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
Settings
0.0 to 110.0%
This parameter defines the percentage of output frequency limit during the PID control. The
formula is Output Frequency Limit = Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01-00) X Pr.08-05 %.
This parameter will limit the Maximum Output Frequency.
08-06 ꢀ PID Offset
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
Settings
-100.0 to 100.0%
08-07 ꢀ PID Delay Time
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
Settings
0.0 to 2.5 sec
4-120
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Output
PID Cancelled
08-00=0
or 02-01~06=21(pid off)
InputSelection of the
PID Targeted Value
00-20:KPV-CE01/
RS485
03-00~02:UP/Down
key PG
1
2
+
PID offset
08-06
P
D
+
-
+
+
Differential
Time
Proportion
ga in
Display of thePID feedback
00-14=10display ofthe
PID feedback
08-01
08-03
PID
Delay
Time
08-05
PID Freq.
output
command
limit
InputSelection
08-07
I
of the PID Feedback
08-00:AVI/ACI
08-02
08-04
AUI/PG
upper limit
for
Integral Time
Integral
Treatmentofthe
Feedback Signal Fault
If Hz>08-05
time over08-08
=>08-09
PI Control: controlled by the P action only, and thus, the deviation cannot be eliminated
entirely. To eliminate residual deviations, the P + I control will generally be utilized. And when
the PI control is utilized, it could eliminate the deviation incurred by the targeted value changes
and the constant external interferences. However, if the I action is excessively powerful, it will
delay the responding toward the swift variation. The P action could be used solely on the
loading system that possesses the integral components.
PD Control: when deviation occurred, the system will immediately generate some operation
load that is greater than the load generated single handedly by the D action to restrain the
increment of the deviation. If the deviation is small, the effectiveness of the P action will be
decreasing as well. The control objects include occasions with integral component loads,
which are controlled by the P action only, and sometimes, if the integral component is
functioning, the whole system will be vibrating. On such occasions, in order to make the P
action’s vibration subsiding and the system stabilizing, the PD control could be utilized. In
other words, this control is good for use with loadings with no brake functions over the
processes.
PID Control: Utilize the I action to eliminate the deviation and the D action to restrain the
vibration, thereafter, combine with the P action to construct the PID control. Use of the PID
method could obtain a control process with no deviations, high accuracies and a stable system.
08-08 ꢀ Feedback Signal Detection Time
Unit: 0.1
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
Settings
0.0 to 3600.0 sec
This parameter defines the time during which the PID feedback must be abnormal before a
warning is given. It also can be modified according to the system feedback signal time.
If this parameter is set to 0.0, the system would not detect any abnormality signal.
08-09 ꢀ Feedback Fault Treatment
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
Settings
0
1
2
3
Warn and keep operating
Warn and RAMP to stop
Warn and COAST to stop
Warn and keep at last frequency
AC motor drive acts when the feedback signals (analog PID feedback or PG (encoder)
feedback) are abnormal.
08-10 ꢀ Sleep Frequency
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
Settings
0.00 to 600.00Hz
08-11 ꢀ Wake-up Frequency
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
Settings
0.00 to 600.00Hz
08-12 ꢀ Sleep Time
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
Settings
0.0 to 6000.0sec
These parameters determine sleep functions of the AC drive. If the command frequency falls
below the sleep frequency, for the specified time in Pr. 08-12, then the drive will shut off the
output and wait until the command frequency rises above Pr. 08-11. Please see the below
diagram.
4-122
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Frequency command
08-11
Wake-up frequency
actual output frequency
08-10
Sleep frequency
0Hz
sleep time
08-12
Sleep Function
08-13 ꢀ PID Deviation Level
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 10.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
Settings
1.0 to 50.0%
08-14 ꢀ PID Deviation Time
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 5.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
Settings
0.1 to 300.0 sec
08-15 ꢀ Filter Time for PID Feedback
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 5.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
Settings
0.1 to 300.0 sec
08-16 Reserved
08-17 Reserved
08-18 Reserved
08-19 Reserved
08-20 Reserved
08-21 Tension Control Selection
Settings
0 to 4
Factory Setting: 0
Control Mode
Settings
VF
VFPG
SVC
FOCPG TQRPG
0: Disable
1: Closed-loop, speed mode
2: Line speed, speed mode
3: Reserved
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
4: Open-loop, torque mode
○
Closed-loop, speed mode
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
08-25
&
08-26
PID output frequency
08-35=0 *1
Limit
output
frequency
+
PI
+
-
+
08-35=1 *-1
08-29 & 08-30
08-32 & 08-33
08-27
08-23 & 08-24
mechanical gear ratio
reel diameter
master frequency
line speed
Motor
Motor
tension feedback
AI
line speed input
AI or PG2
FWD
AFM or DFM
MO=d1
operation command
operation
command
FWD orREV
Drive 2
frequency
setting
AI
Drive 1
Line speed, speed mode
08-23 or 08-24
mechanical gear ratio A/B
master
frequency
reel diameter
08-42
+
frequency command
08-25=2,
08-26
line speed
command
line speed
feedback
+
08-27=1
+
08-25=2, 08-26
line speed
command
PI
-
08-36
08-29~08-30
08-32~08-33
08-27=1
line speed feedback
4-124
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Encoder
Motor
line speed
feedback
PG2
line speed
command
AI or
communication
drive
Open-loop, torque mode
Motor
tension
command
PG1
AI
operation
command
FWD
torque command
direction
MI=d39
line speed
input
AI or PG2
drive
(not indispensable)
torque
compensation
08-83~08-86
tension
setting
tension
taper
08-81
torque
value
+
torque
calculation
+
08-76/08-79
torque
command
reel diameter
08-42
08-42
reel diameter
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
08-22 Wind Mode
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0
1
Rewind
Unwind
08-23 ꢀ Mechanical Gear Ratio A
08-24 ꢀ Mechanical Gear Ratio B
Control
Unit: 1
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 100
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
mode
Settings
1 to 65535
Application without Encoder
Driver
Motor
mechanical
gear ratio A
1:10
Gear ratio
10:1
Load
mechanical
gear ratio B
08-25 Source of the Tension Command/Line Speed
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0
1
2
Parameter setting (Pr.08-26)
RS-485 communication setting (Pr.08-26)
Analog input (Pr. 03-00~03-02 is set to 14 PID target value of
tension, 03-00~03-02 is set to 12 line speed)
08-26 ꢀ PID Target Value of Tension/Line Speed
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 50.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0.0 to 100.0%
The setting range is from 0.0 to 100.0%. In tension mode, when Pr.08-21 is set to 1 (Closed-
loop, speed mode), the corresponding value for 100% of dancer is 10V.
In tension mode, when Pr.08-21 is set to 2 (Line speed, speed mode), the corresponding value
for 100% of line speed is max. line speed (Pr.08-38).
08-27 Source of Tension/Line Speed PID Feedback
4-126
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0
1
Analog input (Pr. 03-00~03-02 is set to 11 PID feedback of tension)
Pulse input (Pr.08-40)
08-28 Auto-tuning Tension PID
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0
1
Disable
Reel diameter (08-29~08-31corresponds to 08-44, 08-32~08-34
corresponds to 08-43)
2
Frequency (08-29~08-31 corresponds to 01-07, 08-32~08-34
corresponds to 01-00)
When Pr.08-28 is set to 1:
P.I.D
08-29
08-30
08-32
08-33
reel
diameter
0
Dmin
08-44
Dmax
08-43
When Pr.08-28 is set to 2:
P.I.D
08-29
08-30
08-32
08-33
output
frequency
0
Fmin
01-07
Fmax
01-00
08-29 ꢀ Tension PID P1
Unit: 0.1
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 50.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0.0 to 1000.0
08-30 ꢀ Tension PID I1
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 1.00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0.00 to 500.00 sec
08-31 Reserved
08-32 ꢀ Tension PID P2
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 50.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0.0 to 1000.0
08-33 ꢀ Tension PID I2
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 1.00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0.00 to 500.00 sec
08-34 Reserved
08-35 PID Output Status
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0
1
Positive output
Negative output
08-36 Tension/Line Speed PID Output Limit
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 20.00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0 to 100.00% (according to Pr.01-00)
08-37 Source of Line Speed Input Command
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0
1
2
Disable
Analog input (Pr. 03-00~03-02 is set to 12 line speed)
RS-485 communication setting (Pr.08-41)
4-128
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
3
4
Pulse input (Pr.08-40)
DFM-DCM pulse input (Pr.02-18)
When it is set to 1, 3 or 4, the current line speed will be saved into Pr.08-41 via analog and
pulse command. When it is set to 2, it can change the setting of Pr.08-41 (current line speed)
via communication.
When it is set to 3 or 4, pulse signal needs to be connected to PG2 of the PG card and then
set the PG type by Pr.10-15.
When it is set to 3, it needs to use with Pr.08-40.
When it is set to 4, Pr.02-18 setting needs to be set to the DFM output value of previous driver
as shown in the following before setting Pr.08-38.
tractor
Wind
the setting of Pr,02-18 of motor 2
= the setting of Pr.02-18 of motor 1
motor
motor
Pr.10-15 of motor 2
should be set to 3 or 4
Driver 1
Driver 2
TP
PG 2
TP
DFM
(02-18)
A2
/A2
B2
DFM
/B2
DCM
DCM
AB2
08-38 Max. Line Speed
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 1000.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0.0 to 3000.0 m/min
08-39 Min. Line Speed
Unit: 0.1
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0.0 to 3000.0 m/min
08-40 Pulse Number for Each Meter
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0.0 to 6000.0
08-41 ꢀ Current Line Speed
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0.0 to 3000.0 m/min
When Pr.08-37 is set to 1, 3, or 4, the current line speed will be saved into Pr.08-41 via analog
and pulse command. At this time, Pr.08-41 will be read only.
When Pr.08-37 is set to 2, the setting of Pr.08-41(current line speed) can be changed by
communication.
08-42 Source of Reel Diameter
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0
1
Calculated by line speed
Calculated by integrating thickness (encoder is on reel shaft)(Pr.08-
49~51, Pr.10-15)
2
3
Calculated by integrating thickness (encoder is on motor)(Pr.08-
23~08-24, 08-50~08-51, 10-00~10-01)
Calculated by analog input (Pr.03-00~03-02 is set to 13)
When it is set to 1 or 2, it needs to be used with PG card.
When it is set to 1, the reel diameter can be got from the encoder on the reel shaft. At this time,
the pulse signal needs to be connected to the PG2 of PG card and get the reel diameter from
the settings of Pr.10-15, Pr.08-49, Pr.08-50 and Pr.08-51.
When it is set to 2, the reel diameter can be calculated from the motor encoder and gear ratio.
At this time, the pulse signal should be connected to the PG1 of the PG card and get the reel
diameter from the settings of Pr.08-23, Pr.08-24, Pr.10-01, Pr.10-00, Pr.08-50 and Pr.08-51.
When it is set to 3, the reel diameter can be calculated by analog input (Pr.03-00~03-02 is set
to 13) and the corresponding value of 10V is Pr.08-43.
4-130
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
the path when
Pr.08-42 is set to 1
Driver
Motor
proximity
switch/
encoder
the path when
Pr.08-42 is set to 2
gear ratio
Encoder
08-43 ꢀ Max. Reel Diameter
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 6000.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
1.0 to 6000.0mm
08-44 ꢀ Empty Reel Diameter
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 1.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
1 to 6000.0mm
08-45 Source of Reel Diameter
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0
1
RS-485 communication setting (Pr.08-46)
Analog input (Pr.03-00-Pr.03-02 is set to 13)
When it is set to 1, the corresponding value of 10V is Pr.08-43.
08-46 ꢀ Initial Reel Diameter
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 1.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
1.0 to 6000.0mm
When Pr.08-45 is set to 1, Pr.08-46 will be read-only.
08-47 Initial Reel Diameter 1
08-48 Initial Reel Diameter 2
Control
Unit: 0.1
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 1.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
mode
Settings
1.0 to 6000.0mm
Pr.08-46 needs to be used by setting 44~46 to Pr.02-01~02-06, Pr.02-23~Pr.02-30.
When you need to have many types of reel diameter, please set Pr.08-46 to 0.
08-49 Number of Pulse Per Revolution
Unit: 1
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 1
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
1 to 10000ppr
08-50 Coil Number for Each Layer
Unit: 1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 1
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
1 to 10000
08-51 Material Thickness
Unit: 0.001
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 1.000
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0.001 to 60.000mm
08-52 ꢀFilter Time of Reel Diameter
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 1.00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0.00 to 100.00 sec
This parameter can be used to improve unstable of the source of reel diameter(Pr.08-42).
08-53 Auto Compensation of Reel Diameter
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0
1
Disable
Enable
08-54 ꢀCurrent Reel Diameter
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 1.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
1.0 to 6000.0 mm
When the AC motor drive is not at STOP, this parameter is read-only.
08-55 Smart Start
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0
1
2
Disable
Enable
In unwind mode, rewind in reverse direction
08-56 Switch Level for Smart Start and PID Function
Unit: 1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 15.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
4-132
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Settings
0.0~100.0% (according to Pr.08-26)
08-57 Frequency for Smart Start
Unit: 1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 2.00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0.00~600.00Hz
08-58 ꢀAccel. Time for Smart Start
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 3.00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
Settings
0.01~600.00 sec
When the speeds of wider/unwinder and tractor can’t match at start-up, the situation can be
improved by setting Pr.08-57 and Pr.08-58.
08-59 Broken Belt Detection
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
Settings
0
1
Disable
Enable
08-60 Min. Line Speed of Broken Belt Detection
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
Settings
0.0~3000.0 m/min
08-61 Allowance Error of Line Speed of Broken Belt Detection
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 100.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
Settings
1.0~6000.0 mm
08-62 Detection Time of Broken Belt
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 1.00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
Settings
0.00~100.00 sec
When the broken belt detection is enabled, line speed is higher then Pr.08-61, allowance error
of line speed of broken belt detection exceeds Pr.08-61 and detection time of broken belt
exceeds Pr.08-62, the broken belt occurs.
08-63 Allowance Error Level of Tension/Line Speed PID Feedback
Unit: 1
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 100
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
Settings
0~100%
The corresponding value for the 100% of dancer is 10V.
08-64 Allowance Error Detection Time of Tension PID Feedback
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.5
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
Settings
0.0~10.0 sec
08-65 Error Treatment of Tension PID Feedback
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
Settings
0
1
2
Warn and keep operation
Warn and coast to stop
Warn and ramp to stop
When the error of tension PID target value and tension PID feedback exceeds Pr.08-63 and
the allowance error detection time of tension PID exceeds Pr.08-64, tension PID feedback
error occurs. Refer to Pr.08-65 for error treatment of tension PID feedback.
08-66 Upper Limit of Tension PID Feedback
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 100.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0.0~100.0%
08-67 Lower Limit of Tension PID Feedback
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0.0~100.0%
08-68 Reserved
08-69 DFM Selection
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0
1
Output frequency
Frequency command
08-70 ꢀ Low-pass Filter Time of Line Speed
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
4-134
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Settings
0.00~100.00 sec
08-71
|
Reserved
08-75
08-76 Source of Tension Setting
Control
TQRPG
mode
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0
1
Communication RS-485 (Pr.08-78)
Analog input (Pr. 03-00~03-02 is set to 15 tension setting) (Pr.08-78)
08-77 Max. Tension
Unit: 1
Control
TQRPG
mode
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0 ~30000 N
08-78 ꢀTension Setting
Unit: 1
Control
TQRPG
mode
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0 ~30000 N
08-79 Source of Zero-speed Tension Setting
Control
TQRPG
mode
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0
1
2
Disable
Communication RS-485 (Pr.08-80)
Analog input (Pr. 03-00~03-02 is set to 16 zero-speed tension)
(Pr.08-80)
08-80 ꢀSetting of Zero-speed Tension
Unit: 1
Control
TQRPG
mode
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0 ~30000 N
08-81 Source of Tension Taper
Control
TQRPG
mode
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0
1
Communication RS-485 (Pr.08-82)
Analog input (Pr. 03-00~03-02 is set to 17 tension taper) (Pr.08-82)
08-82 ꢀTension Taper
Unit: 1
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Control
TQRPG
mode
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0~100%
08-83 ꢀFriction Compensation
Unit: 1
Control
TQRPG
mode
Factory Setting: 0.0
Settings
0.0~100.0%
08-84 ꢀCompensation Coefficient of Material Inertial
Unit: 1
Control
TQRPG
mode
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0~30000
08-85 ꢀTorque Feed Forward Gain
Unit: 0.1
Control
TQRPG
mode
Factory Setting: 50.0
Settings
0.0~100.0%
08-86 ꢀLow Pass Filter Time of Torque Feed Forward
Unit: 0.01
Control
TQRPG
mode
Factory Setting: 5.00
Settings
0.00~100.00
08-87
|
Reserved
08-99
4-136
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 9: Communication Parameters
There is a built-in RS-485 serial interface, marked RJ-11 near to the control terminals. The pins are
defined below:
1: EV
2: GND
3: SG-
4: SG+
5: Reserved
6: Reserved
1
6
Each VFD-VE AC drive has a pre-assigned communication address specified by Pr.09-00. The
RS485 master then controls each AC motor drive according to its communication address.
09-00 ꢀCommunication Address
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 1
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
1 to 254
If the AC motor drive is controlled by RS-485 serial communication, the communication
address for this drive must be set via this parameter. And the communication address for each
AC motor drive must be different and unique.
09-01 ꢀCOM1 Transmission Speed
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 9.6
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
4.8 to 115.2kbps
This parameter is used to set the transmission speed between the RS485 master (PLC, PC,
etc.) and AC motor drive.
09-02 ꢀCOM1 Transmission Fault Treatment
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 3
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0
1
2
3
Warn and keep operating
Warn and RAMP to stop
Warn and COAST to stop
No warning and keep operating
This parameter is set to how to react if transmission errors occur.
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
09-03 ꢀCOM1 Time-out Detection
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0.0 ~ 100.0 sec (0.0 disable)
If Pr.09-03 is not set to 0.0, Pr.09-02=0~2, and there is no communication on the bus during
the Time Out detection period (set by Pr.09-03), “cE10” will be shown on the keypad.
09-04 ꢀCOM1 Communication Protocol
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 1
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0
Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,N,1>
Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,N,2>
Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,E,1>
Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,O,1>
Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,E,2>
Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,O,2>
Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <8,N,1>
Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <8,N,2>
Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <8,E,1>
Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <8,O,1>
Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <8,E,2>
Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <8,O,2>
Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,N,1>
Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,N,2>
Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,E,1>
Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,O,1>
Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,E,2>
Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,O,2>
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
1. Control by PC or PLC
A VFD-VE can be set up to communicate on Modbus networks using one of the following modes:
ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) or RTU (Remote Terminal Unit).
Users can select the desired mode along with the serial port communication protocol in Pr.09-04.
Code Description:
ASCII mode:
Each 8-bit data is the combination of two ASCII characters. For example, a 1-byte data:
64 Hex, shown as ‘64’ in ASCII, consists of ‘6’ (36Hex) and ‘4’ (34Hex).
Character
‘0’
‘1’
‘2’
‘3’
‘4’
‘5’
‘6’
‘7’
ASCII code
30H
31H
32H
33H
34H
35H
36H
37H
4-138
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Character
‘8’
‘9’
‘A’
‘B’
‘C’
‘D’
‘E’
‘F’
ASCII code
38H
39H
41H
42H
43H
44H
45H
46H
RTU mode:
Each 8-bit data is the combination of two 4-bit hexadecimal characters. For example, 64
Hex.
2. Data Format
10-bit character frame (For ASCII):
( 7.N.2)
Start
bit
Stop
bit
Stop
bit
5
0
0
1
2
3
4
6
6
7-bit character
10-bit character frame
( 7.E.1)
Start
bit
Even
parity
Stop
bit
3
4
5
1
2
7-bit character
10-bit character frame
( 7.O.1)
Start
bit
Odd
parity
Stop
bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7-bit character
10-bit character frame
11-bit character frame (For RTU):
( 8.N.2 )
Start
bit
Stop Stop
0
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
bit
bit
8-bit character
11-bit character frame
( 8.E.1 )
Even
parity
Start
bit
Stop
bit
5
1
1
2
3
4
8-bit character
11-bit character frame
( 8.O.1 )
Odd
parity
Start
bit
Stop
bit
5
2
3
4
8-bit character
11-bit character frame
3. Communication Protocol
3.1 Communication Data Frame:
ASCII mode:
STX
Start character ‘:’ (3AH)
Communication address:
8-bit address consists of 2 ASCII codes
Command code:
8-bit command consists of 2 ASCII codes
Address Hi
Address Lo
Function Hi
Function Lo
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
DATA (n-1)
to
DATA 0
Contents of data:
Nx8-bit data consist of 2n ASCII codes
n<=16, maximum of 32 ASCII codes
LRC CHK Hi
LRC CHK Lo
END Hi
LRC check sum:
8-bit check sum consists of 2 ASCII codes
End characters:
END1= CR (0DH), END0= LF(0AH)
END Lo
RTU mode:
START
A silent interval of more than 10 ms
Communication address: 8-bit address
Command code: 8-bit command
Address
Function
DATA (n-1)
to
DATA 0
Contents of data:
n×8-bit data, n<=16
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High
CRC check sum:
16-bit check sum consists of 2 8-bit characters
END
A silent interval of more than 10 ms
3.2 Address (Communication Address)
Valid communication addresses are in the range of 0 to 254. A communication address equal to 0,
means broadcast to all AC drives (AMD). In this case, the AMD will not reply any message to the
master device.
00H: broadcast to all AC drives
01H: AC drive of address 01
0FH: AC drive of address 15
10H: AC drive of address 16
:
FEH: AC drive of address 254
For example, communication to AMD with address 16 decimal (10H):
ASCII mode: Address=’1’,’0’ => ‘1’=31H, ‘0’=30H
RTU mode: Address=10H
3.3 Function (Function code) and DATA (data characters)
The format of data characters depends on the function code.
03H: read data from register
06H: write single register
08H: loop detection
10H: write multiple registers
The available function codes and examples for VFD-VE are described as follows:
(1) 03H: multi read, read data from registers.
Example: reading continuous 2 data from register address 2102H, AMD address is 01H.
ASCII mode:
Command message:
Response message:
STX
‘:’
STX
‘:’
‘0’
‘1’
‘0’
‘0’
‘1’
‘0’
‘3’
Address
Function
Address
Function
‘3’
Starting data
address
‘2’
‘1’
Number of data
(Count by byte)
‘0’
‘4’
4-140
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Command message:
Response message:
‘0’
‘2’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘2’
‘D’
‘7’
CR
LF
‘1’
Content of starting
address
‘7’
‘7’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘7’
‘1’
CR
LF
2102H
Number of data
(count by word)
Content of address
2103H
LRC Check
END
LRC Check
END
RTU mode:
Command message:
Address
Response message:
Address
Function
Number of data
(count by byte)
Content of address
2102H
Content of address
2103H
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High
01H
03H
21H
02H
00H
02H
6FH
F7H
01H
03H
Function
Starting data
address
Number of data
(count by word)
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High
04H
17H
70H
00H
00H
FEH
5CH
(2) 06H: single write, write single data to register.
Example: writing data 6000(1770H) to register 0100H. AMD address is 01H.
ASCII mode:
Command message:
Response message:
STX
‘:’
STX
‘:’
‘0’
‘1’
‘0’
‘6’
‘0’
‘1’
‘0’
‘0’
‘1’
‘7’
‘7’
‘0’
‘7’
‘1’
CR
LF
‘0’
‘1’
‘0’
‘6’
‘0’
‘1’
‘0’
‘0’
‘1’
‘7’
‘7’
‘0’
‘7’
‘1’
CR
LF
Address
Address
Function
Function
Data address
Data address
Data content
Data content
LRC Check
END
LRC Check
END
RTU mode:
Command message:
Response message:
Address
Function
Data address
01H
06H
01H
Address
Function
Data address
01H
06H
01H
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
00H
17H
70H
86H
22H
00H
17H
70H
86H
22H
Data content
Data content
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High
(3) 10H: write multiple registers (write multiple data to registers)
Example: Set the multi-step speed,
Pr.05-00=50.00 (1388H), Pr.05-01=40.00 (0FA0H). AC drive address is 01H.
ASCII Mode:
Command message:
Response message:
STX
‘:’
STX
‘:’
‘0’
‘1’
‘1’
‘0’
‘0’
‘5’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘2’
‘E’
‘8’
CR
Address 1
Address 0
Function 1
Function 0
‘0’
‘1’
‘1’
‘0’
‘0’
‘5’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘2’
‘0’
‘4’
‘1’
Address 1
Address 0
Function 1
Function 0
Starting data
address
Starting data
address
Number of data
(count by word)
Number of data
(count by word)
Number of data
(count by byte)
LRC Check
END
‘3’
‘8’
‘8’
‘0’
‘F’
‘A’
LF
The first data
content
The second data
content
‘0’
‘9’
‘A’
LRC Check
END
CR
LF
RTU mode:
Command message:
Response message:
Address
Function
Starting data
address
Number of data
(count by word)
Number of data
(count by byte)
01H
Address
Function
Starting data address
01H
10H
05H
00H
00H’
02H
04
10H
05H
00H
00H
02H
41H
Number of data
(count by word)
CRC Check Low
13H
88H
0FH
CRC Check High
04H
The first data
content
The second data
4-142
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
content
A0H
‘9’
CRC Check Low
CRC Check High
‘A’
3.4 Check sum
ASCII mode:
LRC (Longitudinal Redundancy Check) is calculated by summing up, module 256, the values of the
bytes from ADR1 to last data character then calculating the hexadecimal representation of the 2’s-
complement negation of the sum.
For example, reading 1 word from address 0401H of the AC drive with address 01H.
STX
‘:’
‘0’
‘1’
‘0’
‘3’
‘0’
‘4’
‘0’
‘1’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘1’
‘F’
‘6’
CR
LF
Address 1
Address 0
Function 1
Function 0
Starting data address
Number of data
LRC Check 1
LRC Check 0
END 1
END 0
01H+03H+04H+01H+00H+01H=0AH, the 2’s-complement negation of 0AH is F6H.
RTU mode:
Address
Function
01H
03H
Starting data address
21H
02H
00H
02H
6FH
F7H
Number of data
(count by word)
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High
CRC (Cyclical Redundancy Check) is calculated by the following steps:
Step 1: Load a 16-bit register (called CRC register) with FFFFH.
Step 2: Exclusive OR the first 8-bit byte of the command message with the low order byte of the 16-
bit CRC register, putting the result in the CRC register.
Step 3: Examine the LSB of CRC register.
Step 4: If the LSB of CRC register is 0, shift the CRC register one bit to the right with MSB zero
filling, then repeat step 3. If the LSB of CRC register is 1, shift the CRC register one bit to the right
with MSB zero filling, Exclusive OR the CRC register with the polynomial value A001H, then repeat
step 3.
Step 5: Repeat step 3 and 4 until eight shifts have been performed. When this is done, a complete
8-bit byte will have been processed.
Step 6: Repeat step 2 to 5 for the next 8-bit byte of the command message. Continue doing this until
all bytes have been processed. The final contents of the CRC register are the CRC value. When
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
transmitting the CRC value in the message, the upper and lower bytes of the CRC value must be
swapped, i.e. the lower order byte will be transmitted first.
The following is an example of CRC generation using C language. The function takes two arguments:
Unsigned char* data Å a pointer to the message buffer
Unsigned char length Å the quantity of bytes in the message buffer
The function returns the CRC value as a type of unsigned integer.
Unsigned int crc_chk(unsigned char* data, unsigned char length){
int j;
unsigned int reg_crc=0xFFFF;
while(length--){
reg_crc ^= *data++;
for(j=0;j<8;j++){
if(reg_crc & 0x01){ /* LSB(b0)=1 */
reg_crc=(reg_crc>>1) ^ 0xA001;
}else{
reg_crc=reg_crc >>1;
}
}
}
return reg_crc;
}
3.5 Address list
The contents of available addresses are shown as below:
Content
Address
Function
GG means parameter group, nn means parameter number,
for example, the address of Pr 4-01 is 0401H. Referencing to
GGnnH chapter 5 for the function of each parameter. When reading
AC drive
Parameters
parameter by command code 03H, only one parameter can
be read at one time.
0: No function
1: Stop
Command
Write only
2000H
2000H
Bit 0-3
Bit 4-5
Bit 6-7
2: Run
3: Jog + Run
00B: No function
01B: FWD
10B: REV
11B: Change direction
Command
Write only
00B: 1st accel/decel
01B: 2nd accel/decel
10B: 3rd accel/decel
11B: 4th accel/decel
Bit 8-11
Bit 12
Represented 16 step speeds.
0: No comm. multi step speed or accel/decel
time
1: Comm. multi step speed or accel/decel time
Bit 13~14 00B: No function
01B: operated by digital keypad
02B: operated by Pr.00-21 setting
03B: change operation source
Reserved
Bit 15
2001H Frequency command
4-144
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Content
Address
2002H
Function
1: EF (external fault) on
1: Reset
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
1: B.B. ON
Bit 3-15
Reserved
2100H Error code: refer to Pr.06-17 to Pr.06-22
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
1: FWD command
1: Operation status
1: Jog command
1: REV command
Status
monitor
Read only
2119H
1: REV command
1: Master frequency Controlled by communication
interface
1: Master frequency controlled by analog signal
1: Operation command controlled by
communication interface
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
1: Parameters have been locked
1: enable to copy parameter from keypad
Bit 13-15 Reserved
2102H Frequency command (F)
2103H Output frequency (H)
2104H Output current (AXXX.X)
2105H DC-BUS Voltage (UXXX.X)
2106H Output voltage (EXXX.X)
2107H Current step number of Multi-Step Speed Operation
2109H Counter value
2116H Multi-function display (Pr.00-04)
211AH Setting frequency (F)
211BH Max. setting frequency
211CH Max. output frequency
2200H Feedback Signal (XXX.XX %)
2203H AVI analog input (XXX.XX %)
2204H ACI analog input (XXX.XX %)
2205H AUI analog input (XXX.XX %)
2206H Display temperature of IGBT (oC)
2207H Display temperature of heatsink (oC)
3.6 Exception response:
The AC motor drive is expected to return a normal response after receiving command messages
from the master device. The following depicts the conditions when no normal response is replied to
the master device.
The AC motor drive does not receive the messages due to a communication error; thus, the AC
motor drive has no response. The master device will eventually process a timeout condition.
The AC motor drive receives the messages without a communication error, but cannot handle them.
An exception response will be returned to the master device and an error message “CExx” will be
displayed on the keypad of AC motor drive. The xx of “CExx” is a decimal code equal to the
exception code that is described below.
In the exception response, the most significant bit of the original command code is set to 1, and an
exception code which explains the condition that caused the exception is returned.
Example of an exception response of command code 06H and exception code 02H:
ASCII mode:
RTU mode:
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
STX
‘:’
‘0’
‘1’
‘8’
‘6’
‘0’
‘2’
‘7’
‘7’
CR
LF
Address
Function
Exception code
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High
01H
86H
02H
C3H
A1H
Address Low
Address High
Function Low
Function High
Exception code
LRC CHK Low
LRC CHK High
END 1
END 0
The explanation of exception codes:
Exception
Explanation
code
Illegal function code:
01
02
The function code received in the command message is not
available for the AC motor drive.
Illegal data address:
The data address received in the command message is not
available for the AC motor drive.
Illegal data value:
03
04
The data value received in the command message is not available
for the AC drive.
Slave device failure:
The AC motor drive is unable to perform the requested action.
Communication time-out:
If Pr.09-03 is not equal to 0.0, Pr.09-02=0~2, and there is no
communication on the bus during the Time Out detection period (set
by Pr.09-03), “cE10” will be shown on the keypad.
10
3.7 Communication program of PC:
The following is a simple example of how to write a communication program for Modbus ASCII mode
on a PC by C language.
#include<stdio.h>
#include<dos.h>
#include<conio.h>
#include<process.h>
#define PORT 0x03F8 /* the address of COM1 */
/* the address offset value relative to COM1 */
#define THR 0x0000
#define RDR 0x0000
#define BRDL 0x0000
#define IER 0x0001
#define BRDH 0x0001
#define LCR 0x0003
#define MCR 0x0004
#define LSR 0x0005
#define MSR 0x0006
unsigned char rdat[60];
/* read 2 data from address 2102H of AC drive with address 1 */
unsigned char tdat[60]={':','0','1','0','3','2','1','0',’2', '0','0','0','2','D','7','\r','\n'};
void main(){
int i;
4-146
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
outportb(PORT+MCR,0x08);
outportb(PORT+IER,0x01);
/* interrupt enable */
/* interrupt as data in */
outportb(PORT+LCR,(inportb(PORT+LCR) | 0x80));
/* the BRDL/BRDH can be access as LCR.b7==1 */
outportb(PORT+BRDL,12);
outportb(PORT+BRDH,0x00);
outportb(PORT+LCR,0x06);
/* set baudrate=9600, 12=115200/9600*/
/* set protocol, <7,N,2>=06H, <7,E,1>=1AH, <7,O,1>=0AH,
<8,N,2>=07H, <8,E,1>=1BH, <8,O,1>=0BH */
for(i=0;i<=16;i++){
while(!(inportb(PORT+LSR) & 0x20)); /* wait until THR empty */
outportb(PORT+THR,tdat[i]);
/* send data to THR */
}
i=0;
while(!kbhit()){
if(inportb(PORT+LSR) & 0x01){ /* b0==1, read data ready */
rdat[i++]=inportb(PORT+RDR); /* read data form RDR */
}
}
}
09-05 ꢀCOM2 Transmission Speed (Keypad)
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 9.6
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
4.8 to 115.2kbps
This parameter is used to set the transmission speed between the RS485 master (PLC, PC,
etc.) and AC motor drive.
09-06 ꢀCOM2 Transmission Fault Treatment (Keypad)
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 3
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0
1
2
3
Warn and keep operating
Warn and RAMP to stop
Warn and COAST to stop
No warning and keep operating
This parameter is set to how to react if transmission errors occur.
09-07 ꢀCOM2 Time-out Detection (Keypad)
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0.0 ~ 100.0 sec
If Pr.09-03 is not equal to 0.0, Pr.09-02=0~2, and there is no communication on the bus during
the Time Out detection period (set by Pr.09-03), “cE10” will be shown on the keypad.
09-08 ꢀCOM2 Communication Protocol (Keypad)
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 13
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0
1
Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,N,1>
Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,N,2>
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
2
Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,E,1>
Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,O,1>
Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,E,2>
Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,O,2>
Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <8,N,1>
Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <8,N,2>
Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <8,E,1>
Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <8,O,1>
Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <8,E,2>
Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <8,O,2>
Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,N,1>
Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,N,2>
Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,E,1>
Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,O,1>
Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,E,2>
Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,O,2>
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
09-09 ꢀResponse Delay Time
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 2.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0.0 ~ 200.0 msec
This parameter is the response delay time after AC drive receives communication command
as shown in the following.
RS-485 BUS
Response Message
PC or PLC command
of the AC Drive
Handling time
Response Delay Time
Pr.09-09
of the AC drive
09-10 ꢀ Transmission Master Frequency
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 60.00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0.00 ~ 600.00 Hz
When Pr.00-20 is set to 1 (RS485 communication). The AC motor drive will save the last
frequency command into Pr.09-10 when abnormal turn-off or momentary power loss. After re-
power on, it will with the frequency set in Pr.09-10 if there is no new frequency command.
09-11 ꢀ Block Transfer 1
09-12 ꢀ Block Transfer 2
09-13 ꢀ Block Transfer 3
Unit: 1
Unit: 1
Unit: 1
4-148
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
09-14 ꢀ Block Transfer 4
09-15 ꢀ Block Transfer 5
09-16 ꢀ Block Transfer 6
09-17 ꢀ Block Transfer 7
09-18 ꢀ Block Transfer 8
09-19 ꢀ Block Transfer 9
Unit: 1
Unit: 1
Unit: 1
Unit: 1
Unit: 1
Unit: 1
Unit: 1
09-20 ꢀ Block Transfer 10
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0 to 65535
There is a group of block transfer parameter available in the AC motor drive (Pr.09-11 to
Pr.09-20). User can use them (Pr.09-11 to Pr.09-20) to save those parameters that you want
to read.
09-21 ꢀ Multi-function Output Status
Control
mode
Factory Setting: Read-only
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0 to 65535
09-22 ꢀ AFM2 Status
Control
mode
Factory Setting: Read-only
Factory Setting: Read-only
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0 to 4095
09-23 ꢀ AFM3 Status
Control
mode
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0 to 4095
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 10 PID Control
10-00 Encoder Pulse
Unit: 1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 600
VFPG FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
1 to 20000 (Max=20000 for 2-pole motor)
A Pulse Generator (PG) or encoder is used as a sensor that provides a feedback signal of the
motor speed. This parameter defines the number of pulses for each cycle of the PG control.
10-01 Encoder Input Type Setting
Control
Factory Setting: 0
VFPG FOCPG TQRPG
mode
Settings
0
1
Disable
Phase A leads in a forward run command and phase B leads in a
reverse run command
FWD
REV
A
B
Phase B leads in a forward run command and phase A leads in a
reverse run command
FWD
REV
2
3
A
B
Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a direction input. (low
input=reverse direction, high input=forward direction)
FWD
REV
A
B
Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a direction input. (low
input=forward direction, high input=reverse direction)
REV
FWD
4
5
A
B
Single-phase input
A
It is helpful for the stable control by inputting correct pulse type.
4-150
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
10-02 ꢀ PG Feedback Fault Treatment
Control
Factory Setting: 2
VFPG FOCPG TQRPG
mode
Settings
0
1
2
Warn and keep operating
Warn and RAMP to stop
Warn and COAST to stop
10-03 ꢀDetection Time for PG Feedback Fault
Unit: 0.01
Control
Factory Setting: 1.00
VFPG FOCPG TQRPG
mode
Settings
0.00 to 10.00 sec
When PG loss, encoder signal error, pulse signal setting error or signal error, if time exceeds
the detection time for PG feedback fault (Pr.10-03), the PG signal error will occur. Refer to the
Pr.10-02 for PG feedback fault treatment.
10-04 ꢀASR (Auto Speed Regulation) control (P) 1
Unit: 0.1
Control
Factory Setting: 10
VFPG FOCPG
mode
Settings
0 to 40 Hz
10-05 ꢀASR (Auto Speed Regulation) control (I) 1
Unit: 0.001
Control
Factory Setting: 0.100
VFPG FOCPG
mode
Settings
0.000 to 10.000 sec
10-06 ꢀ ASR (Auto Speed Regulation) control (P) 2
Unit: 0.1
Control
Factory Setting: 10
VFPG FOCPG
mode
Settings
0 to 40Hz
10-07 ꢀ ASR (Auto Speed Regulation) control (I) 2
Unit: 0.001
Control
Factory Setting: 0.100
VFPG FOCPG
mode
Settings
0.000 to 10.000 sec
10-08 ꢀASR 1/ASR2 Switch Frequency
Unit: 0.01
Control
Factory Setting: 7.00
VFPG FOCPG
mode
Settings
5.00 o 600.00Hz
ASR P determines Proportional control and associated gain (P). ASR I determines integral
control and associated gain (I).
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
When integral time is set to 0, it is disabled. Pr.10-08 defines the switch frequency for the
ASR1 (Pr.10-04, Pr.10-05) and ASR2 (Pr.10-06, Pr.10-07).
PI
10-06
10-07
10-04
10-05
10-21
10-22
5Hz
5Hz
Hz
0Hz
10-08
When using multi-function input terminals to switch ASR1/ASR2, the diagram will be shown as
follows.
Setting multi-function input terminal to 27
(ASR1/ASR2 switch)
ON
OFF
OFF
ASR 2
ASR 1
ASR 1
0.1 sec
0.1 sec
10-09 ꢀ ASR Primary Low Pass Filter Gain
Unit: 0.001
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.008
FOCPG
Settings
0.000 to 0.350 sec
It defines the filter time of the ASR command.
10-10 ꢀ PG Stall Level
Unit: 1
Control
Factory Setting: 115
VFPG FOCPG
mode
Settings
0 to 120% (0: disable)
This parameter determines the maximum PG feedback signal allowed before a fault occurs.
(max. output frequency Pr.01-00 =100%)
10-11 ꢀ PG Stall Detection Time
Unit: 0.1
Control
Factory Setting: 0.1
VFPG FOCPG
mode
Settings
0.0 to 2.0 sec
10-12 ꢀ PG Slip Range
Unit: 1
Control
Factory Setting: 50
VFPG FOCPG
mode
4-152
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Settings
0 to 50% (0: disable)
10-13 ꢀPG Slip Detection Time
Unit: 0.1
Control
Factory Setting: 0.5
VFPG FOCPG
mode
Settings
0.0 to 10.0 sec
10-14 ꢀ PG Stall and Slip Error Treatment
Control
Factory Setting: 2
VFPG FOCPG
mode
Settings
0
1
2
Warn and keep operating
Warn and RAMP to stop
Warn and COAST to stop
When the value of (rotation speed – motor frequency) exceeds Pr.10-12 setting, detection time
exceeds Pr.10-13 or motor frequency exceeds Pr.10-10 setting, it will start to accumulate time.
If detection time exceeds Pr.10-11, the PG feedback signal error will occur. Refer to Pr.10-14
PG stall and slip error treatment.
10-15 ꢀ Pulse Input Type Setting
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0
1
Disable
Phase A leads in a forward run command and phase B leads in a
reverse run command
FWD
REV
A
B
Phase B leads in a forward run command and phase A leads in a
reverse run command
FWD
REV
2
3
A
B
Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a direction input. (low
input=reverse direction, high input=forward direction)
FWD
REV
A
B
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a direction input. (low
input=forward direction, high input=reverse direction)
REV
FWD
4
A
B
10-16 ꢀ Output Setting for Frequency Division (denominator)
Unit: 1
Control
Factory Setting: 1
VFPG FOCPG TQRPG
mode
Settings
1 to 255
This parameter is used to set the denominator for frequency division. For example, when it is
set to 2 with feedback 1024ppr, PG output will be 1024/2=512ppr.
10-17 ꢀ PG Electrical Gear A (Channel 1 of PG card)
Unit: 1
Control
Factory Setting: 100
VFPG FOCPG
mode
Settings
1 to 5000
10-18 ꢀ PG Electrical Gear B (Channel 2 of PG card)
Unit: 1
Control
Factory Setting: 100
VFPG FOCPG
mode
Settings
1 to 5000
Rotation speed = pulse frequency/encoder pulse (Pr.10-00) * PG Electrical Gear A / PG
Electrical Gear B.
10-19 ꢀ PG Position Control Point (Home)
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 0
Control
VFPG FOCPG
mode
Settings
0 to 20000
This parameter determines the home position in the position control.
4-154
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
ꢀRange for PG Position Attained (Home range)
10-20
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 10
Control
mode
VFPG FOCPG
Settings
0 to 20000
This parameter determines the Home position attained in the position control mode.
10-21 ꢀ P Gain of Zero Speed
Unit: 1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 10
VFPG FOCPG
Settings
0 to 40Hz
10-22 ꢀ I Gain of Zero Speed
Unit: 0.001
Control
Factory Setting: 0.100
VFPG FOCPG
mode
Settings
0.000 to 10.000 sec
This parameter determines zero speed command gain in speed control.
10-23 ꢀ Feed Forward Gain of APR
Unit: 1
Control
Factory Setting: 30
VFPG FOCPG
mode
Settings
0 to 100
10-24 ꢀ Decelerate Time of Position
Unit: 0.01/0.1
Control
Factory Setting: 3.00/3.0
VFPG FOCPG
mode
Settings
0.00 to 600.00 sec/0.0 to 6000.0 sec
10-25 ꢀ Max. Frequency for Resolution Switch
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 50.00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
50.00 to 600.00Hz
This function is used to enhance the function of unstable speed/position due to insufficient
resolution of analog simulation value. It needs to use with external input terminals (one of
Pr.02-01 to Pr.02-06/Pr.02-23 to Pr.02-30 should be set to 43).
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
AUI +10V
Resolution switch frequency
Pr.10-25
AUI 0V
Max. output frequency
Pr.01-00
AUI -10V
Output
frequency
0Hz
Max. waiting time for
frequency switch
Max. waiting time for
frequency switch
Resolution switch
Pr.02-11~02-14=43
Reverse running
Forward running
10-26 Reserved
10-27 ꢀ PG Mechanical Gear A1
10-28 ꢀ PG Mechanical Gear B1
10-29 ꢀ PG Mechanical Gear A2
10-30 ꢀ PG Mechanical Gear B2
Unit: 1
Unit: 1
Unit: 1
Unit: 1
Control
Factory Setting: 100
VFPG FOCPG TQRPG
mode
Settings
1 to 65535
Driver
Gear ratio A1/A2
Load
1:10
Gear ratio
10:1
Motor
Encoder is used
at load side
Gear ratio B1/B2
4-156
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
00-20
+
+
+
P
+
+
-
10-09
torque limit
07-32~07-35
I
no offset
by analog input (Pr.03-00)
tor que offset setting
10-04
10-06
10-21
10-05
10-07
10-22
TQBias
and
controlled by external terminals (Pr.07-29 to Pr.07-31)
07-27
01-01
01-02
05-01~09
M
IGBT
&
PWM
current
limit
10-00
10-01
flux weakening curve
curr ent
measure
current feedback
actual frequency
Control Diagram for the Vector + Torque
no offset
byanalog input (Pr.03-00)
to rq ue offset settin g
c ontr olle d by e xtern al te rmina ls ( Pr.07- 29 to Pr.0 7-3 1)
+
tor que comman d
07 -2 1
+
06-12
07-23
10-09
07 -24 o r 00-20
sp eed limit or com mand
+
+
+
P
sp eed to rqu e
mode switch
-
+
tor que limit
07 -3 2~07- 35
I
10-04
10-06
10-21
10-05
10-07
10-22
and
01-01
01-02
05-01~09
M
IGBT
&
PWM
Current
contr ol
10-00
10-01
flux weakeningcurve
Cur ren t
measur e Cu rre nt fe edb ac k
ac tu al fre quenc y
Control Diagram for the Torque + Encoder
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
RUN
STOP
RUN/STOP
multi-function input
terminal is set to 26
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
(torque/speed mode switch)
speed limit
speed limit
03-00~03=1
(AVI/AUI/ACI is
frequency command)
speed
command
speed
command
torque
limit
torque
limit
03-00~03=2
(AVI/AUI/ACI
is torque command)
torque
command
torque
command
speed control
(decelerate to stop)
speed
control
speed
control
torque
torque
Control mode
command
command
Torque Control/Speed Control Switch Timing
(00-10=3/4, multi-function input terminal is set to 26)
4-158
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 11 Advanced Parameters
11-00 ꢀ System Control
Control
FOCPG
mode
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
Bit 0 ASR Auto tuning
Bit 1 Inertia estimate (only in FOCPG mode)
Bit 2 Zero Servo
Bit 3 Reserved
Bit 4 Enable gain adjustment of position loop KP
Bit 0=1: system will generate an ASR setting and Pr. 10-04~10-07, 10-21~10-22 will be invalid.
Bit 1=1: Inertia estimate function is enabled.
Bit 2=1: when frequency command is less than Fmin (Pr.01-07), it will use zero servo function.
NO
Estimate Jm value
YES
Setting auto gain adjustment
Pr.11-00=1
Adjust gain value by manual
Pr.11-00=0 (factory setting)
Adjust Pr.11-02, 11-03 and 11-11
separately by speed response
Adjust Pr.10-04, 10-05, 10-06,
10-07, 10-21 and 10-22
separatelyby speed response
Adjust by requirement
Pr.11-04 (PDFF function)
Adjust by requirement
Pr.10-09 (for general,
no need to adjust)
Adjust by requirement
Pr.10-08
(ASR1/ASR2 switch frequency)
Adjust by requirement
Pr.07-32~35 (torque limit)
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
PI
PI
10-06
10-07
11-03
11-02
1. Pr. 11-01 value
2. set Pr.11-00 to 1
10-04
10-05
Pr.11-11
use to adjust the
strength of zero-
servo lock
10-21
10-22
5Hz
5Hz
5Hz
5Hz
Hz
Hz
0Hz
PI adjustment-manual gain
0Hz
10-08
10-08
PI adjustment-auto gain
11-01 ꢀ Per Unit of System Inertia
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 400
Control
FOCPG
mode
Settings
1 to 65535 (256=1PU)
To get the system inertia from Pr.11-01, user needs to set Pr.11-00 to 2 and execute
continuous forward/reverse running.
11-02 ꢀ Low-speed Bandwidth
Unit: 1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 10
FOCPG
Settings
0 to 40Hz
11-03 ꢀ High-speed Bandwidth
Unit: 1
Control
FOCPG
mode
Factory Setting: 10
Settings
0 to 40Hz
11-11 ꢀ Zero-speed Bandwidth
Unit: 1
Control
Factory Setting: 10
VFPG FOCPG TQRPG
mode
Settings
0 to 40Hz
After estimating inertia and set Pr.11-00 to 1 (auto tuning), user can adjust parameters Pr.11-
02, 11-03 and 11-11 separately by speed response. The larger number you set, the faster
response you will get. Pr.10-08 is the switch frequency for low-speed/high-speed bandwidth.
11-04 ꢀ PDFF Gain Value
Unit: 1
Control
FOCPG
mode
Factory Setting: 30
Settings
0 to 200%
4-160
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
After finishing estimating and set Pr.11-00=1 (auto tuning), using Pr.11-04 to reduce overshoot.
Please adjust PDFF gain value by actual situation.
Besides traditional PI control, it also provides PDFF function to reduce overshoot for speed
control.
1. Get Pr.11-01 value
2. Set Pr.11-00 to 1
3. Adjust Pr.11-04 (the larger number is set and the suppressed overshoot function will be
better. But it needs to be used by the actual condition)
PI
PDFF
It is recommended to disable
this function (Pr.11-04=0) for
connection switch and
Y/
ASR1/ASR2 switch application.
11-05 ꢀ Gain Value of Flux Weakening Curve for Motor 1
Unit: 1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 90
FOCPG
Settings
0 to 200%
It is used to adjust the output voltage of flux weakening curve.
For the spindle application, the adjustment method is
1. It is used to adjust the output voltage when exceeding rated frequency.
2. Monitor the output voltage
3. Adjust Pr.11-05 (motor 1) or Pr.11-06 (motor 2) setting to make the output voltage reach
motor rated voltage.
4. The larger number it is set, the larger output voltage you will get.
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
N-m
Flux Weakening Curve
11-05/11-06
Hz
Fbase
11-06 ꢀ Gain Value of Flux Weakening Curve for Motor 2
Unit: 1
Control
FOCPG
mode
Factory Setting: 90
Settings
0 to 200%
11-07 ꢀ Detection Time for Phase-loss
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.20
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0.01 to 600.00 sec
When the phase-loss occurs and exceeds this detection time, the fault code “PHL” will be
displayed. The AC motor drive will record the operation time during phase-loss.
When phase-loss occurs and Pr.11-07 is set to 0, it won’t display PHL and won’t execute
Pr.06-02.
When user sets this parameter to 0 or not factory setting, we won’t promise that all
characteristics will be the same as the 3-phase input.
If it is set to 0 or a larger number, it will short the life of rectifier and capacitors in the AC motor
drive.
11-08 Reserved
11-09 ꢀ Level of Phase-loss
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 60.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0.0 to 320.0
11-10 ꢀ Speed Feed Forward Gain
Unit: 1
4-162
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0
FOCPG
Settings
0 to 100%
11-12 ꢀ Speed Response of Flux Weakening Area
Unit: 1
Control
FOCPG
mode
Factory Setting: 65
Settings
0 to 150% (0: disable)
It is used to control the response speed for the flux weakening area. The larger number you
set, the faster response you will get.
11-13 ꢀ Notch Filter Depth
Unit: 1
Control
FOCPG
mode
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0 to 20 db
11-14 ꢀ Notch Filter Frequency
Unit: 0.01
Control
FOCPG
mode
Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings
0.00 to 200.00
This parameter is used to set resonance frequency of mechanical system. It can be used to
suppress the resonance of mechanical system.
The larger number you set Pr.11-13, the better suppression resonance function you will get.
The notch filter frequency is the resonance of mechanical frequency.
11-15 ꢀ Gain Value of Slip Compensation
Unit: 0.01
Control
SVC
Factory Setting: 1.00
mode
Settings
0.00 to 1.00
It is only valid in SVC mode.
When the AC motor drive drives the asynchronous motor, slip will increase when the load is
added. This parameter can be used to change frequency, lower slip and make the motor be
synchronous when running under rated current. When the output current is higher than no-load
current, the AC motor drive will adjust frequency by this parameter. If the actual speed is
slower than expected, please increase the setting or decrease the setting.
11-16 ꢀ Low-pass Filter Time of Keypad Display
Unit: 0.001
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.100
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Settings
0.001 to 65.535 Sec
It is used to lower the blinking frequency of LCD display.
11-17 ꢀ Low-pass Filter Time of PG2 Pulse Input
Unit: 0.001
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.100
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
Settings
0.000 to 65.535 Sec
11-18 ꢀ APR Gain
Unit: 0.01
Control
FOCPG
mode
Factory Setting: 10.00
Settings
0.00 to 40.00
11-19 ꢀ APR Curve Time
Unit: 0.01
Control
FOCPG
mode
Factory Setting: 3.00
Settings
0.00 to 655.35 sec
11-20
|
Reserved
11-28
11-29 Accumulative Operation Time of Phase-loss
Unit: 1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Settings
0 to 65535 (hour)
11-30
|
Reserved
11-40
4-164
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
This page intentionally left blank
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
4-165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting
5.1 Over Current (OC)
ocd
OC
ocA
Over-current
Over current
Over-current
during acceleration
during acceleration
Yes
Remove short circuit
or ground fault
Check if there is any short circuits and
grounding between the U, V, W and motor
No
No
No
No
Reduce the load or
increase the power
Yes
If load is too large
No
of AC motor drive
No
Reduce torque
compensation
No
No
Suitable torque
compensation
Yes
Yes
Reduce torque
compensation
Check if
Check if
No
No
deceleration time
is too short by
load inertia.
acceleration time
is too short by
load inertia.
Yes
Yes
Maybe AC motor drive
has malfunction or error
due to noise. Please
contact DELTA.
Is load changed
suddenly?
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Can acceleration
Can deceleration
time be made longer?
time be made longer?
No
No
Reduce load or increase
the power of AC motor
drive
Increase accel/decel
time
Reduce load or increase
the power of AC motor
drive
Check braking
method. Please
contact DELTA
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
5-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting|
5.2 Ground Fault
Maybe AC motor drive has
malfunction or misoperation
due to noise. Please
If output circuit(cable or
motor) of AC motor drive
is grounded?
No
GFF
Ground fault
contact DELTA.
Yes
Remove grounding
5.3 Over Voltage (OV)
Over voltage
No
If voltage is within
specification
Reduce voltage to
be within spec.
Yes
Yes
If over-voltage is occurred without load
No
Maybe AC motor drive
has malfunction or
misoperation due to
noise. Please contact
DELTA.
When OV occurs, check if the
voltage of DC BUS is greater
than protection value
No
Yes
Yes
Increase
deceleration
time
If OV occurs when
sudden acceleration
stops
No
Yes
No
Yes
Increase
acceleration
time
Yes
Increase setting time
No
Need to considerate to
use brake unit and
DC brake
No
Reduce moment
of inertia
Reduce moment of load inertia
No
No
Use brake unit or DC brake
Yes
Need to check control method. Please contact DELTA.
5-2
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting|
5.4 Low Voltage (Lv)
Low voltage
Yes
Power cut, including momentary
power loss
Restart after reset
No
Check if there is any malfunction
component or disconnection in
power supply circuit
Yes
Change defective component
and check connection
No
Change power supply
system for requirement
No
Check if voltage is
within specification
Yes
Check if there is heavy load
with high start current in the
same power system
Using the different power
supply for this drive and
heavy load system
Yes
No
No
Check if Lv occurs when
breaker and magnetic
contactor is ON
Yes
Suitable power
transformer capacity
No
Yes
Check if voltage between +1/+2
and - is greater than Pr.06-00
No
Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction.
Please contact DELTA.
Yes
Control circuit has malfunction or
misoperation due to noise. Please
contact DELTA.
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting|
5.5 Over Heat (oH1, oH2, oH3)
AC motor drive overheats
Heat sink overheats
No
Check if temperature of heat sink
is larger than 90 OC
Temperature detection malfunctions.
Please contact DELTA.
Yes
Yes
If load is too large
Reduce load
No
No
If cooling fan functions normally
Yes
Change cooling fan
Remove obstruction
Yes
Check if cooling fan is jammed
No
Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or
misoperation due to noise. Please contact
DELTA.
Yes
Check if surrounding temperature
is within specification
No
Adjust surrounding temperature
to specification
5.6 Overload
OL
OL1/ OL2
No
Check if the setting of electronic
thermal relay is suitable
Modify setting
Yes
Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction
or misoperation due to noise.
No
If load is too large
Yes
Reduce load or increase the power of AC motor drive
5-4
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting|
5.7 Display of KPV-CE01 is Abnormal
Abnormal display or no display
Yes
Turn the power off and power
on again after display is off
Fix connector and eliminate noise
No
No
Check if all connectors are connected
well and if there is no noise
Display normal?
Yes
Yes
AC motor drive works normally
AC motor drive has malfunction.
Please contact DELTA.
5.8 Phase Loss (PHL)
Phase loss
No
Connect all three
phase well
Check if the wiring of terminals R, S and T is OK
Yes
No
Tighten all screws
Check if the screws of terminals are tightened
Yes
Yes
Yes
Please check the wiring
and power system for
abnormal power
Check if the input voltage of R, S, T is unbalanced
No
Please check the fuse
at AC side
Check if it is 40hp and above
No
Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation
due to noise. Please contact DELTA.
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting|
5.9 Motor cannot Run
Check if CE01
displays
normally
Check if non-fuse
breaker and magnetic
contactor are ON
No
No
Set them to ON
Motor cannot run
Yes
Yes
Reset after clearing
fault and then RUN
Check if any faults
occur, such as
Lv, PHL or
Check if there is any
fault code displayed
No
Check if input
voltage is normal
disconnection
No
Yes
It can run when
no faults occur
If jumper or DC
reactor is connected
between +1 and +2/B1
No
Input "RUN"
No
command
by keypad
Use jumper
or DC reactor
Yes
Yes
Press RUN key to
check if it can run
Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation
due to noise. Please contact DELTA.
Press UP key to
set frequency
Check if the wiring
of terminal FWD
and between
REV-DCM is correct
Yes
No
No
No
Check if input FWD
or REV command
Yes
Press UP to
check if motor
can run
Change switch or relay
Yes
No
No
No
Set frequency or not
Yes
Correct connection
Modify frequency
setting
No
if upper bound freq.
and setting freq. is
lower than the min.
output freq.
Check if the parameter
setting and wiring of
analog signal and
multi-step speed
are correct
Change defective
Yes
potentiometer and
relay
No
Motor has malfunction
Check if there is any
output voltage from
terminals U, V and W
No
No
Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction.
Please contact DELTA.
No
If load is too large
Yes
Yes
Yes
Check if motor
connection
is correct
Connect correctly
Check if the setting
of torque
Yes
compensation
is correct
Motor is locked due to large load, please reduce load.
For example, if there is a brake, check if it is released.
No
Increase the setting of
torque compensation
5-6
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting|
5.10 Motor Speed cannot be Changed
Motor can run but
cannot change speed
Check if the setting of the
max. frequency is too low
Yes
Modify the setting
No
No
If the setting of frequency
is out of range(upper/lower)
bound
Yes
Modify the setting
No
Press UP/DOWN key
to see if speed has
any change
Yes
Yes
No
If there is any change
of the signal that sets
frequency (0-10V and
4-20mA)
If the setting of
Pr.04-00 to Pr.04-14
are the same
Yes
No
No
Check if the wiring between
M1~M6 to DCM is correct
No
Check if the wiring of
external terminal is correct
No
Yes
Connect
correctly
Yes
Check if frequency for
each step is different
Change defective
potentiometer
No
Yes
Change frequency setting
No
If accel./decel. time
is very long
Yes
Please set suitable
accel./decel. time by
load inertia
Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation
due to noise. Please contact DELTA.
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting|
5.11 Motor Stalls during Acceleration
Yes
Check if acceleration
time is too short
Motor stalls during
acceleration
Increase setting time
Yes
No
Check if the inertia
of motor and load
are very high
Yes
Use special motor?
No
No
Thicken or shorten the
wiring between the
motor or AC motor drive
Reduce load or
increase the capacity
of AC motor drive
Check if the voltage of
terminal is lower than
before
Yes
No
Reduce load or
increase the capacity
of AC motor drive
Yes
Check if the load torque
is too high
No
Maybe AC motor drive has
malfunction or misoperation
due to noise. Please contact
DELTA
Check if the torque
compensation is suitable
Yes
No
Increase torque compensation
5.12 The Motor does not Run as Expected
Check if V/f characteristic
Motor does not run
as expected
No
Adjust V/f characteristic
and lower torque compensation
and torque compensation
is suitable
Yes
Yes
Please use specific motor
Run in low speed continuously
No
Yes
Reduce load or increase the
capacity of AC motor drive
If load is too large
No
Yes
Check if output voltage of U, V W
is balanced
Motor has malfunction
No
Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation
due to noise. Please contact DELTA.
5-8
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting|
5.13 Electromagnetic/Induction Noise
There are many noises surround the AC motor drives and invade it by radiation or power circuit. It
may cause the misoperation of control circuit and even damage the AC motor drive. Of course, that
is a solution to increase the noise tolerance of AC motor drive. But it is not the best one due to the
limit. Therefore, solve it from the outside as following will be the best.
1.
2.
Add surge killer on the relay or contact to suppress switching surge between ON/OFF.
Shorten the wiring length of the control circuit or serial circuit and separate from the main
circuit wiring.
3.
4.
5.
Comply with the wiring regulation for those shielded wire and use isolation amplifier for
long wire.
The grounding terminal should comply with the local regulation and ground independently,
i.e. not to have common ground with electric welding machine and power equipment.
Connect a noise filter at the input terminal of the AC motor drive to prevent noise from
power circuit.
In a word, three-level solutions for electromagnetic noise are “no product”, “no spread” and
“no receive”.
5.14 Environmental Condition
Since AC motor drive is an electronic device, you should comply with the environmental condition
stated in the appendix A. Following are the remedial measures for necessary.
1.
2.
To prevent vibration, anti-vibration spacer is the last choice. The vibration tolerance must
be within the specification. The vibration effect is equal to the mechanical stress and it
cannot occur frequently, continuously or repeatedly to prevent damaging AC motor drive.
Store in a clean and dry location free from corrosive fumes/dust to prevent rustiness, poor
contact. It also may cause short by low insulation in a humid location. The solution is to
use both paint and dust-proof. For particular occasion, use the enclosure with whole-seal
structure.
3.
The surrounding temperature should be within the specification. Too high or low
temperature will affect the lifetime and reliability. For semiconductor components, damage
will occur once any specification is out of range. Therefore, it is necessary to clean and
periodical check for the air cleaner and cooling fan besides having cooler and sunshade.
In additional, the microcomputer may not work in extreme low temperature and needs to
have heater.
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting|
4.
Store within a relative humidity range of 0% to 90% and non-condensing environment. Do
not turn off the air conditioner and have exsiccator for it.
5.15 Affecting Other Machines
AC motor drive may affect the operation of other machine due to many reasons. The solutions are as
follows.
„
High Harmonic at Power Side
If there is high harmonic at power side during running, the improved methods are:
1.
Separate power system: use transformer for AC motor drive.
Use reactor at the power input terminal of AC motor drive or decrease high harmonic by
multiple circuit.
2.
3.
If there is phase lead capacitor, it should use serial reactor to prevent capacitor damage
from high harmonic.
serial reactor
phase lead capacitor
„
Motor Temperature Rises
When the motor is induction motor with ventilation-cooling-type used in variety speed
operation, bad cooling will happen in the low speed. Therefore, it may overheat. Besides,
high harmonic is in output waveform to increase copper loss and iron loss. Following
measures should be used by load situation and operation range when necessary.
1.
Use the motor with independent power ventilation or increase the horsepower.
Use inverter duty motor.
2.
3.
Do NOT run in the low speed
5-10
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance
6.1 Fault Code Information
The AC motor drive has a comprehensive fault diagnostic system that includes several different
alarms and fault messages. Once a fault is detected, the corresponding protective functions will be
activated. The following faults are displayed as shown on the AC motor drive digital keypad display.
The six most recent faults can be read from the digital keypad or communication.
NOTE
Wait 5 seconds after a fault has been cleared before performing reset via keypad of input terminal.
6.1.1 Common Problems and Solutions
Fault Name
Fault Descriptions
Corrective Actions
1.
Short-circuit at motor output: Check for
possible poor insulation at the output
lines.
Over-current during
acceleration
(Output current
exceeds triple rated
current during
2.
3.
Acceleration Time too short: Increase the
Acceleration Time.
AC motor drive output power is too small:
Replace the AC motor drive with the next
higher power model.
acceleration.)
1.
2.
3.
Short-circuit at motor output: Check for
possible poor insulation at the output line.
Deceleration Time too short: Increase the
Deceleration Time.
AC motor drive output power is too small:
Replace the AC motor drive with the next
higher power model.
Over-current during
deceleration
(Output current
exceeds triple rated
current during
deceleration.)
Over-current during
steady state
operation
(Output current
exceeds triple rated
current during
1. Short-circuit at motor output: Check for
possible poor insulation at the output line.
2. Sudden increase in motor loading: Check
for possible motor stall.
3. AC motor drive output power is too small:
Replace the AC motor drive with the next
higher power model.
constant speed.)
Hardware failure in
current detection
Return to the factory
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
6-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|
Fault Name
Fault Descriptions
Corrective Actions
When (one of) the output terminal(s) is
grounded, short circuit current is more than
50% of AC motor drive rated current, the AC
motor drive power module may be damaged.
NOTE: The short circuit protection is
provided for AC motor drive protection,
not for protection of the user.
Ground fault
1. Check the wiring connections between the
AC motor drive and motor for possible
short circuits, also to ground.
2. Check whether the IGBT power module is
damaged.
3. Check for possible poor insulation at the
output line.
Short-circuit is
detected between
upper bridge and
lower bridge of the
IGBT module
Return to the factory
DC BUS over-voltage
during acceleration
(230V: DC 450V;
460V: DC 900V)
DC BUS over-voltage
during deceleration
(230V: DC 450V;
460V: DC 900V)
DC BUS over-voltage
in constant speed
(230V: DC 450V;
460V: DC 900V)
Hardware failure in
voltage detection
DC BUS voltage is
less than Pr.06-00
during acceleration
DC BUS voltage is
less than Pr.06-00
during deceleration
DC BUS voltage is
less than Pr.06-00 in
constant speed
1.
Check if the input voltage falls within the
rated AC motor drive input voltage range.
Check for possible voltage transients.
If DC BUS over-voltage due to
regenerative voltage, please increase the
Deceleration Time or add an optional
brake resistor.
2.
3.
Check if input voltage is within specification
range and monitor if there is surge voltage.
1.
2.
Check if the input voltage is normal
Check for possible sudden load
DC BUS voltage is
less than Pr.06-00 at
stop
Check Power Source Input if all 3 input phases
are connected without loose contacts.
For models 40hp and above, please check if
the fuse for the AC input circuit is blown.
Phase Loss
6-2
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|
Fault Name
Fault Descriptions
Corrective Actions
Ensure that the ambient temperature falls
within the specified temperature range.
Make sure that the ventilation holes are
not obstructed.
Remove any foreign objects from the
heatsinks and check for possible dirty
heat sink fins.
1.
2.
3.
IGBT overheating
IGBT temperature
exceeds protection
level
1 to15HP: 90 oC
20 to 100HP: 100 oC
4.
5.
Check the fan and clean it.
Provide enough spacing for adequate
ventilation.
1.
Ensure that the ambient temperature
falls within the specified temperature
range.
Heatsink
overheating
Heat sink
2.
3.
Make sure that the ventilation holes are
not obstructed.
Remove any foreign objects from the
heatsinks and check for possible dirty
heat sink fins.
temperature exceeds
90oC
4.
5.
Check the fan and clean it.
Provide enough spacing for adequate
ventilation.
1.
2.
Make sure that the motor is not
obstructed.
Ensure that the ambient temperature
falls within the specified temperature
range.
Motor overheating
The AC motor drive
detects that the
internal temperature
exceeds Pr.06-30
(PTC level)
3.
Take the next higher power AC motor
drive model.
OH1 hardware failure
OH2 hardware failure
Return to the factory
Return to the factory
1.
2.
Make sure that the fan is not obstructed.
Return to the factory
Fan failure
Overload
The AC motor drive
detects excessive
drive output current.
NOTE: The AC motor
drive can withstand
up to 150% of the
rated current for a
maximum of 60
seconds.
1. Check whether the motor is overloaded.
2. Take the next higher power AC motor
drive model.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
Check whether the motor 1 is
overloaded.
Check whether the rated current of motor
1 (Pr.05-01) is suitable
Take the next higher power AC motor
drive model.
Check whether the motor 2 is
overloaded.
Check whether the rated current of motor
2 (Pr.05-13) is suitable
Take the next higher power AC motor
drive model.
Motor 1 overload
Motor 2 overload
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|
Fault Name
Fault Descriptions
Broken fuse
The fuse at DC side
is broken for 30hp
and below
Corrective Actions
Check whether the fuse of the transistor
module is functioning well
Check whether the loading side is short-
circuit
1.
2.
Electronic Thermal
Relay 1/2 Protection
These two fault codes
will be displayed
1.
2.
Check whether the motor is overloaded.
Check whether motor rated current
setting (Pr.05-01) is suitable
Check electronic thermal relay function
Take the next higher power AC motor
drive model.
when output current
exceeds the level of
over-torque detection
(Pr.06-08 or Pr.06-
11) and it is set 2 or 4
in Pr.06-06 or Pr.06-
09.
3.
4.
Internal EEPROM
can not be
programmed.
1.
2.
Press “RESET” key to the factory setting
Return to the factory.
Internal EEPROM
can not be read.
Isum error
U-phase error
V-phase error
W-phase error
CC (current clamp)
OC hardware error
OV hardware error
GFF hardware error
1.
2.
Press “RESET” key to the factory setting
Return to the factory.
Re-power on to try it. If fault code is still
displayed on the keypad please return to the
factory
Re-power on to try it. If fault code is still
displayed on the keypad please return to the
factory
1.
2.
1.
2.
Check cabling between drive and motor
Retry again
Check the wiring of the PID feedback
Check the PID parameters settings
Auto tuning error
PID loss (ACI)
Check if Pr.10-01 is set to 0 when it is PG
feedback control
PG feedback error
PG feedback loss
PG feedback stall
Check the wiring of the PG feedback
1.
2.
Check the wiring of the PG feedback
Check if the setting of PI gain and
deceleration is suitable
PG slip error
3.
1.
2.
Return to the factory
Check the pulse wiring
Return to the factory
Pulse input error
Pulse input loss
1.
2.
1.
Check the ACI wiring
ACI loss
Check if the ACI signal is less than 4mA
Input EF (N.O.) on external terminal is
closed to GND. Output U, V, W will be
turned off.
External Fault
2.
Give RESET command after fault has
been cleared.
6-4
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|
Fault Name
Fault Descriptions
Corrective Actions
1.
When the multi-function input terminals
MI1 to MI6 are set to emergency stop,
the AC motor drive stops output U, V, W
and the motor coasts to stop.
Press RESET after fault has been
cleared.
Emergency stop
2.
1. When the external input terminal (B.B) is
active, the AC motor drive output will be
turned off.
2. Deactivate the external input terminal
(B.B) to operate the AC motor drive
again.
External Base Block
Keypad will be locked. Turn the power ON
Password is locked. after power OFF to re-enter the correct
password. See Pr.00-07 and 00-08.
Check if the function code is correct (function
code must be 03, 06, 10, 63)
Illegal function code
Illegal data address
Check if the communication address is correct
(00H to 254H)
Check if the data value exceeds max./min.
value
Illegal data value
Data is written to
Check if the communication address is correct
read-only address
Communication
time-out
COM1: exceeds
Pr.09-03 setting,
COM2: exceeds
Pr.09-07 setting
Keypad (KPV-CE01)
communication
time-out
COM1: exceeds
Pr.09-03 setting,
COM2: exceeds
Pr.09-07 setting
Check if the wiring for the communication is
correct
1.
2.
Check if the wiring for the
communication is correct
Check if there is any wrong with the
keypad
If the fault code is still displayed on the keypad
after pressing “RESET” key, please return to
the factory.
Brake resistor fault
Δ
-
1.
Check the wiring of the Y-connection/
connection
Δ
Y-connection/
-
connection switch
error
2.
Check the parameters settings
When Pr.07-13 is not
set to 0 and
momentary power off
or power cut, it will
display dEb during
accel./decel. stop.
1.
2.
Set Pr.07-13 to 0
Check if input power is stable
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|
Fault Name
Fault Descriptions
Corrective Actions
It will be displayed
when slip exceeds
Pr.05-26 setting and
time exceeds Pr.05-
27 setting.
1.
2.
Check if motor parameter is correct (please
decrease the load if overload
Check the settings of Pr.05-26 and Pr.05-
27
It will be displayed
when broken belt
detection function is
enabled(Pr.08-59),
allowance error is
higher than Pr.08-61
and detection time
exceeds Pr.08-62.
It will be displayed
when the allowance
error of tension PID
feedback exceeds
Pr.08-63 setting and
allowance error
1.
2.
Check if the belt is broken
Check the settings of Pr.08-60, Pr.08-62
and Pr.08-63
1.
2.
3.
Check if the PID feedback is correct
Check if the material is broken
Check the settings of Pr.08-63 and Pr.08-
64
detection time
exceeds Pr.08-64
setting.
6.1.2 Reset
There are three methods to reset the AC motor drive after solving the fault:
STOP
RESET
1.
2.
Press
key on KPV-CE01.
Set external terminal to “RESET” (set one of Pr.02-01~Pr.02-06/ Pr.02-23~Pr.02-30 to 5)
and then set to be ON.
3.
Send “RESET” command by communication.
NOTE
Make sure that RUN command or signal is OFF before executing RESET to prevent damage or
personal injury due to immediate operation.
6-6
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|
6.2 Maintenance and Inspections
Modern AC motor drives are based on solid state electronics technology. Preventive maintenance is
required to operate this AC motor drive in its optimal condition, and to ensure a long life. It is
recommended to have a check-up of the AC motor drive performed by a qualified technician.
Daily Inspection:
Basic check-up items to detect if there were any abnormalities during operation are:
1.
Whether the motors are operating as expected.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Whether the installation environment is abnormal.
Whether the cooling system is operating as expected.
Whether any irregular vibration or sound occurred during operation.
Whether the motors are overheating during operation.
Always check the input voltage of the AC drive with a Voltmeter.
Periodic Inspection:
Before the check-up, always turn off the AC input power and remove the cover. Wait at least 10
minutes after all display lamps have gone out, and then confirm that the capacitors have fully
discharged by measuring the voltage between +1/+2 and -. The voltage between +1/+2 and-should
be less than 25VDC.
DANGER!
1.
Disconnect AC power before processing!
2.
Only qualified personnel can install, wire and maintain AC motor drives. Please take off any
metal objects, such as watches and rings, before operation. And only insulated tools are
allowed.
3.
4.
Never reassemble internal components or wiring.
Prevent static electricity.
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|
Periodical Maintenance
„
Ambient environment
Maintenance
Period
Check Items
Methods and Criterion
Half One
Daily
Year Year
Check the ambient temperature,
humidity, vibration and see if
there are any dust, gas, oil or
water drops
Visual inspection and measurement
with equipment with standard
specification
{
{
If there are any dangerous
objects
Visual inspection
„
Voltage
Maintenance
Period
Check Items
Methods and Criterion
Half One
Year Year
Daily
Check if the voltage of main
circuit and control circuit is
correct
Measure with multimeter with standard
specification
{
„
Keypad
Maintenance
Period
Check Items
Methods and Criterion
Half One
Year Year
Daily
Is the display clear for reading
Any missing characters
Visual inspection
Visual inspection
{
{
„
Mechanical parts
Check Items
Maintenance
Period
Methods and Criterion
Half One
Daily
Year Year
If there is any abnormal sound
or vibration
Visual and aural inspection
Tighten the screws
{
If there are any loose screws
{
{
If any part is deformed or
damaged
Visual inspection
6-8
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|
Maintenance
Period
Check Items
Methods and Criterion
Half One
Year Year
Daily
If there is any color change by
overheating
Visual inspection
Visual inspection
{
{
If there is any dust or dirt
„
Main circuit
Maintenance
Period
Check Items
Methods and Criterion
Half One
Daily
Year Year
If there are any loose or missing
screws
Tighten or replace the screw
{
If machine or insulator is
deformed, cracked, damaged or
with color change due to
overheating or ageing
Visual inspection
NOTE: Please ignore the color
change of copper plate
{
{
If there is any dust or dirt
Terminals and wiring of main circuit
Check Items
Visual inspection
„
Maintenance
Period
Methods and Criterion
Half One
Year Year
Daily
If the terminal or the plate is
color change or deformation due Visual inspection
to overheat
{
If the insulator of wiring is
Visual inspection
{
{
damaged or color change
If there is any damage
Visual inspection
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|
„
DC capacity of main circuit
Maintenance
Period
Check Items
Methods and Criterion
Half One
Daily
Year Year
If there is any leak of liquid,
color change, crack or
deformation
Visual inspection
{
Measure static capacity when
required
Static capacity
initial value X 0.85
{
≥
„
Resistor of main circuit
Check Items
Maintenance
Period
Methods and Criterion
Half One
Year Year
Daily
If there is any peculiar smell or
insulator cracks due to overheat
Visual inspection, smell
{
Visual inspection or measure with
multimeter after removing wiring
between +1/+2 ~ -
If there is any disconnection
{
±
Resistor value should be within 10%
„
Transformer and reactor of main circuit
Check Items
Maintenance
Period
Methods and Criterion
Half One
Year Year
Daily
If there is any abnormal vibration
or peculiar smell
Visual, aural inspection and smell
{
„
Magnetic contactor and relay of main circuit
Maintenance
Period
Check Items
Methods and Criterion
Half One
Year Year
Daily
If there are any loose screws
If the contact works correctly
Visual and aural inspection
Visual inspection
{
{
6-10
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|
„
Printed circuit board and connector of main circuit
Maintenance
Period
Check Items
Methods and Criterion
Half One
Year Year
Daily
If there are any loose screws and
connectors
Tighten the screws and press the
connectors firmly in place.
{
{
{
{
If there is any peculiar smell and
color change
Visual inspection
Visual inspection
Visual inspection
If there is any crack, damage,
deformation or corrosion
If there is any liquid is leaked or
deformation in capacity
„
Cooling fan of cooling system
Check Items
Maintenance
Period
Methods and Criterion
Half One
Year Year
Daily
Visual, aural inspection and turn the
fan with hand (turn off the power
before operation) to see if it rotates
smoothly
If there is any abnormal sound or
vibration
{
If there is any loose screw
Tighten the screw
Change fan
{
{
If there is any color change due to
overheat
„
Ventilation channel of cooling system
Check Items
Maintenance
Period
Methods and Criterion
Half One
Year Year
Daily
If there is any obstruction in the
heat sink, air intake or air outlet
Visual inspection
{
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|
This page intentionally left blank
6-12
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A Specifications
Voltage Class
230V Class
Model Number VFD-XXXV
007 015 022 037 055 075 110 150 185 220 300 370
Max. Applicable Motor Output
(kW)
0.75 1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5 22
30
37
Max. Applicable Motor Output (hp) 1.0
2.0
2.7
3.0
4.2
5.0
6.5
7.5
9.5
10
13
15
19
20
25
25
29
30
34
40
46
50
55
1.9
Rated Output Capacity (kVA)
Rated Output Current for
Constant Torque (A)
Rated Output Current for
Variable Torque (A)
5.0
7.5
11
13
17
21
25
31
33
41
49
61
65
81
75
93
90
120 146
6.25 9.4
112 150 182
Maximum Output Voltage (V)
Output Frequency (Hz)
3-Phase Proportional to Input Voltage
0.00~600.00 Hz
9
Carrier Frequency (kHz)
15
9.9
6
106
6.4
15
21
25
33
3-phase
200-240V, 50/60Hz
52
63
68
13
79
13
126
Rated Input Current (A)
Rated Voltage/Frequency
Voltage Tolerance
10%(180~264 V)
±
5%(47~63 Hz)
±
Frequency Tolerance
Cooling Method
Weight (kg)
Natural
Fan Cooled
10 13
2.7
3.2
4.5
6.8
8
13
36
36
Voltage Class
460V Class
Model Number VFD-XXXV
007 015 022 037 055 075 110 150 185 220 300 370 450 550 750
Max. Applicable Motor Output
(kW)
0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75
Max. Applicable Motor Output
(hp)
1.0 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100
Rated Output Capacity (kVA) 2.3 3.2 4.2 6.3 9.9 14 18 24 29 34 46 56 69 80 100
Rated Output Current for
3.0 4.2 6.0 8.5 13 18 24 32 38 45 60 73 91 110 150
Constant Torque (A)
Rated Output Current for
3.8 5.3 7.5 10 16 22 30 40 47 56 75 91 113 138 188
Variable Torque (A)
Maximum Output Voltage (V)
Output Frequency (Hz)
3-phase Proportional to Input Voltage
0.00~600.00 Hz
9
Carrier Frequency (kHz)
15
6
3-phase 380~480V
Rated Input Current (A)
4.0 5.8 7.4 9.9 12 17 25 27 35 42 56 67 87 101 122
3-phase 380 to 480 V
Rated Voltage
Voltage Tolerance
Frequency Tolerance
Cooling Method
Weight (kg)
10%(342~528 V)
±
5%(47~63 Hz)
±
Natural
Fan Cooled
2.7 3.2 4.5 6.8
8
10 13 13 13 13 36 36 36 50 50
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
A-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A Specifications|
General Specifications
Control System
1 V/f curve; 2 V/f+PG; 3 SVC; 4 FOC+PG; 5 TQR+PG
Starting torque is 150% at 0.5Hz and 0Hz with FOC + PG control mode
1:100 Sensorless vector (up to 1:1000 when using PG card)
0.5% Sensorless vector (up to 0.02% when using PG card)
Start Torque
Speed Control Range
Speed Control Resolution
Speed Response Ability
Max. Output Frequency
Output Frequency Accuracy
±
±
5Hz (up to 30Hz for vector control)
0.00 to 600.00Hz
Digital command
0.005%, analog command
0.5%
±
±
Frequency Setting
Resolution
Digital command
0.01Hz, analog command: 1/4096(12-bit) of the max. output
±
frequency
Torque Limit
Max. is 200% torque current
5%
Torque Accuracy
Accel/Decel Time
V/f Curve
±
0.00 to 600.00/0.0 to 6000.0 seconds
Adjustable V/f curve using 4 independent points and square curve
10V, 4~20mA, pulse input
Frequency Setting Signal
Brake Torque
±
About 20%
Motor Protection
Over-current Protection
Electronic thermal relay protection
The current forces 220% of the over-current protection and 300% of the rated
current
Ground Leakage Current
Protection
Higher than 50% X rated current
Overload Ability
Constant torque: 150% for 60 seconds, variable torque: 200% for 3 seconds
Over-voltage level: Vdc > 400/800V; low-voltage level: Vdc < 200/400V
Over-voltage Protection
Over-voltage Protection for
the Input Power
Varistor (MOV)
Over-temperature Protection
Built-in temperature sensor
Compensation for the
Momentory Power Loss
Up to 5 seconds for parameter setting
Protection Level
NEMA 1/IP21
-10oC to 40oC
Operation Temperature
Storage Temperature
Ambient Humidity
Vibration
-20 oC to 60 oC
Below 90% RH (non-condensing)
9.80665m/s2 (1G) less than 20Hz, 5.88m/s2 (0.6G) at 20 to 50Hz
Installation Location
Approvals
Altitude 1,000 m or lower, keep from corrosive gasses, liquid and dust
A-2
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories
B.1 All Brake Resistors & Brake Units Used in AC Motor Drives
Note: Please only use DELTA resistors and recommended values. Other resistors and values will
void Delta’s warranty. Please contact your nearest Delta representative for use of special resistors.
For instance, in 460V series, 100hp/75kW, the AC motor drive needs 2 brake units with total of 16
brake resistors, so each brake unit uses 8 brake resistors. The brake unit should be at least 10 cm
away from AC motor drive to avoid possible interference. Refer to the “Brake Unit Module User
Manual” for further details.
Applicable
Motor
Resistor value Brake Unit
spec for each Model VFDB
Min. Equivalent
Resistor Value for
each AC Motor
Drive
Full Load
Torque
Nm
Brake Resistors Brake
Model and No. of Torque
AC Motor
Drive
No. of Units
Used
Units Used
10%ED
hp kW
80W 200Ω
82Ω
1
2
0.75
1.5
0.427
0.849
BR080W200
BR300W100
1
1
125
125
300W 100Ω
300W 100Ω
82Ω
82Ω
3
5
2.2
3.7
1.262
BR300W100
1
125
400W 40Ω
500W 30Ω
1000W 20Ω
2400W 13.6Ω 2015
3000W 10Ω 2015
33Ω
30Ω
20Ω
13.6Ω
10Ω
8Ω
2.080
3.111
4.148
6.186
8.248
BR400W040
BR500W030
BR1K0W020
BR1K2W6P8
BR1K5W005
BR1K2W008
BR1K2W6P8
BR1K5W005
BR1K2W008
BR080W750
BR300W400
BR300W250
BR400W150
BR500W100
BR1K0W075
BR1K0W050
BR1K5W040
BR1K2W008
BR1K2W6P8
BR1K5W005
BR1K2W008
BR1K2W6P8
BR1K5W005
1
1
1
2
2
4
4
4
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
4
8
8
8
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
7.5 5.5
10
15
20
7.5
11
15
1
1
1
1
2
2
4800W 8Ω
4800W 6.8Ω 2022
2022
25 18.5 10.281
6.8Ω
5Ω
30
40
50
1
22
30
12.338
16.497
20.6
6000W 5Ω
9600W 4Ω
80W 750Ω
300W 400Ω
300W 250Ω
400W 150Ω
500W 100Ω
1000W 75Ω
1000W 50Ω 4030
1500W 40Ω 4030
4800W 32Ω 4030
4800W 27.2Ω 4030
6000W 20Ω 4030
9600W 16Ω 4045
9600W 13.6Ω 4045
12000W 10Ω 4030
19200W 6.8Ω 4045
2015
2015
4Ω
37
160Ω
160Ω
160Ω
130Ω
91Ω
62Ω
39Ω
40Ω
32Ω
27.2Ω
20Ω
16Ω
13.6Ω
10Ω
6.8Ω
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
0.427
0.849
1.262
2.080
3.111
4.148
6.186
8.248
2
3
5
7.5 5.5
10
15
20
7.5
11
15
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
25 18.5 10.281
30
40
50
60
75
22
30
37
45
55
12.338
16.497
20.6
24.745
31.11
42.7
100 75
BR1K2W6P8 16
NOTE
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
B-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
1.
2.
Please select the factory setting resistance value (Watt) and the duty-cycle value (ED%).
If damage to the drive or other equipment are due to the fact that the brake resistors and the
brake modules in use are not provided by Delta, the warranty will be void.
Take into consideration the safety of the environment when installing the brake resistors.
If the minimum resistance value is to be utilized, consult local dealers for the calculation of the
Watt figures.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Please select thermal relay trip contact to prevent resistor over load. Use the contact to switch
power off to the AC motor drive!
When using more than 2 brake units, equivalent resistor value of parallel brake unit can’t be
less than the value in the column “Minimum Equivalent Resistor Value for Each AC Drive” (the
right-most column in the table). An example of 575V 100HP, the min. equivalent resistor value
for each AC motor drive is 12.5Ω with 2 brake units connection. Therefore, the equivalent
resistor value for each brake unit should be 25Ω.
7.
8.
Please read the wiring information in the user manual of brake unit thoroughly prior to taking
into operation.
Definition for Brake Usage ED%
Explanation: The definition of the barke usage ED(%) is for assurance of enough time for the
brake unit and brake resistor to dissipate away heat generated by braking. When the brake
resistor heats up, the resistance would increase with temperature, and brake torque would
decrease accordingly. Suggested cycle time is one minute
100%
T1
ED% = T1/T0x100(%)
Brake Time
T0
Cycle Time
9.
For safety consideration, install an overload relay between the brake unit and the brake resistor.
In conjunction with the magnetic contactor (MC) prior to the drive, it can perform complete
protection against abnormality. The purpose of installing the thermal overload relay is to protect
the brake resistor from damage due to frequent brake, or due to brake unit keeping operating
resulted from unusual high input voltage. Under such circumstance, just turn off the power to
prevent damaging the brake resistor.
B-2
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
NFB
MC
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
IM
MOTOR
Thermal Overload
Relay
VFD Series
O.L.
Thermal
Overload
Relay or
temperature
switch
B1
+(P)
+(P)
-(N)
MC
SA
Surge
Absorber
O.L.
-(N)
Brake
Resistor
BR
Brake
Unit
B2
Temperature
Switch
Note1: When using the AC drive with DC reactor, please refer to wiring diagram in the AC drive
user manual for the wiring of terminal +(P) of Brake unit.
Note2: Do NOT wire terminal -(N) to the neutral point of power system.
10. For model VFD110V43B, the brake unit is built-in. To increase the brake function, it can add
optional brake unit.
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
B-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
B.1.1 Dimensions and Weights for Brake Resistors
(Dimensions are in millimeter)
Order P/N: BR080W200, BR080W750, BR300W070, BR300W100, BR300W250, BR300W400,
BR400W150, BR400W040
Model no.
L1
L2
H
D
W
Max. Weight (g)
160
BR080W200
BR080W750
BR300W070
BR300W100
BR300W250
BR300W400
BR400W150
BR400W040
140
125
20
5.3
60
215
265
200
250
30
30
5.3
5.3
60
60
750
930
B-4
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
Order P/N: BR500W030, BR500W100, BR1KW020, BR1KW075
Max. Weight
Model no.
L1
L2
H
D
W
60
(g)
BR500W030
BR500W100
BR1KW020
BR1KW075
335
400
320
385
30
50
5.3
5.3
1100
100
2800
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
B-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
Order P/N: BR1K0W050, BR1K2W008, BR1K2W6P8, BR1K5W005, BR1K5W040
B.1.2 Specifications for Brake Unit
230V Series
460V Series
4045
2015
2022
22
4030
30
4132
132
Max. Motor Power (kW)
Max. Peak Discharge Current
(A) 10%ED
Continuous Discharge Current
(A)
15
45
40
60
20
40
15
60
18
240
75
15
618/642/66
7/690/725/
750±6V
330/345/360/380/400/ 660/690/720/760/800/83
Brake Start-up Voltage (DC)
415±3V
0±6V
DC Voltage
200~400VDC
400~800VDC
Temperature over +95°C (203 oF)
Heat Sink Overheat
Alarm Output
Relay contact 5A 120VAC/28VDC (RA, RB, RC)
Blackout until bus (+~-) voltage is below 50VDC
Power Charge Display
Installation Location
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Humidity
Indoor (no corrosive gases, metallic dust)
-10°C ∼ +50°C (14oF to 122oF)
-20°C ∼ +60°C (-4oF to 140oF)
90% Non-condensing
9.8m/s2 (1G) under 20Hz
Vibration
2m/s2 (0.2G) at 20~50Hz
Wall-mounted Enclosed Type
IP50
IP10
B-6
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
B.1.3 Dimensions for Brake Unit
(Dimensions are in millimeter[inch])
Figure 1: VFDB2015, VFDB2022, VFDB4030, VFDB4045
121.0 [4.76]
130.0 [5.12]
80.0 [3.15]
R3.3 [R0.13]
CHARGE
GREEN
ACT.
YELLOW
ERR.
RED
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
B-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
Figure 2: VFDB4132
CHARGE ACT
OC
OH
VFDB4132
B-8
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
B.2 No-fuse Circuit Breaker Chart
For 3-phase drives, the current rating of the breaker shall be within 2-4 times maximum input current
rating.
(Refer to Appendix A for rated input current)
3-phase
Recommended no-fuse
breaker (A)
Recommended no-fuse
breaker (A)
Model
Model
VFD007V23A-2
VFD007V43A-2
VFD015V23A-2
VFD015V43A-2
VFD022V23A-2
VFD022V43A-2
VFD037V23A-2
VFD037V43A-2
VFD055V23A-2
VFD055V43A-2
VFD075V23A-2
VFD075V43A-2
VFD110V23A-2
VFD110V43A-2
10
5
VFD110V43B-2
VFD150V23A-2
VFD150V43A-2
VFD185V23A-2
VFD185V43A-2
VFD220V23A-2
VFD220V43A-2
VFD300V23A-2
VFD300V43A-2
VFD370V23A-2
VFD370V43A-2
VFD450V43A-2
VFD550V43C-2
VFD750V43C-2
50
125
60
15
10
30
15
40
20
50
30
60
40
100
50
150
75
175
100
225
125
250
150
175
250
300
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
B-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
B.3 Fuse Specification Chart
Smaller fuses than those shown in the table are permitted.
Line Fuse
Bussmann P/N
I (A)
I (A)
Model
Input
Output
I (A)
10
VFD007V23A-2
VFD007V43A-2
VFD015V23A-2
VFD015V43A-2
VFD022V23A-2
VFD022V43A-2
VFD037V23A-2
VFD037V43A-2
VFD055V23A-2
VFD055V43A-2
VFD075V23A-2
VFD075V43A-2
VFD110V23A-2
VFD110V43A-2
VFD110V43B-2
VFD150V23A-2
VFD150V43A-2
VFD185V23A-2
VFD185V43A-2
VFD220V23A-2
VFD220V43A-2
VFD300V23A-2
VFD300V43A-2
VFD370V23A-2
VFD370V43A-2
VFD450V43A-2
VFD550V43C-2
VFD750V43C-2
5.7
3.2
7.6
4.3
15.5
5.9
20.6
11.2
26
5.0
2.7
7.0
4.2
11
JJN-10
JJN-6
5
15
JJN-15
JJN-10
JJN-30
JJN-15
JJN-40
JJN-20
JJN-50
JJN-30
JJN-60
JJN-40
JJN-100
JJN-50
JJN-50
JJN-125
JJN-60
JJN-150
JJN-70
JJN-175
JJN-100
JJN-225
JJN-125
JJN-250
JJN-150
JJN-175
JJN-250
JJN-300
10
30
5.5
17
15
40
8.5
25
20
50
14
13
30
34
33
60
19
18
40
50
49
100
50
25
24
25
24
50
60
65
125
60
32
32
75
75
150
75
39
38
90
90
175
100
225
125
250
150
175
250
300
49
45
110
60
120
60
142
63
145
73
90
91
130
160
110
150
B-10
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
B.4 AC Reactor
B.4.1 AC Input Reactor Recommended Value
460V, 50/60Hz, 3-Phase
Max.
continuous
Amps
Inductance (mH)
Fundamental
kW
HP
Amps
3% impedance
5% impedance
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
1
2
4
4
6
9
12
9
6
6.5
5
3
8
12
7.5
5
5
8
12
3
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
12
18
25
35
35
45
55
80
80
100
130
18
2.5
1.5
1.2
0.8
0.8
0.7
0.5
0.4
0.4
0.3
0.2
4.2
2.5
2
27
37.5
52.5
52.5
67.5
82.5
120
120
150
195
15
1.2
1.2
1.2
0.85
0.7
0.7
0.45
0.3
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
B.4.2 AC Output Reactor Recommended Value
230V, 50/60Hz, 3-Phase
Max.
continuous
Amps
Inductance (mH)
Fundamental
kW
HP
Amps
3% impedance
5% impedance
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
1
2
8
12
12
3
5
8
1.5
1.25
0.8
0.5
0.4
0.25
0.2
3
3
12
18
25
35
55
80
18
2.5
1.5
1.2
0.8
0.5
0.4
5
27
7.5
10
15
20
37.5
52.5
82.5
120
15
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
B-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
Max.
continuous
Amps
Inductance (mH)
Fundamental
Amps
kW
HP
3% impedance
5% impedance
18.5
22
25
30
40
50
80
120
150
195
240
0.2
0.15
0.1
0.4
0.3
100
130
160
30
0.2
37
0.075
0.15
460V, 50/60Hz, 3-Phase
Max.
continuous
Amps
Inductance (mH)
Fundamental
Amps
kW
HP
3% impedance
5% impedance
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
1
2
4
4
6
9
6.5
5
12
9
6
3
8
12
7.5
4.2
2.5
2.5
2
5
12
18
18
25
35
45
45
80
80
100
130
160
18
2.5
1.5
1.5
1.2
0.8
0.7
0.7
0.4
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.15
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
27
27
37.5
52.5
67.5
67.5
120
120
150
195
240
15
1.2
1.2
1.2
0.7
0.7
0.45
0.3
0.23
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
B-12
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
B.4.3 Applications for AC Reactor
Connected in input circuit
Application 1
Question
When more than one AC motor drive is
When applying to one of the AC motor drive,
connected to the same power, one of them is the charge current of capacity may cause
ON during operation.
voltage ripple. The AC motor drive may
damage when over current occurs during
operation.
Correct wiring
reactor
M1
M2
motor
motor
AC motor drive
AC motor drive
Mn
motor
AC motor drive
Application 2
Question
Silicon rectifier and AC motor drive is
connected to the same power.
Surges will be generated at the instant of
silicon rectifier switching on/off. These surges
may damage the mains circuit.
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
B-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
Correct wiring
silicon rectifier
power
reactor
DC
AC motor drive
reactor
motor
Application 3
Question
Used to improve the input power factor, to
reduce harmonics and provide protection
When power capacity is too large, line
impedance will be small and the charge
from AC line disturbances. (surges, switching current will be too large. That may damage
spikes, short interruptions, etc.). AC line
reactor should be installed when the power
supply capacity is 500kVA or more and
exceeds 6 times the inverter capacity, or the
AC motor drive due to higher rectifier
temperature.
mains wiring distance 10m.
≤
Correct wiring
small-capacity
AC motor drive
large-capacity
power
reactor
motor
B-14
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
B.5 Zero Phase Reactor (RF220X00A)
Dimensions are in millimeter and (inch)
Recommended Wire
Cable
Size
Diagram B
Please put all wires through 4 cores in
series without winding.
Wiring
Method
type
Qty.
Nominal
(mm2)
(Note)
AWG mm2
Diagram
A
≦10 ≦5.3 ≦5.5
≦2 ≦33.6 ≦38
≦12 ≦3.3 ≦3.5
≦1 ≦42.4 ≦50
1
4
1
4
Zero Phase Reactor
Single-
core
R/L1 U/T1
S/L2 V/T2
Power
Supply
Diagram
B
MOTOR
T/L3
W/T3
Diagram
A
Three-
core
Note 1: The table above gives approximate
wire size for the zero phase reactors but the
selection is ultimately governed by the type
and diameter of cable fitted i.e. the cable
must fit through the center hole of zero
phase reactors.
Diagram
B
Note: 600V Insulated unshielded Cable.
Diagram A
Please wind each wire 4 times around the
core. The reactor must be put at inverter
output as close as possible.
Note 2: Only the phase conductors should
pass through, not the earth core or screen.
Note 3: When long motor output cables are
used an output zero phase reactor may be
required to reduce radiated emissions from
the cable.
Zero Phase Reactor
R/L1 U/T1
Power
S/L2 V/T2
MOTOR
Supply
T/L3
W/T3
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
B-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
B.6 DC Choke Recommended Values
230V DC Choke
Input voltage
kW
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
HP
1
DC Amps Inductance (mh)
9
12
18
25
32
40
62
92
110
125
--
7.50
4.00
2
3
2.75
5
1.75
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
0.85
230Vac
50/60Hz
3-Phase
0.75
Built-in
Built-in
Built-in
Built-in
Built-in
Built-in
15
18.5
22
30
37
--
460V DC Choke
Input voltage
kW
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
HP
1
DC Amps Inductance (mh)
4
9
25.00
11.50
11.50
6.00
2
3
9
5
12
18
25
32
50
62
80
92
110
125
200
240
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
3.75
4.00
Built-in
Built-in
Built-in
Built-in
Built-in
Built-in
Built-in
Built-in
Built-in
460Vac
50/60Hz
3-Phase
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
B-16
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
B.7 Remote Controller RC-01
Dimensions are in millimeter
RC-01 terminal block
Wiring connections
5
8
6
4
16 15 14 13 11
VFD-VE
I/O Block
+10V
MI5
FWDREV JOG
AFMACM AVI
DCM
VFD-VE Programming:
Pr.00-20 set to 2
Pr.00-21 set to 1 (external controls)
Pr.02-00 set to 1 (setting Run/Stop and Fwd/Rev controls)
Pr.02-05 (MI5) set to 5 (External reset)
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
B-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
B.8 PG Card (for Encoder)
B.8.1 EMV-PG01X
AB2:
PG2 signal
mode switch
ABZ1:
PG1 signal
mode switch
PS1:
5/12V switch
PG1
Pulse feedback
PG2
Pulse input
1. Terminals descriptions
Terminal Symbols
VP
Descriptions
Power source of EMV-PG01X (use PS1 to switch 12V/5V)
Output Voltage: +5V/+12V±5% 200mA
DCM
Power source and input signal common
A1, A1
B1, B1
Z1, Z1
Input signal. Input type is selected by ABZ1. It can be 1-phase or 2-
phase input. Maximum 300kP/sec
Input signal. Input type is selected by AB2. It can be 1-phase or 2-
phase input. Maximum 300kP/sec
A2, A2
B2, B2
Grounding
2. Wiring Notes
a.
Please use a shielded cable to prevent interference. Do not run control wires
parallel to any high voltage AC power line (200 V and above).
Recommended wire size 0.21 to 0.81mm2 (AWG24 to AWG18).
b.
3. Wire length (wire length and signal frequency are in inverse proportion)
B-18
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
Types of Pulse
Generators
Maximum Wire Length
50m
Wire Gauge
Output Voltage
Open Collector
Line Driver
50m
300m
70m
1.25mm2 (AWG16) or above
Complementary
4. Basic Wiring Diagram
wiring 1
jumper
Braking resistor (optional)
Non-fuse breaker
+2/B1
-
+1
B2
NFB
R
U
R/L1
U/T1
MMotor
3~
V
V/T2
S
T
S/L2
T/L3
W
W/T3
+24V
FWD
REV
MI1
FWD/STOP
REV/STOP
Multi-step 1
Factory
VP
DCM
A1
A1
B1
B1
Z1
Z1
Multi-step 2
setting
MI2
Multi-step 3
Multi-step 4
No function
No function
MI3
MI4
PG
MI5
Line driver
MI6
Digital Signal Common
DCM
incremental encoder
VP
A2
A2
B2
B2
manual pulse generator
(MPG)
10-17
10-18
DCM
Line driver
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
B-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
wiring 2
jumper
Braking resistor (optional)
U
Non-fuse breaker
NFB
+2/B1
-
+1
B2
R/L1
R
S
T
U/T1
V/T2
MMotor
3~
V
S/L2
W
W/T3
T/L3
+24V
FWD
REV
MI1
FWD/STOP
REV/STOP
Multi-step 1
Factory
setting
VP
DCM
A1
A1
B1
B1
Z1
Z1
Multi-step 2
Multi-step 3
Multi-step 4
No function
No function
MI2
MI3
MI4
PG
MI5
MI6
Line driver
Digital Signal Common
DCM
incremental encoder
phase difference is 90o
5. Types of Pulse Generators (Encoders)
ABZ1+ PS1
AB2+PS1
Types of Pulse Generators
5V
12V
5V
12V
VOLTAGE
VCC
12V
5V
12V
5V
12V
5V
12V
5V
OC
OC
TP
OC
OC
O/P
0V
TP
TP
TP
Open collector
VCC
12V
5V
12V
5V
12V
5V
12V
5V
OC
TP
OC
TP
OC
TP
OC
TP
O/P
0V
B-20
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
ABZ1+ PS1
AB2+PS1
Types of Pulse Generators
5V
12V
5V
12V
Line driver
12V
5V
12V
5V
12V
5V
12V
5V
OC
OC
OC
TP
OC
Q
TP
TP
TP
Q
Complementary
VCC
12V
5V
12V
5V
12V
5V
12V
5V
OC
TP
OC
TP
OC
TP
OC
TP
O/P
0V
B.8.2 EMV-PG01O
PG OUT
Pulse output
AB2: PG2 signal
mode switch
PS1:
5/12V switch
ABZ1: PG1 signal
mode switch
PG2
Pulse input
PG1
Pulse feedback
1. Terminals descriptions
Terminal
Symbols
Descriptions
Power source of EMV-PG01O (use PS1 to switch 12V/5V)
VP
Output Voltage: +5V/+12V±5% 200mA
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
B-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
Terminal
Symbols
Descriptions
DCM
Power source and input signal common
A1, A1
B1, B1
Z1, Z1
Input signal from encoder. Input type is selected by ABZ1. It can be
1-phase or 2-phase input. Maximum 300kP/sec
Input signal from encoder. Input type is selected by AB2. It can be 1-
phase or 2-phase input. Maximum 300kP/sec
A2, A2
B2, B2
Output signal. It has division frequency function (Pr.10-16), open
collector: max. output DC20V 50mA
A/O, B/O, Z/O
Grounding
2. Wiring Notes
a.
Please use a shielded cable to prevent interference. Do not run control wires
parallel to any high voltage AC power line (200 V and above).
Recommended wire size 0.21 to 0.81mm2 (AWG24 to AWG18).
b.
3. Wire length: (wire length and signal frequency are in inverse proportion)
Types of Pulse
Generators
Maximum Wire Length
50m
Wire Gauge
Output Voltage
Open Collector
Line Driver
50m
300m
70m
1.25mm2 (AWG16) or above
Complementary
4. Basic Wiring Diagram
B-22
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
wiring 1
jumpe r
Bra ke re sisto r (o ptio na l)
No -fuse bre ake r
NFB
+2/B1
-
+1
R/L1
B2
U
V
R
S
T
U/T1
Motor
M
3~
V/T2
W/T3
S/L2
W
T/L3
+24V
FWD
REV
MI1
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
FWD/STOP
REV/STOP
Multi-step 1
Multi-step 2
Multi-step 3
Multi-step 4
No function
No function
Factory
setting
VP
DC M
A1
A1
B1
B1
Z1
Z1
PG
Li ne dri ver
Digital Signal Common
DCM
incremental encoder
manual pulsegenerator
(MPG)
VP
A2
A2
B2
B2
VP
DC M
A/O
B/O
Z/O
10-17
10-18
DC M
Li ne dri ver
EMV-PG01O
wiring 2
jumper
Bra ke re sisto r (o ptio na l)
No -fuse bre ake r
NFB
+2/B1
-
+1
R/L1
B2
U
V
R
S
T
U/T1
Motor
M
3~
V/T2
W/T3
S/L2
W
T/L3
+24V
FWD
REV
MI1
FWD/STOP
REV/STOP
Multi-step 1
Factory
setting
VP
DC M
A1
A1
B1
B1
Z1
Z1
Multi-step 2
Multi-step 3
Multi-step 4
No function
No function
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
PG
Line driver
MI6
Digital Signal Common
DCM
EH -P LC
incremental encoder
A2
A2
B2
B2
Y0
Y0
VP
DC M
A/O
B/O
Z/O
Y0
Y0
Y1
Y1
Y1
Y1
DC M
CO M
phase difference is 90o
EMV-PG01O
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
B-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
5. Types of Pulse Generators (Encoders)
ABZ1+PS1
12V
AB2+PS1
Types of Pulse Generators
5V
5V
12V
VOLTAGE
VCC
12V
5V
12V
5V
12V
5V
12V
5V
OC
OC
OC
OC
O/P
0V
TP
TP
TP
TP
Open collector
VCC
12V
5V
12V
5V
12V
5V
12V
5V
OC
TP
OC
TP
OC
TP
OC
TP
O/P
0V
Line driver
12V
5V
12V
5V
12V
5V
12V
5V
OC
TP
OC
TP
OC
TP
OC
TP
Q
Q
Complementary
VCC
12V
5V
12V
5V
12V
5V
12V
5V
OC
TP
OC
TP
OC
TP
OC
TP
O/P
0V
B-24
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
B.8.3 EMV-PG01L
PG OUT
pulse output
AB2: PG2 signal
mode switch
ABZ1: PG1 signal
mode switch
PG1
PG2
pulse feedback
pulse input
1. Terminals descriptions
Terminal
Symbols
Descriptions
Power source of EMV-PG01L
VP
Output Voltage: +5V±5% 200mA
DCM
Power source and input signal common
A1, A1
B1, B1
Z1, Z1
Input signal. Input type is selected by ABZ1. It can be 1-phase or 2-
phase input. Maximum 300kP/sec
Input signal. Input type is selected by AB2. It can be 1-phase or 2-
phase input. Maximum 300kP/sec
A2, A2
B2, B2
Output signal. It has division frequency function (Pr.10-16), Line
driver: max. output DC5V 50mA
A/O, B/O, Z/O
Grounding
2. Wiring Notes
a.
Please use a shielded cable to prevent interference. Do not run control wires
parallel to any high voltage AC power line (200 V and above).
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
B-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
b.
Recommended wire size 0.21 to 0.81mm2 (AWG24 to AWG18).
3. Wire length: (wire length and signal frequency are in inverse proportion)
Types of Pulse
Generators
Maximum Wire Length
50m
Wire Gauge
Output Voltage
Open Collector
Line Driver
50m
300m
70m
1.25mm2 (AWG16) or above
Complementary
4. Basic Wiring Diagram
wiring 1
jumper
Braking resistor (optional)
Non-fuse breaker
+2/B1
-
+1
B2
NFB
R
U
R/L1
U/T1
MMotor
3~
V
V/T2
S
T
S/L2
W
W/T3
T/L3
+24V
FWD
REV
MI1
FWD/STOP
REV/STOP
Multi-step 1
Factory
VP
DCM
A1
A1
B1
B1
Z1
Z1
Multi-step 2
setting
MI2
Multi-step 3
MI3
Multi-step 4
MI4
PG
No function
No function
MI5
Line driver
MI6
Digital Signal Common
DCM
incremental encoder
VP
A2
A2
B2
B2
AO
AO
BO
BO
ZO
ZO
manual pulse generator
(MPG)
10-17
10-18
DCM
Line driver
B-26
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
wiring 2
jumper
Braking resistor (optional)
Non-fuse breaker
NFB
+2/B1
-
+1
B2
U
V
R/L1
R
S
T
U/T1
MMotor
3~
S/L2
V/T2
W
T/L3
W/T3
+24V
FWD
REV
MI1
FWD/STOP
REV/STOP
Multi-step 1
Factory
setting
VP
DCM
A1
A1
B1
B1
Z1
Z1
Multi-step 2
Multi-step 3
Multi-step 4
No function
No function
MI2
MI3
MI4
PG
MI5
MI6
Line driver
Digital Signal Common
DCM
incremental encoder
AO
AO
BO
BO
ZO
ZO
phase difference is 90o
5. Types of Pulse Generators (Encoders)
ABZ1
AB2
5V
Types of Pulse Generators
5V
VOLTAGE
VCC
OC
TP
OC
TP
O/P
0V
Open collector
VCC
OC
TP
OC
TP
O/P
0V
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
B-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
ABZ1
5V
AB2
5V
Types of Pulse Generators
Line driver
OC
TP
OC
TP
Q
Q
Complementary
VCC
OC
TP
OC
TP
O/P
0V
B-28
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
B.9 AMD-EMI Filter Cross Reference
AC Drives
Model Number
FootPrint
VFD007V43A-2, VFD015V43A-2, VFD022V43A-2
VFD037V43A-2
RF022B43AA
RF037B43BA
Y
Y
VFD055V43A-2, VFD075V43A-2, VFD110V43A-2,
VFD110V43B-2
RF110B43CA
Y
VFD007V23A-2, VFD015V23A-2
VFD022V23A-2, VFD037V23A-2
10TDT1W4C
26TDT1W4C
N
N
VFD055V23A-2, VFD075V23A-2, VFD150V43A-2,
VFD185V43A-2
50TDS4W4C
100TDS84C
200TDDS84C
N
N
N
VFD110V23A-2, VFD150V23A-2, VFD220V43A-2,
VFD300V43A-2, VFD370V43A-2
VFD550V43A-2, VFD750V43A-2, VFD550V43C-2,
VFD750V43C-2
VFD185V23A-2, VFD220V23A-2, VFD300V23A-2,
VFD450V43A-2
150TDS84C
180TDS84C
N
N
VFD370V23A-2
Installation
All electrical equipment, including AC motor drives, will generate high-frequency/low-frequency noise
and will interfere with peripheral equipment by radiation or conduction when in operation. By using an
EMI filter with correct installation, much interference can be eliminated. It is recommended to use
DELTA EMI filter to have the best interference elimination performance.
We assure that it can comply with following rules when AC motor drive and EMI filter are installed
and wired according to user manual:
„
EN61000-6-4
„
„
EN61800-3: 1996 + A11: 2000
EN55011 (1991) Class A Group 1 (1st Environment, restricted distribution)
General precaution
1.
2.
EMI filter and AC motor drive should be installed on the same metal plate.
Please install AC motor drive on footprint EMI filter or install EMI filter as close as possible to
the AC motor drive.
3.
4.
Please wire as short as possible.
Metal plate should be grounded.
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
B-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
5.
The cover of EMI filter and AC motor drive or grounding should be fixed on the metal plate and
the contact area should be as large as possible.
Choose suitable motor cable and precautions
Improper installation and choice of motor cable will affect the performance of EMI filter. Be sure to
observe the following precautions when selecting motor cable.
1.
Use the cable with shielding (double shielding is the best).
2.
The shielding on both ends of the motor cable should be grounded with the minimum length
and maximum contact area.
3.
Remove any paint on metal saddle for good ground contact with the plate and shielding.
Remove any paint on metal saddle for good ground contact with
the plate and shielding.
saddle
the plate with grounding
Saddle on both ends
Saddle on one end
B-30
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
The length of motor cable
When motor is driven by an AC motor drive of PWM type, the motor terminals will experience surge
voltages easily due to components conversion of AC motor drive and cable capacitance. When the
motor cable is very long (especially for the 460V series), surge voltages may reduce insulation
quality. To prevent this situation, please follow the rules below:
„
„
„
Use a motor with enhanced insulation.
Connect an output reactor (optional) to the output terminals of the AC motor drive
The length of the cable between AC motor drive and motor should be as short as possible
(10 to 20 m or less)
„
For models 7.5hp/5.5kW and above:
Insulation level of motor
460VAC input voltage
230VAC input voltage
1000V
1300V
1600V
66 ft (20m)
328 ft (100m)
1312 ft (400m)
1312 ft (400m) 1312 ft (400m) 1312 ft (400m)
„
For models 5hp/3.7kW and less:
Insulation level of motor
460VAC input voltage
230VAC input voltage
1000V
1300V
1600V
66 ft (20m)
165 ft (50m)
328 ft (100m)
165 ft (50m)
328 ft (100m)
328 ft (100m)
NOTE
When a thermal O/L relay protected by motor is used between AC motor drive and motor, it may
malfunction (especially for 460V series), even if the length of motor cable is only 165 ft (50m) or less.
To prevent it, please use AC reactor and/or lower the carrier frequency (Pr. 00-17 PWM carrier
frequency).
NOTE
Never connect phase lead capacitors or surge absorbers to the output terminals of the AC motor
drive.
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
B-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
„
If the length is too long, the stray capacitance between cables will increase and may
cause leakage current. It will activate the protection of over current, increase leakage
current or not insure the correction of current display. The worst case is that AC motor
drive may damage.
„
If more than one motor is connected to the AC motor drive, the total wiring length is the
sum of the wiring length from AC motor drive to each motor.
B-32
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
B.9.1 Dimensions
Dimensions are in millimeter and (inch)
Order P/N: RF015B21AA / RF022B43AA
118
50
(1.97)
28
90
(1.1)
(3.54)
226 239
226
(8.9) (9.4)
(8.9)
16
(0.63)
24
(0.94)
5.5
(3.37)
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
B-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
Order P/N: RF022B21BA / RF037B43BA
60
30
150
110
315
302
302
15
30
5.5
B-34
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
Order P/N: RF110B43CA
60
33
200
120
382
382
398
20
26
7.0
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
B-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
Order P/N: 10TDT1W4C
Order P/N: 26TDT1W4C
B-36
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
Order P/N: 50TDS4W4C
Order P/N: 100TDS84C
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
B-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
Order P/N: 200TDDS84C
Order P/N: 150TDS84C
B-38
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
Order P/N: 180TDS84C
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
B-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
B.10 Multi-function I/O Extension Card
B.10.1 Functions
EMV-APP01 optional multi-function I/O extension card is exclusively designed for VFD-VE
series and used with firmware version 2.04 and above. It communicates with the AC motor
drive by RS-485 communication port (COM1). To make sure that the communication is
normal, it needs to set the COM1 communication protocol to RTU mode (8, N, 1), i.e. set
Pr.09-04 to 12 no matter what the baud rate switch is set.
Communication
High/Low baud rate switch
indicator
Power indicator
RS485 port
Multi-function
input terminals
Multi-function
output terminals
Analog signal common
Output power
Multi-function
output common terminal
Analog output
terminals
NOTE
Please operate by the following steps for switching the high/low baud rate,
1. make sure that RS-485 cable is disconnected before operation
2. switch the high/low baud rate
3. set Pr.09-01 to the corresponding baud rate to finish setting
If the RS-485 cable is connected before changing the high/low baud rate, the
communication function will still be invalid even if the communication baud rate (Pr.09-01) is
changed to the corresponding baud rate and the ERROR indicator is normal.
Terminals
Description
Power indicator. It will be ON when EMV-APP01 connects to the AC motor drive
correctly.
POWER
ERROR
ERROR indicator. It will be ON when EMV-APP01 can communicate with the AC
motor drive or it will blink.
Baud rate switch for extension card:
HIGH/LOW HIGH: set the baud rate to 115200
LOW: set the baud rate to 9600
B-40
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
Terminals
Description
5V
Output power 500mA Max
GND
Analog signal common terminal
NOTE
This GND terminal is only used for 5V terminal on EMV-APP01. Please do NOT
confuse with DCM terminal.
SO1-MCM Multi-function analog voltage output terminal 0~10.0V (output current: 2mA Max.)
SO2-MCM Analog output is set by Pr.03-21 and Pr.03-24.
MI7~MIB Multi-function input terminals
Please refer to Pr.02-23 to Pr.02-27 for MI7-GND~MIB-GND function selection. Take
terminals MI7-GND for example, ON: the activation current is 6.5mA and OFF:
leakage current tolerance is 10μA.
MO3~MOA Multi-function output terminals (photocoupler)
The AC motor drive outputs each monitor signal, such as during operation, frequency
attained and overload, by transistor with open collector. Please refer to Pr.03-35 to
Pr.03-42 for details.
Max: 48Vdc/50mA
MO3~M OA-MCM
MO3
~
MOA
MCM
internal circuit
MCM
Multi-function output common terminal. Max: 48Vdc/50mA
NOTE
This MCM terminal is only used with MO3~MOA on EMV-APP01. Please do NOT
confuse with terminal MCM.
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
B-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
B.10.2 Dimensions
B.10.3 Wiring
Analog signal common
Output power
refer to Pr.02-35 to Pr.02-42
refer to Pr.03-21 to Pr.03-24
refer to Pr.02-23 to Pr.02-27
When wiring, please refer to the multi-function input/output function in parameters group 02
and group 03 of chapter 4 parameters to set by your applications.
B-42
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
This page intentionally left blank
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
B-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive
The choice of the right AC motor drive for the application is very important and has great influence
on its lifetime. If the capacity of AC motor drive is too large, it cannot offer complete protection to the
motor and motor maybe damaged. If the capacity of AC motor drive is too small, it cannot offer the
required performance and the AC motor drive maybe damaged due to overloading.
But by simply selecting the AC motor drive of the same capacity as the motor, user application
requirements cannot be met completely. Therefore, a designer should consider all the conditions,
including load type, load speed, load characteristic, operation method, rated output, rated speed,
power and the change of load capacity. The following table lists the factors you need to consider,
depending on your requirements.
Related Specification
Speed and
torque
characteristics
Item
Time
ratings
Overload
capacity
Starting
torque
Friction load and weight
load
Liquid (viscous) load
Inertia load
●
●
Load type
Load with power
transmission
Constant torque
Constant output
Decreasing torque
Decreasing output
Constant load
Load speed and
torque
characteristics
●
●
●
Shock load
Load
characteristics
●
●
●
●
Repetitive load
High starting torque
Low starting torque
Continuous operation, Short-time operation
Long-time operation at medium/low speeds
●
●
Maximum output current (instantaneous)
Constant output current (continuous)
●
●
Maximum frequency, Base frequency
Power supply transformer capacity or
percentage impedance
Voltage fluctuations and unbalance
Number of phases, single phase protection
Frequency
●
●
●
●
Mechanical friction, losses in wiring
Duty cycle modification
●
C.1 Capacity Formulas
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
C-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive|
1. When one AC motor drive operates one motor
The starting capacity should be less than 1.5x rated capacity of AC motor drive
The starting capacity=
⎛
⎞
k × N
973×η × cosϕ
GD2
N
⎜
⎜
⎟
⎟
TL +
×
≤1.5×the _ capacity _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive(kVA)
375 tA
⎝
⎠
2. When one AC motor drive operates more than one motor
2.1 The starting capacity should be less than the rated capacity of AC motor drive
≦
Acceleration time 60 seconds
„
The starting capacity=
⎡
⎢
[n
T
+ ns(ks
− 1)] = PC1 1+
(
k
s
− 1)⎤⎥⎥ ≤1.5×the _ capacity _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive(kVA)
k × N
η × cosϕ
n
s
⎢
⎢
⎣
⎥
⎦
nT
≧
Acceleration time 60 seconds
„
The starting capacity=
⎡
[
n
T
+ ns(ks
− 1)]
= PC1⎢⎢1+
(
k
s
− 1)⎤⎥⎥ ≤ the_capacity_of _ AC _ motor _ drive(kVA)
k × N
η ×cosϕ
n
s
⎢
⎣
⎥
⎦
nT
2.2 The current should be less than the rated current of AC motor drive(A)
≦
Acceleration time 60 seconds
„
⎡
⎤
n
S
nT
+ IM 1+ ⎛⎜ kS −1⎟⎞⎥ ≤1.5×the_ rated _current _of _ AC _ motor _ drive(A)
⎢
⎝
⎠
⎦
n
T
⎣
≧
Acceleration time 60 seconds
„
⎡
⎤
n
S
n
T
+ IM 1+ ⎛⎜ kS −1⎟⎞⎥ ≤ the _ rated _current _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive(A)
⎢
⎝
⎠
⎦
n
T
⎣
C-2
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive|
2.3 When it is running continuously
„
The requirement of load capacity should be less than the capacity of AC
motor drive(kVA)
The requirement of load capacity=
k × PM
η ×cosϕ
≤ the_capacity_of _ AC _ motor _ drive(kVA)
„
„
The motor capacity should be less than the capacity of AC motor drive
k × 3 ×VM × IM ×10−3 ≤ the_capacity_of _ AC _motor_drive(kVA)
The current should be less than the rated current of AC motor drive(A)
k × IM ≤ the_ rated _ current _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive(A)
Symbol explanation
: Motor shaft output for load (kW)
PM
η
: Motor efficiency (normally, approx. 0.85)
: Motor power factor (normally, approx. 0.75)
: Motor rated voltage(V)
cosϕ
V
M
: Motor rated current(A), for commercial power
IM
: Correction factor calculated from current distortion factor (1.05-1.1, depending on
PWM method)
k
: Continuous motor capacity (kVA)
: Starting current/rated current of motor
: Number of motors in parallel
: Number of simultaneously started motors
: Total inertia (GD2) calculated back to motor shaft (kg m2)
: Load torque
PC1
kS
n
n
T
S
GD2
TL
: Motor acceleration time
t
A
N
: Motor speed
C.2 General Precaution
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
C-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive|
Selection Note
1.
When the AC Motor Drive is connected directly to a large-capacity power transformer
(600kVA or above) or when a phase lead capacitor is switched, excess peak currents
may occur in the power input circuit and the converter section may be damaged. To avoid
this, use an AC input reactor (optional) before AC Motor Drive mains input to reduce the
current and improve the input power efficiency.
2.
3.
When a special motor is used or more than one motor is driven in parallel with a single
AC Motor Drive, select the AC Motor Drive current ≥1.25x(Sum of the motor rated
currents).
The starting and accel./decel. characteristics of a motor are limited by the rated current
and the overload protection of the AC Motor Drive. Compared to running the motor D.O.L.
(Direct On-Line), a lower starting torque output with AC Motor Drive can be expected. If
higher starting torque is required (such as for elevators, mixers, tooling machines, etc.)
use an AC Motor Drive of higher capacity or increase the capacities for both the motor
and the AC Motor Drive.
4.
When an error occurs on the drive, a protective circuit will be activated and the AC Motor
Drive output is turned off. Then the motor will coast to stop. For an emergency stop, an
external mechanical brake is needed to quickly stop the motor.
Parameter Settings Note
1.
The AC Motor Drive can be driven at an output frequency up to 400Hz (less for some
models) with the digital keypad. Setting errors may create a dangerous situation. For
safety, the use of the upper limit frequency function is strongly recommended.
High DC brake operating voltages and long operation time (at low frequencies) may
cause overheating of the motor. In that case, forced external motor cooling is
recommended.
2.
3.
4.
Motor accel./decel. time is determined by motor rated torque, load torque, and load inertia.
If the stall prevention function is activated, the accel./decel. time is automatically extended
to a length that the AC Motor Drive can handle. If the motor needs to decelerate within a
certain time with high load inertia that can’t be handled by the AC Motor Drive in the
required time, either use an external brake resistor and/or brake unit, depending on the
model, (to shorten deceleration time only) or increase the capacity for both the motor and
the AC Motor Drive.
C-4
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive|
C.3 How to Choose a Suitable Motor
Standard motor
When using the AC Motor Drive to operate a standard 3-phase induction motor, take the
following precautions:
1.
2.
The energy loss is greater than for an inverter duty motor.
Avoid running motor at low speed for a long time. Under this condition, the motor
temperature may rise above the motor rating due to limited airflow produced by the
motor’s fan. Consider external forced motor cooling.
3.
4.
When the standard motor operates at low speed for long time, the output load must be
decreased.
The load tolerance of a standard motor is as follows:
Load duty-cycle
25%
40%
60%
100
82
70
60
continuous
50
0
3 6 20
Frequency (Hz)
60
5.
6.
7.
If 100% continuous torque is required at low speed, it may be necessary to use a special
inverter duty motor.
Motor dynamic balance and rotor endurance should be considered once the operating
speed exceeds the rated speed (60Hz) of a standard motor.
Motor torque characteristics vary when an AC Motor Drive instead of commercial power
supply drives the motor. Check the load torque characteristics of the machine to be
connected.
8.
Because of the high carrier frequency PWM control of the VFD series, pay attention to the
following motor vibration problems:
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
C-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive|
„
„
„
Resonant mechanical vibration: anti-vibration (damping) rubbers should be
used to mount equipment that runs at varying speed.
Motor imbalance: special care is required for operation at 50 or 60 Hz and
higher frequency.
To avoid resonances, use the Skip frequencies.
9.
The motor fan will be very noisy when the motor speed exceeds 50 or 60Hz.
Special motors:
1.
Pole-changing (Dahlander) motor:
The rated current is differs from that of a standard motor. Please check before operation
and select the capacity of the AC motor drive carefully. When changing the pole number
the motor needs to be stopped first. If over current occurs during operation or
regenerative voltage is too high, please let the motor free run to stop (coast).
Submersible motor:
2.
3.
4.
5.
The rated current is higher than that of a standard motor. Please check before operation
and choose the capacity of the AC motor drive carefully. With long motor cable between
AC motor drive and motor, available motor torque is reduced.
Explosion-proof (Ex) motor:
Needs to be installed in a safe place and the wiring should comply with the (Ex)
requirements. Delta AC Motor Drives are not suitable for (Ex) areas with special
precautions.
Gear reduction motor:
The lubricating method of reduction gearbox and speed range for continuous operation
will be different and depending on brand. The lubricating function for operating long time
at low speed and for high-speed operation needs to be considered carefully.
Synchronous motor:
The rated current and starting current are higher than for standard motors. Please check
before operation and choose the capacity of the AC motor drive carefully. When the AC
motor drive operates more than one motor, please pay attention to starting and changing
the motor.
Power Transmission Mechanism
Pay attention to reduced lubrication when operating gear reduction motors, gearboxes, belts
and chains, etc. over longer periods at low speeds. At high speeds of 50/60Hz and above,
lifetime reducing noises and vibrations may occur.
Motor torque
C-6
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive|
The torque characteristics of a motor operated by an AC motor drive and commercial mains
power are different.
Below you’ll find the torque-speed characteristics of a standard motor (4-pole, 15kW):
AC motor drive
60 seconds
Motor
180
180
155
60 seconds
155
140
100
80
100
55
38
55
38
0
0
320 60
320 60
Frequency (Hz)
Base freq.: 60Hz
120
Frequency (Hz)
Base freq.: 60Hz
V/F for 220V/60Hz
120
V/F for 220V/60Hz
180
150
60 seconds
60 seconds
140
130
100
85
68
100
80
45
35
45
35
0
0
320
20
50
50
120
3
120
Frequency (Hz)
Base freq.: 50Hz
V/F for 220V/50Hz
Frequency (Hz)
Base freq.: 50Hz
V/F for 220V/50Hz
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
C-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive|
This page intentionally left blank.
C-8
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|